TW201133033A - Three-dimensional display system - Google Patents

Three-dimensional display system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201133033A
TW201133033A TW100104817A TW100104817A TW201133033A TW 201133033 A TW201133033 A TW 201133033A TW 100104817 A TW100104817 A TW 100104817A TW 100104817 A TW100104817 A TW 100104817A TW 201133033 A TW201133033 A TW 201133033A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
group
phase difference
difference plate
formula
display device
Prior art date
Application number
TW100104817A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI611213B (en
Inventor
Mitsutaka Sase
Tadahiro Kobayashi
Haruki Okawa
Original Assignee
Sumitomo Chemical Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sumitomo Chemical Co filed Critical Sumitomo Chemical Co
Publication of TW201133033A publication Critical patent/TW201133033A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI611213B publication Critical patent/TWI611213B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/13363Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B30/00Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images
    • G02B30/20Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes
    • G02B30/22Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the stereoscopic type
    • G02B30/25Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the stereoscopic type using polarisation techniques
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133528Polarisers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133602Direct backlight
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1337Surface-induced orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, e.g. by alignment layers
    • G02F1/133711Surface-induced orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, e.g. by alignment layers by organic films, e.g. polymeric films
    • G02F1/133723Polyimide, polyamide-imide
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1337Surface-induced orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, e.g. by alignment layers
    • G02F1/13378Surface-induced orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, e.g. by alignment layers by treatment of the surface, e.g. embossing, rubbing or light irradiation
    • G02F1/133784Surface-induced orientation of the liquid crystal molecules, e.g. by alignment layers by treatment of the surface, e.g. embossing, rubbing or light irradiation by rubbing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/305Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using lenticular lenses, e.g. arrangements of cylindrical lenses

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal Substances (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)

Abstract

The three-dimensional display system of this invention includes a display device for alternately displaying the right eye-use picture and the left eye-use picture, and a pair of liquid crystal shutter glasses for synchronously acting with the pictures alternately displayed by the display device. Both the display device and the glasses have a phase difference plate, at least one phase difference plate selected from the group consisting of the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses fully complies with formula (1): Re(451) <Re(549) <Re(628), where Re(ν) represents the phase difference value under the condition of wavelength being ν nm.

Description

201133033 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係關於一種立體顯示系統。 【先前技術】 作為立體顯不系統,於顯示器技術年鑒2010 p 158(曰經 BP社發行)中揭示有如下者,其包含經時性地交替顯示右 眼用圖像與左眼用圖像之顯示裝置、及具有與藉由該顯示 Ο 〇 裝置所顯示之各眼用圖像進行顯示的時序同步開閉之快門 功能之眼鏡。 【發明内容】 本發明提供如下者等: &lt;1&gt;-種立體顯示系統,其包含交替地顯示右眼用圖像 與左眼用圖像之顯示裝置、及與上述顯示裝置交替地顯示 之圖像同步動作之液晶快門眼鏡, Μ 上述顯示裝置與上述眼鏡均具有相位差板, 選自由上述顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及上述眼鏡所具 有之相位差板所組成之群中的至少一種為充分二 相位差板: q⑴之201133033 VI. Description of the Invention: [Technical Field of the Invention] The present invention relates to a stereoscopic display system. [Prior Art] As a stereoscopic display system, the display technology yearbook 2010 p 158 (issued by BP) discloses that the right eye image and the left eye image are alternately displayed over time. The display device and the glasses having the shutter function of opening and closing in synchronization with the timing of displaying the respective ophthalmic images displayed by the display device. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides a stereoscopic display system including a display device that alternately displays an image for a right eye and an image for a left eye, and an alternate display with the display device. The liquid crystal shutter glasses for image synchronization operation, the display device and the glasses each have a phase difference plate, and at least one of a phase difference plate of the display device and a phase difference plate of the glasses is selected. For the full two phase difference plate: q (1)

Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) ⑴ [式中,Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]; &lt;2&gt;如&lt;1&gt;之立體顯示系統,其中顯示裝置所具有之相位 差板及眼鏡所具有之相位差板之兩者為充分滿足式二:: &lt;3&gt;如&lt;1&gt;或&lt;2&gt;之立體顯示系統, 其中顯示裝 置具有將 I54080.doc 201133033 直線偏光轉換為圓偏光之相位差板,且眼鏡1古姑π 一 q將圓偏光 轉換為直線偏光之相位差板; &lt;4&gt;如&lt;1&gt;至&lt;3&gt;中任一項之立體顯示系統,其中充八高 足式(1)之相位差板係藉由使聚合性液晶化合物進行聚人/ 獲得者; ° @ &lt;5&gt;如&lt;4&gt;之立體顯示系統,其中聚合性液晶化合 (Α)所表示之化合物: ^ L1-G1-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [式中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含之兀 電子數Νπ為12以上、22以下, D1及D2分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇_〇…_〇 °-CR1r2, ' -0-CO- 、-0-C( = S)-、—cr^r2-、—CRiR^-CR^R4·、 、-CR^R2-。-、,Crir2_〇_cr3r4、cr1r2 〇·⑺ cWr2-、-criR2_〇_co_cr3r4·、_cr1r2_c〇 〇 cr3r4、 _NRl-CR2R3-、-CRT-NR3-、-CO-NR1-或 _NRi_c〇… R、R2、R3及M分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原 1〜4之烷基, 火取 該脂環 該脂環 G1及G2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基 式烴基中所含之亞甲基可經_〇_、各或侧-取代 式烴基中所含之次甲基可經下式 —N— 取代, ’選自由L1及L2所組Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [wherein, Re(v) represents a phase difference value at a wavelength of v nm]; &lt;2&gt; such as a stereoscopic display system of &lt;1&gt; The phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses are both stereoscopic display systems that satisfy the formula 2:: &lt;3&gt;, &lt;1&gt; or &lt;2&gt;, wherein the display device has Converting the linear polarization of I54080.doc 201133033 into a phase difference plate of circular polarization, and converting the circular polarization into a phase difference plate of linear polarization by the glasses 1; &lt;4&gt; such as &lt;1&gt; to &lt;3&gt; A stereoscopic display system according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the phase difference plate of the high-pressure type (1) is obtained by causing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound to be aggregated/acquired; ° @ &lt;5&gt; such as &lt;4&gt; A display system in which a compound represented by a polymerizable liquid crystal compound (Α): ^ L1-G1-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) wherein Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the aromatic ring The number of 兀 electrons contained in Ν is 12 or more and 22 or less, and D1 and D2 independently represent a single bond, _c〇_〇..._〇°-CR1r2, '-0-CO-,-0-C(=S) -, -cr^r2-, -CRi R^-CR^R4·, , -CR^R2-. -,,Crir2_〇_cr3r4, cr1r2 〇·(7) cWr2-, -criR2_〇_co_cr3r4·, _cr1r2_c〇〇cr3r4, _NRl-CR2R3-, -CRT-NR3-, -CO-NR1- or _NRi_c〇... R, R2, R3 and M each independently represent a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group of a fluorogenic group of 1 to 4, and the alicyclic ring G1 and G2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of 5 to 8. The methylene group contained in the group may be substituted by _〇_, the methine group contained in each or a side-substituted hydrocarbon group may be substituted by the following formula -N-, which is selected from the group consisting of L1 and L2.

Ll及L2分別獨立表示有機基,其中 154080.doc 201133033 成之群中之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基]; &lt;6&gt;如&lt;5&gt;之立體顯示系統,其中Ll為式(B)所表示之 基’且L2為式(C)所表示之基: P^F^CB^A1)^1- (B) P2-F2-(B2-A2)rE2- (〇 [式中,B、B、E及E2分別獨立表示_CR5r6_、_CH2_CH2_ 、-〇-、-S-、-C〇-〇_、_0_C0_、_〇_c〇_〇、c( = s)_〇_ ❹Ll and L2 each independently represent an organic group, wherein at least one of the group of 154080.doc 201133033 is a group having a polymerizable group]; &lt;6&gt; a stereoscopic display system of &lt;5&gt;, wherein L1 is a formula ( B) The base represented by ' and L2 is the base represented by the formula (C): P^F^CB^A1)^1- (B) P2-F2-(B2-A2)rE2- (〇[ B, B, E, and E2 independently represent _CR5r6_, _CH2_CH2_, -〇-, -S-, -C〇-〇_, _0_C0_, _〇_c〇_〇, c( = s)_〇_ ❹

G 〇 C( S) -0-C(-S)-0- ' -CO-NR5- x -NR5-CO- &gt; -〇-CH2-、_CH2-0-、-S-CH2-、-CH2-S-或單鍵, R及R刀別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數1〜4之烧 基, A1及A2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基或碳數 6〜18之2價芳香族烴基,該脂環式烴基中所含之亞曱基可 經-Ο-、-S-或-NH_取代,該脂環式烴基中所含之次甲基可 經下式 土 取代, k及1分別獨立表示〇〜3之整數, F1及F2表示碳數卜]^之2價脂肪族烴基, P表不聚合性基, p2表示氫原子或聚合性基]; &lt;一7&gt;如&lt;5&gt;或&lt;6&gt;之立體顯示系统,其中心為式(μ)所 表不之基: 154080.doc 201133033G 〇C( S) -0-C(-S)-0- ' -CO-NR5- x -NR5-CO- &gt; -〇-CH2-, _CH2-0-, -S-CH2-, -CH2 -S- or a single bond, R and R are independently represented by a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or a carbon number of 1 to 4, and A1 and A2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group or a carbon number of 5 to 8 carbon atoms. a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group of 6 to 18, wherein the fluorenylene group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -Ο-, -S- or -NH_, and the methine group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be Substituted by the following formula, k and 1 respectively represent an integer of 〇~3, F1 and F2 represent a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group of carbon number, P represents a polymerizable group, and p2 represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group] ; &lt;a7&gt; such as &lt;5&gt; or &lt;6&gt; stereoscopic display system, whose center is based on formula (μ): 154080.doc 201133033

[式中Z表示鹵素原子、碳數1〜6之烧基、氰基、硝基、 -NR7R8、-SR7, R及R8表示氫原子或碳數卜6之烷基, Q1 表示-S-、-〇-或 _nr9_, R9表示氫原子或碳數丨〜4之烷基, Y2表示可具有取代基之碳數6〜12之芳香族烴基、或可具 有取代基之碳數3〜12之芳香族雜環式基, η表示0〜2之整數]; &lt;8&gt;如&lt;5&gt;至&lt;7&gt;中任一項之立體顯示系統,其中〇1及〇2 均為環己烧-1,4-二基; &lt;9&gt;如&lt;5〉至&lt;8&gt;中任一項之立體顯示系統,其中聚合性 基分別獨立為選自*丙烯醯氧基及曱基丙烯醯氧基所組成 之群中之至少1種; 其 &lt;】〇&gt;如請求項&lt;卜至&lt;3&gt;中任一項之立體顯示系統 中充分滿足式(1)之相位差板係使膜延伸而獲得者. &lt;nw之立體顯示㈣,其中膜包=自聚碳酸醋 之結構單元、源自聚胺基甲酸s旨之結構單^源自聚胺基 甲酸酯脲之結構單元; %包含源自具有 及萘骨架所組成 &lt;12&gt;如&lt;11&gt;之立體顯示系統,其中膜進 選自由咔唑骨架、苐骨架、笨并噻唑骨架 154080.doc 201133033 之群中之至少1種的聚合性化合物之結構單元; &lt; 1 3 &gt; —種立體顯示系統用眼鏡,其係與顯示 _ 展罝父替地 顯示之圖像同步動作之液晶快門眼鏡,且具有充分、高 (I)之相位差板:[wherein Z represents a halogen atom, a carbon group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR7R8, -SR7, R and R8 represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of carbon number 6, and Q1 represents -S-, -〇- or _nr9_, R9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having a carbon number of 丨4, and Y2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a carbon number of 3 to 12 which may have a substituent And the steric display system of any one of &lt;5&gt; to &lt;7&gt; The stereoscopic display system of any one of <5> to <8>, wherein the polymerizable groups are each independently selected from the group consisting of *propenyloxy group and mercaptopropene fluorene. At least one of the group consisting of oxy groups; and a phase difference plate system satisfying the formula (1) in a stereoscopic display system according to any one of the claims &lt;&lt;&gt;&gt; to &lt;3&gt; The film is extended to obtain a stereoscopic display (4), wherein the film package = the structural unit derived from the polycarbonate, the structure derived from the polyaminocarboxylic acid, and the structure derived from the polyurethane urea Unit; % contains originated from &lt;12&gt; The stereoscopic display system of &lt;12&gt;, wherein the film is formed into a structure of at least one polymerizable compound selected from the group consisting of a carbazole skeleton, an anthracene skeleton, and a stupid thiazole skeleton 154080.doc 201133033 Unit; &lt; 1 3 &gt; - Stereoscopic display system glasses, which are liquid crystal shutter glasses that are synchronized with the image displayed by the display, and have a sufficient and high (I) phase difference plate:

Re(45l)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) ⑴ [式(I )中’ Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]; &lt;14&gt;如&lt;13&gt;之立體顯示系統用眼鏡,其中充分滿足弋Re(45l)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [Re (v) in the formula (I) represents the phase difference value at the wavelength v nm]; &lt;14&gt; as the stereo of &lt;13&gt; Display system glasses, which fully satisfy 弋

(1)之相位差板係使式(A)所表示之化合物進行聚合而獲得 者:(1) The phase difference plate is obtained by polymerizing a compound represented by the formula (A):

Ll-Gl~Ol-Ar-O2-G2-L2 (A) [式(A)中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含 之π電子數為12以上、22以下, D及D分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇-0-、-O-CO-、-C(=s)-〇 ' -〇-C( = S)- ^ -CR'R2- . -CR^^CR^4- &gt; -O-CR^2. 、-CRV-O-、_CRiR2_〇 CR3R4_、_CRiR2 〇 c〇_、〇 c〇_ CR^R2-、-crY-o-co-cr^r4-、-CRT-CO-O-CR^R4-、 -Nr1_Cr2r3-、-CR^R^-NR3-、-CO-NR1-或-NRi-CO-, R、R、R及R4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數 1〜4之烷基, G1及G2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基,該脂環 式烴基中所含之亞曱基可經-0-、-S-或-NH-取代,該脂環 式烴基中所含之次曱基可經下式 —N— 154080.doc 201133033 取代, L1及L2分別獨立表示有機基,其中,選自由^及^所組 成之群中之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基]; &lt;15&gt;如&lt;13&gt;之立體顯示系統用眼鏡,其中充分滿足式 (1)之相位差板係使膜延伸而獲得者; &lt;16&gt;—種立體顯示系統用顯示裝置,其係交替地顯示右 眼用圖像與左眼用圖像之顯示裝置,且具有充分滿足式(ι) 之相位差板:Ll-Gl~Ol-Ar-O2-G2-L2 (A) [In the formula (A), Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the number of π electrons contained in the aromatic ring is 12 or more and 22 or less. D and D respectively represent a single bond, _c〇-0-, -O-CO-, -C(=s)-〇' -〇-C( = S)- ^ -CR'R2- . -CR^^ CR^4- &gt; -O-CR^2., -CRV-O-, _CRiR2_〇CR3R4_, _CRiR2 〇c〇_, 〇c〇_ CR^R2-, -crY-o-co-cr^r4 -, -CRT-CO-O-CR^R4-, -Nr1_Cr2r3-, -CR^R^-NR3-, -CO-NR1- or -NRi-CO-, R, R, R and R4 each independently represent hydrogen An atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and G1 and G2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, and the fluorenylene group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be via -0- Substituting -S- or -NH-, the sulfhydryl group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by the following formula -N-154080.doc 201133033, wherein L1 and L2 each independently represent an organic group, wherein ^ At least one of the group consisting of a polymerizable group; &lt;15&gt; The glasses for stereoscopic display systems of <13>, wherein the phase difference plate system sufficiently satisfying the formula (1) is used to extend the film And the winner; &lt;16&gt; A display device is used which alternately displays a display device for an image for a right eye and an image for a left eye, and has a phase difference plate which satisfies the formula (1):

Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) ⑴ [式(1)中’ Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]; &lt;17&gt;如&lt;16&gt;之立體顯示系統用顯示裝置,其中充分滿足 式(1)之相位差板係使式(A)所表示之化合物進行聚合而 得者: L1-G,-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [式(A)中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含 之π電子數為12以上、22以下, D1及D2分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇〇_、_〇c〇、卜y〜 、-〇-C( = S)-、_CRiR、、_crir2_cr3r4 〇cr1r2_ 、-crY-o-、_cr1r2_〇_cr3r4_、cr1r2 〇 c〇 〇 CR^2- ^ -CR&gt;R^〇.c〇-CR3R^ , -CR1R2-C〇-〇.CR3R4.. -NR^CR2^- &gt; -CR^^NR3- . -CO-NR1-^-NRi.c〇., R、R、R3及r4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數 1〜4之烷基, G1及G2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基,該脂環 154080.doc 201133033 或-NH-取代,該脂環 式烴基中所含之亞甲基可經_〇_、 式烴基中所含之次曱基可經下式 —N— 取代 L及L分別獨立表示有機美,盆士 ,機基,其中,選自由L1及L2所 成之群中之至少1種為且古 裡馮具有聚合性基之基]; &lt;18&gt;如&lt;16&gt;之立體顯示系 式(1)之相位差板係使膜延伸 【實施方式】Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [Re (v) in the formula (1) represents the phase difference at the wavelength v nm]; &lt;17&gt; as in the &lt;16&gt; A display device for a display system in which a phase difference plate sufficiently satisfying the formula (1) is obtained by polymerizing a compound represented by the formula (A): L1-G, -D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [In the formula (A), Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the number of π electrons contained in the aromatic ring is 12 or more and 22 or less, and D1 and D2 each independently represent a single bond, _c〇〇_, _〇 C〇, 卜 y~ , -〇-C( = S)-, _CRiR, _crir2_cr3r4 〇cr1r2_, -crY-o-, _cr1r2_〇_cr3r4_, cr1r2 〇c〇〇CR^2- ^ -CR&gt;R ^〇.c〇-CR3R^ , -CR1R2-C〇-〇.CR3R4.. -NR^CR2^- &gt; -CR^^NR3- . -CO-NR1-^-NRi.c〇., R, R, R3 and r4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and G1 and G2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, the alicyclic ring 154080.doc 201133033 or -NH-substitution, the methylene group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be independently represented by the following formula: N-substituting L and L respectively The machine is beautiful, the potter, and the machine base, wherein at least one selected from the group consisting of L1 and L2 is a base of the Guli von having a polymerizable group]; &lt;18&gt; is a stereoscopic display such as &lt;16&gt; The phase difference plate of the formula (1) is used to extend the film [embodiment]

統用顯示裝置,其中充分滿足 而獲得者。 本發月之立體顯不系統為如下者:包含交替地顯示右眼 用圖像與左眼用圖像之顯示裝置、及與上述顯示裝置交替 地顯示之圖像同步動作之液晶快門眼鏡, 上述顯示裝置與上述眼鏡均具有相位差板, 選自由上述顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及上述眼鏡所具 有之相位差板所組成之群中的至少一種為充分滿足式⑴之 相位差板。A display device is used in which the person is fully satisfied. The stereoscopic display system of the present month includes: a display device that alternately displays an image for a right eye and an image for a left eye, and a liquid crystal shutter glasses that operates in synchronization with an image displayed alternately with the display device, The display device and the glasses each have a phase difference plate, and at least one selected from the group consisting of the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses is a phase difference plate that satisfies the formula (1).

Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [式中,Re(v)表示波長vnm下之相位差值] 即本發明之立體顯示系統係選自由顯示裝置及眼鏡所 、、且成之群中之至少1種為具有充分滿足式(丨)之相位差板之 裝置者。 所謂「右眼用圖像」’係指應藉由右眼而視認之圖像資 訊’所謂「左眼用圖像」,係指應藉由左眼而視認之圖像 154080.doc 201133033 資訊。 液晶快門眼鏡係藉由液晶胞之驅動,使自顯示裝置射出 之光穿透或不穿透之眼鏡,與上述顯示裝置交替地顯示之 圖像同步動作。此處’所謂「同步動作」,係指於顯示裝 置顯示右眼用圖像之情形時,該眼鏡之右眼側使自顯示裝 置射出之光穿透’同時左眼側不使自顯示裝置射出之光穿 透’以使得用觀察者之右眼觀察該右眼用圖像,另一方 面’於顯示裝置顯示左眼用圖像之情形時,該眼鏡之左眼 侧使自顯示裝置射出之光穿透,同時右眼側不使自顯示裝 置射出之光穿透,以使得用觀察者之左眼觀察該左眼用圖 像。 於本發明之顯示系統中,顯示裝置與眼鏡均具有相位差 板。 於本說明書中,所謂「相位差板」,係指可使光穿透, 且具有光學功能之物體。所謂光學功能,係指折射、雙折 射等。相位差板係用以將直線偏光轉換為圓偏光或楕圓偏 光’或反之將圓偏光或楕圓偏光轉換為直線偏光。 相位差板可為形成於基板上者。又’亦可為膜狀之相位 差板。 作為顯示裝置,可列舉:陰極射線管方式顯示裝置、液 晶顯示裝置、電漿顯示裝置、有機電致發光(有機EL,Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [wherein, Re(v) represents a phase difference at a wavelength of vnm], that is, the stereoscopic display system of the present invention is selected from a display device and glasses At least one of the group and the group is a device having a phase difference plate that satisfies the formula (丨). The "image for the right eye" refers to image information that should be viewed by the right eye. The so-called "image for the left eye" refers to the image that should be viewed by the left eye. 154080.doc 201133033 Information. The liquid crystal shutter glasses are driven by the liquid crystal cells to cause the glasses that are emitted or not penetrated by the light emitted from the display device to operate in synchronization with the images alternately displayed by the display device. Here, the term "synchronous action" means that when the display device displays an image for the right eye, the right eye side of the eyeglass penetrates the light emitted from the display device while the left eye side does not emit the self-display device. The light penetrates 'so that the right eye image is viewed with the observer's right eye, and the left eye side of the glasses is emitted from the display device when the display device displays the image for the left eye. The light penetrates while the right eye side does not penetrate the light emitted from the display device so that the left eye image is observed with the observer's left eye. In the display system of the present invention, both the display device and the glasses have a phase difference plate. In the present specification, the term "phase difference plate" means an object that allows light to pass through and has an optical function. The so-called optical function refers to refraction, birefringence, and the like. The phase difference plate is used to convert linearly polarized light into circularly polarized or rounded polarized light' or vice versa to convert circularly polarized or rounded polarized light into linearly polarized light. The phase difference plate may be formed on a substrate. Also, it may be a film-like phase difference plate. Examples of the display device include a cathode ray tube type display device, a liquid crystal display device, a plasma display device, and organic electroluminescence (organic EL,

Organic Electro-Luminescence)顯示裝置等。 顯示裝置高速地交替切換右眼用圖像與左眼用圖像而顯 示。圖像之切換速度(圖像之顯示週期)理想的是觀察者對 154080.doc •10· 201133033 性之程度’若切換速度 察到之圖像感覺到自然 所觀察到之圖像感覺到自然之連續 未達30 Hz,則觀察者難以對所觀 之連續性,因此顯示裝置較佳為能夠㈣&amp;以上之圖像 切換速度,交替切換右眼用圖像與左眼用圖像而顯示者。Organic Electro-Luminescence) display device and the like. The display device displays the image for the right eye and the image for the left eye alternately at high speed. The switching speed of the image (the display period of the image) is ideally the observer's degree of 154080.doc •10· 201133033 'If the image is switched to the speed, the image observed naturally feels natural. If the continuousness is less than 30 Hz, it is difficult for the observer to observe the continuity. Therefore, it is preferable that the display device can display the image for the right eye and the image for the left eye alternately by the image switching speed of (4) &amp;

液晶快門眼鏡係具有液晶快門功能之眼鏡,液晶快門係 根據顯示裝置之圖像切換而動作,控制到達觀察者之雙眼 之圖像資訊。液晶快門理想的是於液晶快門關閉之狀態 下,即不使自顯示裝置射出之光穿透之情形時對自顯示 裝置射出之光具有充分之遮光性,且具有可與顯示裝置之 圖像切換同步動作之高速響應性。 作為上述液晶快門,可舉出夾持於2片偏光板間之液晶 胞及於觀察者侧配置i片偏光板之液晶胞。就降低3〇串擾 之方面而言,較佳為前者之夹持於2片偏光板間之液晶 胞’就觀察者所觀察到之圖像之亮度之方面而言,較佳為 於觀察者側配置1片偏光板之液晶胞。 選自由上述顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及上述眼鏡所具 有之相位差板所組成之群中的至少1種充分滿足式The liquid crystal shutter glasses are glasses having a liquid crystal shutter function, and the liquid crystal shutters operate in accordance with image switching of the display device, and control image information of both eyes of the observer. The liquid crystal shutter preferably has a sufficient light-shielding property for light emitted from the display device in a state where the liquid crystal shutter is closed, that is, a light that is not emitted from the display device, and has an image switchable with the display device. High-speed responsiveness of synchronized actions. The liquid crystal shutter may be a liquid crystal cell sandwiched between two polarizing plates and a liquid crystal cell in which an i-plate polarizing plate is disposed on the observer side. In terms of reducing the crosstalk of the 3 〇 crosstalk, it is preferable that the liquid crystal cell held between the two polarizing plates of the former is preferably on the observer side in terms of the brightness of the image observed by the observer. Configure the liquid crystal cell of one polarizing plate. At least one of the group consisting of the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate included in the glasses is sufficiently satisfied

Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) ⑴ [式中’ Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值] 以下’有時將充分滿足式(1)之相位差板稱作「相位差 板⑴」。 藉由使上述顯示裝置、上述眼鏡或其兩者所具有之相位 差板充分滿足式(1),可實現均勻之偏光轉換,觀察者所觀 察到之圖像之對比度及顏色的角度依賴性變小。 154080.doc -11 - 201133033 於觀察者通過立體顯示用眼鏡來觀察藉由立體顯示裝置 而顯不之圖像之情形時,即便觀察者位於該立體顯示裝置 之正面,若觀察者扭著脖子或歪著脖子,則觀察者所觀察 到之圖像之對比度或顏色仍會發生變化。於本說明書中, 將此種對比度或顏色由於觀察角度不同而發生變化之情形 稱作「具有角度依賴性」,將根據對比度或顏色由於觀察 角度不同而發生之變化較小之情形稱作「角度依賴性較 小」。 本發明之立體顯示系統包括:顯示裝置所具有之相位差 板為相位差板(1),眼鏡所具有之相位差板並非相位差板 (1)之立體顯示系統;顯示裝置所具有之相位差板為並非相 位差板(1)者,眼鏡所具有之相位差板為相位差板(1)之立 體顯示系統;及顯示裝置所具有之相位差板為相位差板 (1),眼鏡所具有之相位差板亦為相位差板(1)之立體顯示 系統;較佳為顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及眼鏡所具有之 相位差板之兩者均為相位差板(丨)的立體顯示系統。藉由使 顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及眼鏡所具有之相位差板之兩 者為相位差板(1),可進一步降低觀察者所觀察到之圖像之 對比度及顏色之角度依賴性。 相位差板(1)之相位差值為50〜500 nm,較佳為1〇〇〜3〇〇 相位差板(1)為寬頻帶λ/4板之情形時,Re(549)較佳為 113-163 nm,更佳為120〜140 nm,進而更佳為122〜138 nm。相位差板⑴為寬頻帶λ/2板之情形時,Re(549)較佳為 154080.doc •12· 201133033 250〜300 nm ’更佳為270~280 nm,進而更佳為273-277 nm ° 右相位差板(1)之相位差值為上述值,則存在可對廣範 圍之波長之光均勻地進行偏光轉換之傾向,故而較佳。 此處’所謂寬頻帶λ/4板’係指對於各波長之光,表現 其1/4之相位差值之相位差板,所謂寬頻帶λ/2板,係指對 於各波長之光’表現其1/2之相位差值之相位差板。 於本說明書中,所謂50〜5〇0,係指5〇以上、500以下。 較佳為顯示裝置為具有將直線偏光轉換為圓偏光之相位 差板之裝置,且眼鏡為具有將圓偏光轉換為直線偏光之相 位差板之裝置。藉由將顯示裝置所發出之圖像資訊轉換為 圓偏光而送至眼鏡,可降低對比度及顏色之角度依賴性。 相位差板(1)之膜厚較佳為0.1〜100 μΓη。 由於相位差值Re(v)(v表示波長)為雙折射率與膜厚之 積’可藉由在上述範圍内改變相位差板之膜厚而進行調 整。 本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置較佳為進而具有偏光 板’更佳為具有包含相位差板(1)之圓偏光板者。藉由將作 為λ/4板之相位差值經調整之相位差板(1)與偏光板組合, 可製作圓偏光板。藉由將相位差板(1)之相位差值Re(549) 設為113〜163 11111、較佳為120〜14〇11111、更佳為122〜13 8 nm ’可製成λ/4板。 本發明之立體顯示系統之液晶快門眼鏡較佳為進而具有 偏光板’更佳為具有包含相位差板(1)之圓偏光板者。藉由 154080.doc -13· 201133033 將作為λ/4板之相位差值經調整之相位差板〇)與偏光板組 合’可製作圓偏光板。藉由將相位差板(1)之相位差值 Re(549)設為113〜163 nm、較佳為12〇〜14〇 nm、更佳為 122〜138 nm,可製成λ/4板。 作為偏光板’只要為具有偏光功能之膜即可,可列舉: 使碘或二色性色素吸附於聚乙烯醇系膜上並使將延伸而成 之膜、將聚乙烯醇系膜延伸並使其吸附碘或二色性色素而 成之膜等。 圓偏光板可藉由以相位差板(1)之遲相軸方向與偏光板 之吸收軸方向形成40〜50度、較佳為42〜48度之角度之方式 配置相位差板(1)與偏光板而製作。構成圓偏光板之相位差 板與偏光板較佳為使用接合劑進行貼合。作為接合劑,較 佳為不具有相位差值之接合劑。 於本發明之立體顯示系統包含具有相位差板〇)之顯示 裝置及具有相位差板(1)之液晶快門眼鏡之情形時,較佳為 顯不裝置之相位差板(1)之波長分散性與眼鏡之相位差板 (!)之波長分散性相近。 以下,一面參照圖式,一面對本發明之立體顯示系統進 行說明。 圖1係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置 之一的半穿透式液晶顯示裝置31Α之概略圖。 圖2係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示沪置 之一的半穿透式液晶顯示裝置31Β之概略圖。 半穿透式顯示裝置31Α及31Β係能夠以反射模式及/或穿 154080.doc •14· 201133033 透模式進行驅動之顯示裝置。 半穿透式液日a顯不裝置31A為具有相位差板(1)之顯示裝 置,其包含背光源32、偏光板33、相位差板34、基材35、 像素3 6、液b曰層3 7、如面透明電極38、彩色遽光片39、偏 • 光板40、基材41及相位差板(1)42,且以背光源32成為半穿 透式液晶顯示裝置之背面側之方式進行配置,進而自背光 源3 2侧(为面側)依序配置偏光板3 3、相位差板3 4、基材 35、像素36、液晶層37、前面透明電極38、彩色渡光片 ® 39、偏光板40、基材41、相位差板(1)42。 半牙透式液BB顯不裝置31B亦為具有相位差板(1)之顯示 裝置’其包含背光源32、偏光板33、相位差板34、基材 35、像素36、液晶層37、前面透明電極38、偏光板4〇、彩 色濾光片39、基材41及相位差板(1)42,且以背光源32成為 半穿透式液晶顯示裝置之背面侧之方式進行配置,進而自 背光源32側(背面側)依序配置偏光板33、相位差板34、基 ◎ 材35、像素36、液晶層37、前面透明電極38、偏光板4〇、 彩色濾光片39、基材41、相位差板(1)42。半穿透式液晶顯 示裝置31A及3 1B均包含彩色濾光片39,亦可為不包含彩 色濾光片3 9之半穿透式液晶顯示裝置。半穿透式液晶顯示 -裝置31A及31B均包含基材41,亦可為不包含基材41之半 穿透式液晶顯示裝置。 像素36被副分割成第1及第2子像素,將第1子像素稱作 反射子像素,將第2子像素稱作穿透子像素。第1子像素包 含兼作反射部之由铭箔等製造之背面反射電極部36A,第2 154080.doc -15· 201133033 子像素包含例如由IT〇(Indiuin Tin 〇xide,氧化銦錫)等製 造之透明之背面透明電極部36B。因此,背面反射電極部 36A為反射像素部,背面透明電極部36B為穿透像素部。 圖3〜圖7係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示 裝置之一的平板顯示裝置之概略圖。 圖3係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置 之一的液晶顯示裝置51之概略圖。液晶顯示裝置51具有相 位差板(1),進而包含背光源52、偏光板53、液晶胞54及偏 光板55,且以背光源52成為液晶顯示裝置之背面侧之方式 進行配置,進而自背光源52側(背面側)依序配置偏光板 53、液晶胞54、偏光板55、相位差板(1)56。於液晶胞54之 前後配置偏光板53及偏光板55,於與背光源52為相反側 (前面側)之偏光板55的與相對於液晶胞54之面為相反側的 面側設置相位差板(1 )56。 圖4係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置 之一的液晶顯示裝置以外之平板顯示裝置61之概略圖。作 為液晶顯示裝置以外之平板顯示裝置61,可列舉:有機EL 顯示裝置、電漿顯示裝置、場發射顯示裝置(FED,FieldRe(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [In the formula, Re (v) represents the phase difference at the wavelength v nm] The following 'sometimes will fully satisfy the phase difference plate of the formula (1) It is called "phase difference plate (1)". By sufficiently satisfying the phase difference plate of the display device, the glasses, or both, the uniform polarization conversion can be realized, and the contrast and color angle dependence of the image observed by the observer can be realized. small. 154080.doc -11 - 201133033 When the observer observes the image displayed by the stereoscopic display device through the stereoscopic display glasses, even if the observer is located on the front side of the stereoscopic display device, if the observer twists the neck or When you lick your neck, the contrast or color of the image observed by the observer will still change. In this specification, the case where such contrast or color changes due to the difference in observation angle is referred to as "angle-dependent", and the case where the change in contrast or color due to the difference in observation angle is small is called "angle". Less dependent." The stereoscopic display system of the present invention comprises: the phase difference plate of the display device is a phase difference plate (1), the phase difference plate of the glasses is not a stereoscopic display system of the phase difference plate (1); and the phase difference of the display device The plate is not a phase difference plate (1), the phase difference plate of the glasses is a stereoscopic display system of the phase difference plate (1); and the phase difference plate of the display device is a phase difference plate (1), and the glasses have The phase difference plate is also a stereoscopic display system of the phase difference plate (1); preferably, the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses are both stereoscopic displays of the phase difference plate (丨) system. By making the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses as the phase difference plate (1), the contrast of the image observed by the observer and the angular dependence of the color can be further reduced. When the phase difference plate (1) has a phase difference of 50 to 500 nm, preferably 1 〇〇 to 3 〇〇, the phase difference plate (1) is a wide band λ/4 plate, and Re (549) is preferably 113-163 nm, more preferably 120 to 140 nm, and even more preferably 122 to 138 nm. When the phase difference plate (1) is a wide band λ/2 plate, Re (549) is preferably 154080.doc • 12·201133033 250 to 300 nm 'more preferably 270 to 280 nm, and even more preferably 273 to 277 nm. ° When the phase difference value of the right phase difference plate (1) is the above value, there is a tendency that the light of a wide range of wavelengths can be uniformly polarized, which is preferable. Here, the term "wideband λ/4 plate" refers to a phase difference plate that exhibits a phase difference of 1/4 for light of each wavelength. The so-called broadband λ/2 plate refers to the performance of light for each wavelength. A phase difference plate with a phase difference of 1/2. In the present specification, 50 to 5 〇 0 means 5 〇 or more and 500 or less. Preferably, the display device is a device having a phase difference plate for converting linearly polarized light into circularly polarized light, and the lens is a device having a phase difference plate for converting circularly polarized light into linearly polarized light. By converting the image information from the display device into circularly polarized light and feeding it to the glasses, the contrast and color angle dependence can be reduced. The film thickness of the phase difference plate (1) is preferably from 0.1 to 100 μΓ. Since the phase difference value Re(v) (v represents the wavelength) is the product of the birefringence and the film thickness, it can be adjusted by changing the film thickness of the phase difference plate within the above range. The display device of the stereoscopic display system of the present invention preferably further has a polarizing plate', and more preferably has a circularly polarizing plate including the phase difference plate (1). A circular polarizing plate can be produced by combining a phase difference plate (1) adjusted as a phase difference of the λ/4 plate with a polarizing plate. The λ/4 plate can be formed by setting the phase difference value Re (549) of the phase difference plate (1) to 113 to 163 11111, preferably 120 to 14 〇 11111, and more preferably 122 to 13 8 nm '. The liquid crystal shutter glasses of the stereoscopic display system of the present invention preferably further have a polarizing plate', and more preferably have a circular polarizing plate including the phase difference plate (1). A circular polarizing plate can be produced by using 154080.doc -13· 201133033 as a phase difference plate of the λ/4 plate with a phase difference plate adjusted to be combined with a polarizing plate. The λ/4 plate can be formed by setting the phase difference value Re (549) of the phase difference plate (1) to 113 to 163 nm, preferably 12 〇 to 14 〇 nm, more preferably 122 to 138 nm. The polarizing plate is not particularly limited as long as it is a film having a polarizing function, and a film obtained by adsorbing iodine or a dichroic dye on a polyvinyl alcohol film and extending the polyvinyl alcohol film is used. It is a film obtained by adsorbing iodine or a dichroic dye. The circularly polarizing plate can be arranged with the phase difference plate (1) by forming an angle of 40 to 50 degrees, preferably 42 to 48 degrees, in the direction of the slow axis of the phase difference plate (1) and the absorption axis direction of the polarizing plate. Made with a polarizing plate. The phase difference plate and the polarizing plate constituting the circular polarizing plate are preferably bonded together using a bonding agent. As the bonding agent, a bonding agent which does not have a phase difference value is preferable. In the case where the stereoscopic display system of the present invention includes a display device having a phase difference plate and a liquid crystal shutter glass having a phase difference plate (1), it is preferable to disperse the wavelength of the phase difference plate (1) of the display device. The wavelength dispersion of the phase difference plate (!) of the glasses is similar. Hereinafter, a stereoscopic display system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing a transflective liquid crystal display device 31 as one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic view showing a transflective liquid crystal display device 31 as one of the display booths constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The transflective display devices 31 and 31 are display devices that can be driven in a reflective mode and/or in a transmissive mode of 154080.doc •14·201133033. The semi-transmissive liquid-day display device 31A is a display device having a phase difference plate (1), and includes a backlight 32, a polarizing plate 33, a phase difference plate 34, a substrate 35, a pixel 36, and a liquid b layer. 3, such as the surface transparent electrode 38, the color light-emitting sheet 39, the polarizing plate 40, the substrate 41, and the phase difference plate (1) 42, and the backlight 32 becomes the back side of the transflective liquid crystal display device. In this configuration, the polarizing plate 3 3 , the phase difference plate 34 , the substrate 35 , the pixel 36 , the liquid crystal layer 37 , the front transparent electrode 38 , and the color light-passing sheet are sequentially disposed from the backlight 3 2 side (the surface side). 39. A polarizing plate 40, a substrate 41, and a phase difference plate (1) 42. The half-teeth liquid BB display device 31B is also a display device having a phase difference plate (1) which includes a backlight 32, a polarizing plate 33, a phase difference plate 34, a substrate 35, a pixel 36, a liquid crystal layer 37, and a front surface. The transparent electrode 38, the polarizing plate 4, the color filter 39, the substrate 41, and the phase difference plate (1) 42 are disposed such that the backlight 32 becomes the back side of the transflective liquid crystal display device, and further The polarizing plate 33, the phase difference plate 34, the base material 35, the pixel 36, the liquid crystal layer 37, the front transparent electrode 38, the polarizing plate 4, the color filter 39, and the substrate are disposed in this order on the backlight 32 side (back side). 41. Phase difference plate (1) 42. The transflective liquid crystal display devices 31A and 31B each include a color filter 39, and may be a transflective liquid crystal display device that does not include the color filter 39. The transflective liquid crystal display device 31A and 31B each include a substrate 41 or a transflective liquid crystal display device which does not include the substrate 41. The pixel 36 is subdivided into first and second sub-pixels, the first sub-pixel is referred to as a reflective sub-pixel, and the second sub-pixel is referred to as a transmissive sub-pixel. The first sub-pixel includes a back surface reflective electrode portion 36A which is also made of a foil or the like as a reflection portion, and the second pixel includes, for example, an IT (Indiuin Tin idexide, indium tin oxide) or the like. Transparent back surface transparent electrode portion 36B. Therefore, the back surface reflective electrode portion 36A is a reflective pixel portion, and the back surface transparent electrode portion 36B is a penetrating pixel portion. 3 to 7 are schematic views showing a flat panel display device which is one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. Fig. 3 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 51 as one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The liquid crystal display device 51 includes a phase difference plate (1), and further includes a backlight 52, a polarizing plate 53, a liquid crystal cell 54, and a polarizing plate 55, and is disposed such that the backlight 52 is on the back side of the liquid crystal display device, and further is self-backlit. The polarizer 53, the liquid crystal cell 54, the polarizing plate 55, and the phase difference plate (1) 56 are disposed in this order on the source 52 side (back side). The polarizing plate 53 and the polarizing plate 55 are disposed before and after the liquid crystal cell 54, and a phase difference plate is provided on the surface side of the polarizing plate 55 opposite to the backlight 52 (front side) opposite to the surface of the liquid crystal cell 54. (1) 56. Fig. 4 is a schematic view showing a flat panel display device 61 other than the liquid crystal display device which is one of the display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. Examples of the flat panel display device 61 other than the liquid crystal display device include an organic EL display device, a plasma display device, and a field emission display device (FED, Field).

Emission Display) ^ SED(Surface-conducti〇n Electron-emitter Display,表面傳導電子發射顯示)方式平面型顯示 裝置、電子紙等。由於該等顯示裝置之射出光並非偏光, 故於先刚之平板顯示裝置62之前面之射出側設置偏光板 63,進而於偏光板63之與先前之平板顯示裝置62為相反側 之側設置相位差板(1 )64。藉此可實現立體顯示。 154080.doc •16· 201133033 圖5〜圖7係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示 裝置之一的液晶顯示裝置71A〜71C之概略圖。液晶顯示裝 置71A〜71C亦具有於液晶胞之外側配置偏光板之構成,藉 由在液晶胞内配置偏光板及相位差板(1 ),可減輕立體顯示 之串擾。 圖5係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置 之一的液晶顯示裝置71A之概略圖。液晶顯示裝置7 1A包 含月光源72、偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材75、背 面電極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、彩色濾光片79、 偏光板82、相位差板(1)80及基材81,且以背光源72成為液 晶顯示裝置之背面側之方式進行配置,進而自背光源72側 (背面側8)依序配置偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材 75、背面電極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、彩色濾光 片79、偏光板82、相位差板(1)80、基材81。於該裝置中, 亦可無彩色濾光片79。該顯示裝置包含基材81,但亦可為 不包含基材81之顯示裝置。 圖6係表示作為構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置 之一的液晶顯示裝置71B之概略圖。液晶顯示裝置71B包 3者光源72、偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材75、背 面電極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、偏光板82、相位 差板(1)80、彩色濾光片79及基材81,且以背光源72成為液 曰曰員不裝置之背面側之方式進行配置,進而自背光源Μ側 (背面側)依序配置偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材 75月面電極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、偏光板 154080.doc •17- 201133033 82、相位差板(ι)80、彩色濾光片79及基材81。於該裝置 中’亦可無彩色濾光片79。該裝置包含基材81,但亦可為 不包含基材81之裝置。 圖7係表示構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置之一 的液晶顯示裝置71C之概略圖。液晶顯示裝置71c包含背 光源72、偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材75、背面電 極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、偏光板82、彩色遽光 片79、相位差板(1)80、基材81,且以背光源72成為液晶顯 示裝置之背面側之方式進行配置,進而自背光源72侧(背 面側)依序配置偏光板73、公知之相位差板74、基材75、 背面電極76、液晶層77、前面透明電極78、偏光板82、彩 色濾光片79、相位差板(1)8〇、基材81。於該裝置中,亦可 無彩色濾光片79。該裝置包含基材81,但亦可為不包含基 材81之裝置。 圖8係表示本發明之立體顯示系統用眼鏡之一的立體顯 示系統用眼鏡91之概略圖。立體顯示系統用眼鏡91為如下 構成:於觀察者戴上該眼鏡時之最前面側即顯示裝置側配 置相位差板(1)92,於相位差板〇)92之背面包含偏光板 93、 液晶胞94'偏光板95。 圖9係表示本發明之立體顯示系統用眼鏡之一的立體顯 示系統用眼鏡96之概略圖。立體顯示系統用眼鏡%為如下 構成:於觀察者戴上該眼鏡時之最前面側即顯示裝置側配 置相位差板(1)92,於相位差板(1)92之背面包含液晶胞 94、 偏光板95。 154080.doc -18- 201133033 作為本發明之立體顯示系統’例如可舉出將圖丨〜圖7所 不之顯不裝置之任一者與圖8或圖9所示之立體顯示系統用 眼鏡加以組合而成之系統。又,亦可舉出將係圖丨〜圖7所 示之顯示裝置之任一者且該顯示裝置中之相位差板(丨)為相 位差板(1)以外之相位差板、即未充分滿足式(〗)之相位差 板的顯示裝置、與圖8或圖9所示之立體顯示系統用眼鏡加 以組合而成之系統。進而,亦可舉出將圖丨〜圖7所示之顯 示裝置之任一者與係圖8或圖9所示之立體顯示系統用眼鏡 〇 且該眼鏡中之相位差板(1)為相位差板(1)以外之相位差 板、即未充分滿足式(1)之相位差板的眼鏡加以組合而成之 系統。 相位差板(1)只要為充分滿足式(丨)之相位差板即可。該 相位差板(1)可藉由使聚合性液晶化合物進行聚合而製造。 又’相位差板(1)亦可藉由使膜延伸而製造。 有時將使聚合性液晶化合物進行聚合而獲得之相位差板 Q 稱作「相位差板(a)」。有時將使膜延伸而獲得之相位差板 稱作「相位差板(b )」。 以下,對相位差板(a)進行具體說明。 ‘ 作為聚合性液晶化合物,較佳為式(A)所表示之化合物 - (以下稱作「化合物(A)」)。 L1-G1-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [式中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含之π 電子數為12以上、22以下。 D及D分別獨立表示單鍵、c〇 〇、〇 c〇、-C(=s)_〇_ 154080.doc • 19· 201133033 -O-C(-S)·、-CRiR2-、_CR1R2 Cr3r4 〇 cr1r2 CR R -〇、_crir2_〇 cr3r4 cr1r2 〇 ⑶七 CWR2-、-CR1R、〇_c〇_cr3r4…cr1r2 c〇 〇 cr3r4 NR -CR R - &gt; -CR^^NR3- &gt; -CO-NR1-^ .NR^CO- 〇 R R、R及r4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數 1〜4之烷基。 G1及G2分關立表示碳數5髮2價脂環式煙基,該脂環 式L基中所3之亞曱基可經_〇_、各或_贿·取代,該脂環 式烴基中所含之次甲基可經下式 —N— 取代。 L及L分別獨立表干古地| 不有機基H選自* L1及L2所組 之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基]。 才目位2⑷可藉由將含有化合物⑷之組合物塗佈於基 聚人而二:組合物中之含有化合物⑷之聚合性成分進行 σ而獲导〇 f» ;+、4 丁 ,As物可含有複數種化合物(A)。 ^為具有芳香環之2價基,於本說明書中 括芳香族煙環及芸未 衣」匕 烴環及芳香族雜擇^ 虿選自由方香族 基,更佳為具有冑自^成之群中之至少1個芳香環的2價 群中之至少2個芳香援$香無㈣及芳香族雜環所組成之 .方香環的2價基。該2價基中所含 之π電子之合外愈_ 矛香環 22以下。核N^12以上、以下,較料13以上、 154080.doc -20· 201133033 ㈣烴環’可列舉:苯環、萘環、葱環及料 ^作為芳香族雜環,可列舉:呋喃環、吡咯環、噻吩 環κ環、料環及料心環。其卜較佳為苯環、 噻唑環及苯并噻唑環。 作為^ ’可列舉式(Ar_1)〜式(Ar-13)所表示之2價基。Emission Display) ^ SED (Surface-conducti〇n Electron-emitter Display), flat display device, electronic paper, etc. Since the light emitted from the display devices is not polarized, the polarizing plate 63 is disposed on the exit side of the front surface of the flat panel display device 62, and the phase is disposed on the side opposite to the previous flat panel display device 62 of the polarizing plate 63. Bad board (1) 64. Thereby stereoscopic display can be achieved. 154080.doc •16·201133033 FIGS. 5 to 7 are schematic diagrams showing liquid crystal display devices 71A to 71C which are one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The liquid crystal display devices 71A to 71C also have a configuration in which a polarizing plate is disposed outside the liquid crystal cell, and by disposing a polarizing plate and a phase difference plate (1) in the liquid crystal cell, crosstalk of the stereoscopic display can be reduced. Fig. 5 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 71A which is one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The liquid crystal display device 7 1A includes a moon light source 72, a polarizing plate 73, a well-known phase difference plate 74, a substrate 75, a back surface electrode 76, a liquid crystal layer 77, a front transparent electrode 78, a color filter 79, a polarizing plate 82, and a phase difference. The plate (1) 80 and the substrate 81 are disposed such that the backlight 72 is on the back side of the liquid crystal display device, and the polarizing plate 73 and the known phase difference plate are sequentially disposed from the backlight 72 side (back surface side 8). 74. Substrate 75, back electrode 76, liquid crystal layer 77, front transparent electrode 78, color filter 79, polarizing plate 82, phase difference plate (1) 80, and substrate 81. In the device, a color filter 79 may also be used. The display device includes the substrate 81, but may be a display device that does not include the substrate 81. Fig. 6 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 71B which is one of display devices constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The liquid crystal display device 71B includes a light source 72, a polarizing plate 73, a known phase difference plate 74, a substrate 75, a back surface electrode 76, a liquid crystal layer 77, a front transparent electrode 78, a polarizing plate 82, and a phase difference plate (1) 80. The color filter 79 and the substrate 81 are disposed such that the backlight 72 is disposed on the back side of the device, and the polarizing plate 73 and the known phase are sequentially disposed from the backlight side (back side). The difference plate 74, the substrate 75 moon surface electrode 76, the liquid crystal layer 77, the front transparent electrode 78, the polarizing plate 154080.doc • 17-201133033 82, the phase difference plate (1) 80, the color filter 79, and the substrate 81. In this device, it is also possible to have no color filter 79. The device comprises a substrate 81, but may also be a device that does not comprise a substrate 81. Fig. 7 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 71C constituting one of the display devices of the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The liquid crystal display device 71c includes a backlight 72, a polarizing plate 73, a known retardation plate 74, a substrate 75, a back surface electrode 76, a liquid crystal layer 77, a front transparent electrode 78, a polarizing plate 82, a color calender sheet 79, and a phase difference plate. (1) 80, the substrate 81, and the backlight 72 is disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal display device, and the polarizing plate 73 and the known phase difference plate 74 are sequentially disposed from the backlight 72 side (back side). The substrate 75, the back surface electrode 76, the liquid crystal layer 77, the front transparent electrode 78, the polarizing plate 82, the color filter 79, the phase difference plate (1), and the base material 81. In the device, a color filter 79 may also be used. The device comprises a substrate 81, but may also be a device that does not comprise a substrate 81. Fig. 8 is a schematic view showing the glasses 91 for a stereoscopic display system which is one of the glasses for a stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The stereoscopic display system eyeglasses 91 is configured such that a retardation plate (1) 92 is disposed on the front side of the display device when the viewer wears the glasses, and a polarizing plate 93 and a liquid crystal are disposed on the back surface of the phase difference plate 92. Cell 94' polarizing plate 95. Fig. 9 is a schematic view showing the glasses 96 for a stereoscopic display system which is one of the glasses for a stereoscopic display system of the present invention. The stereoscopic display system lens % is configured such that a retardation plate (1) 92 is disposed on the front side of the display device when the observer wears the lens, and a liquid crystal cell 94 is included on the back surface of the phase difference plate (1) 92. Polarizing plate 95. 154080.doc -18- 201133033 As a stereoscopic display system of the present invention, for example, any of the display devices of FIGS. 7 to 7 and the stereoscopic display system glasses shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may be used. A combined system. Further, any one of the display devices shown in FIG. 7 to FIG. 7 may be used, and the phase difference plate (丨) in the display device may be a phase difference plate other than the phase difference plate (1), that is, insufficient. A display device that satisfies the phase difference plate of the formula (〗) and a system that is combined with the glasses for the stereoscopic display system shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. Further, any one of the display devices shown in FIGS. 7 to 7 and the glasses for stereoscopic display systems shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 9 may be used, and the phase difference plate (1) in the glasses is phased. A system in which a phase difference plate other than the difference plate (1), that is, a lens that does not sufficiently satisfy the phase difference plate of the formula (1) is combined. The phase difference plate (1) may be a phase difference plate that satisfies the formula (丨). The retardation film (1) can be produced by polymerizing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound. Further, the retardation plate (1) can also be produced by stretching the film. The phase difference plate Q obtained by polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound may be referred to as "phase difference plate (a)". The phase difference plate obtained by stretching the film is sometimes referred to as "phase difference plate (b)". Hereinafter, the phase difference plate (a) will be specifically described. ‘ As the polymerizable liquid crystal compound, a compound represented by the formula (A) (hereinafter referred to as "compound (A)") is preferred. L1-G1-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [wherein, Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the number of π electrons contained in the aromatic ring is 12 or more and 22 or less. D and D respectively represent a single bond, c〇〇, 〇c〇, -C(=s)_〇_ 154080.doc • 19· 201133033 -OC(-S)·, -CRiR2-, _CR1R2 Cr3r4 〇cr1r2 CR R -〇,_crir2_〇cr3r4 cr1r2 〇(3)7 CWR2-, -CR1R, 〇_c〇_cr3r4...cr1r2 c〇〇cr3r4 NR -CR R - &gt; -CR^^NR3- &gt; -CO-NR1- ^NR^CO- 〇RR, R and r4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. G1 and G2 are related to a carbon number of 5 divalent alicyclic groups, and the sulfhydryl group of 3 in the alicyclic group may be substituted by _〇_, each or _ bribe, and the alicyclic hydrocarbon group The methine group contained in the group may be substituted by the following formula -N-. L and L are independently isolated from the past; the non-organic group H is selected from the group consisting of *L1 and L2, and at least one of them is a group having a polymerizable group]. The target position 2 (4) can be obtained by applying the composition containing the compound (4) to the base polymer, and the polymerizable component containing the compound (4) in the composition is subjected to σ to obtain 〇f»; +, 4 butyl, As A plurality of compounds (A) may be contained. ^ is a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and in the present specification, an aromatic smog ring and an oxime ring are included. The anthracene ring and the aromatic aryl group are selected from the group consisting of a scented group, and more preferably have a ruthenium group. At least two of the divalent groups of at least one aromatic ring in the group, the aromatic group of the aromatic ring and the aromatic heterocyclic ring. The π-electron contained in the divalent group is less than the spear ring 22 or less. Nuclear N^12 or more, or less, more than 13 or more, 154080.doc -20·201133033 (4) Hydrocarbon ring 'A benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an onion ring, and a material are mentioned as an aromatic heterocyclic ring, and a furan ring is mentioned. Pyrrole ring, thiophene ring κ ring, ring and core ring. Preferably, it is a benzene ring, a thiazole ring and a benzothiazole ring. The valence group represented by the formula (Ar_1) to the formula (Ar-13) can be cited.

[式(Ar 1)式(Ar-13)中,ζι表示鹵素原子、碳數卜6之烷 Ο 基、氰基、硝基、碳數1〜6之烷基亞磺醯基、碳數卜6之烷 基磺醯基、羧基、碳數丨〜6之氟烷基、碳數之烷氧基、 碳數1〜6之烷基硫烷基、碳數卜6之斗烷基胺基、碳數2〜η 之N,N-—烷基胺基、碳數卜6之N—烷基胺醯 2〜12之關·二絲料醯基。 Q1 及Q3分別獨立表示_CR9Rl〇_、_s_、_nr9_、_c〇•或_〇_。 R9及R1G分別獨立表示氫原子或碳數卜4之烷基。 Y1、Y2及Y3分別獨立表示可具有取代基之芳香族烴基、 154080.doc 201133033 芳香族雜環基。 示氫原子、氰基、曱基或鹵素原 wa及wb分別獨立表 子0 Π1表示〇〜6之整數。 η表示〇〜2之整數]。 作為_素科,可„ ··氟料、氯原子1原子、換 原子等,較佳為氟原子、氣原子或溴原子。 作為碳數1〜6之烷基,可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、異 丙基丁基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基、戊基、己基 等。其中,較佳為碳數卜4之烷基,更佳為碳數丨〜2之烷 基,尤佳為甲基。 作為碳數1〜6之烷基亞磺醯基,可列舉:甲基亞磺醯 基乙基亞磧醯基、丙基亞磺醯基、異丙基亞磺醯基、丁 基亞磧醯基、異丁基亞磺醯基、第二丁基亞磺醯基、第三 丁基亞磺醯基、戊基亞磺醯基、己基亞磺醯基等。其中, 杈佳為碳數1〜4之烷基亞磺醯基,更佳為碳數1〜2之烷基亞 磺醯基,尤佳為甲基亞磺醯基。 作為碳數1〜6之烧基續醯基,可列舉:甲基績醯基、乙 基%醯基、丙基磺醯基、異丙基磺醯基、丁基磺醯基、異 丁基磺醯基、第二丁基磺醯基、第三丁基磺醯基、戊基磺 酿基、己基磺醯基等。其中,較佳為碳數1〜4之烷基磺醯 基,更佳為碳數1〜2之烷基續醯基,尤佳為甲基磺醯基。 作為碳數1〜6之氟烷基,可列舉:氟曱基、三氟甲基、 氟乙基、五氟乙基 '七氟丙基、九氟丁基等。其中,較佳 154080.doc •22- 201133033 為石反數1〜4之氟烷基,更佳為碳數丨〜2之氟烷基,尤佳為三 氟曱基。 作為碳數1〜6之烷氧基,可列舉:甲氧基、乙氧基、丙 氧基、異丙氧基、丁氧基、異丁氧基、第二丁氧基、第三 丁氧基、戊氧基、己氧基等。其中,較佳為碳數丨〜4之烷 氧基’更佳為碳數1〜2之烷氧基,尤佳為甲氧基。 作為碳數1~6之烧基硫燒基,可列舉:甲基硫燒基、乙 基硫烷基、丙基硫烷基、異丙基硫烷基、丁基硫烷基、異 丁基硫烷基、第二丁基硫烷基、第三丁基硫烷基、戊基硫 烷基、己基硫烷基等。其中,較佳為碳數1〜4之烷基硫烷 基’更佳為碳數1〜2之烧基硫烧基,尤佳為曱基硫烧基。 作為碳數1〜6之N-烷基胺基,可列舉:N_曱基胺基、N_ 乙基胺基、N-丙基胺基、N-異丙基胺基、N-丁基胺基、N_ 異丁基胺基、N-第二丁基胺基、N-第三丁基胺基、N-戊基 胺基、N-己基胺基等。其中,較佳為碳數1〜4之N-烧基胺 基’更佳為碳數1〜2之N-烧基胺基,尤佳為N-甲基胺基。 作為碳數2〜12之Ν,Ν-二烧基胺基,可列舉:ν,Ν-二甲基 胺基、Ν-甲基-Ν-乙基胺基、Ν,Ν-二乙基胺基、ν,Ν-二丙 基胺基、Ν,Ν-二異丙基胺基、Ν,Ν-二丁基胺基、Ν,Ν_二異 丁基胺基、Ν,Ν-二戊基胺基、Ν,Ν-二己基胺基等。其中, 較佳為碳數2〜8之Ν,Ν-二烷基胺基,更佳為碳數2〜4之Ν,Ν-二烷基胺基,尤佳為Ν,Ν-二甲基胺基。 作為碳數1〜6之Ν-烷基胺磺醯基’可列舉:Ν-甲基胺磺 醯基、Ν-乙基胺磺醯基、Ν-丙基胺磺醯基、Ν-異丙基胺磺 154080.doc • 23· 201133033 醯基、N-丁基胺磺醯基、N-異丁基胺磺醯基、N-第二丁基 胺磺醯基、N-第三丁基胺磺醯基、N-戊基胺磺醯基、N-己 基胺磺醯基等。其中,較佳為碳數1~4之N-烷基胺磺醯 基,更佳為碳數1〜2之N-烷基胺磺醯基,尤佳為N-曱基胺 磺醯基。 作為碳數2〜12之N,N-二烷基胺磺醯基,可列舉:Ν,Ν-二 曱基胺磺醯基、Ν-曱基-Ν-乙基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν-二乙基胺 續醯基、Ν,Ν-二丙基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν-二異丙基胺磺醯基、 Ν,Ν-二丁基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν_二異丁基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν-二戊 基胺磺醯基、Ν,Ν-二己基胺磺醯基等。其中,較佳為碳數 2〜8之Ν,Ν-二烷基胺磺醯基,更佳為碳數2〜4之Ν,Ν_二烷基 胺續酿基’尤佳為Ν,Ν-二曱基胺磺醯基。 式(Ar-Ι)〜(Ar-13)中之Ζι尤佳為鹵素原子、甲基、氰 基、硝基、羧基、甲基磺醯基、三氟甲基、曱氧美、甲某 ^基、N-甲基胺基、N,N二甲基絲、_基料㈣ 或N,N-二曱基胺磺醯基。 作為中之碳數Η之烧基,可列舉:甲基、乙 丁基等。其中 基、丙基、異丙基、丁基、異丁基、第二 較佳為碳數1〜2之烷基,更佳為甲基。 -ΝΗ 式(Ar-Ι)〜(Αγ_13)中之Ql較佳為 或-n(CH3)_,q3較佳為_s•或_c〇·。 — 〇 作為Υ1、Υ2及γ3之芳香族烴基及芳香 舉:單環系芳香族烴基、單環系芳香 就衣基,可列 香族煙基及多環系芳香族雜環基。’》基、多環系芳 154080.doc •24· 201133033 作為芳香族烴基,可列舉:苯基、萘基、蒽基、菲基、 聯苯基等碳數6〜20之芳香族煙基。其中,較佳為苯基、萃 基,更佳為苯基。作為芳香族雜環基,可列舉:吱喃基、 ㈣基、料基、_基、㈣基、苯并料基、苯并咬 喃基、苯并嘆吩基等含有至少1個氮原子、氧原子、硫原 子等雜原子之碳數4〜20之芳香族雜環基。 絲、料基、㈣基、苯并❹基、苯并㈣基、= 售吩基。 Ο[In the formula (Ar-1), ζι denotes a halogen atom, a carbon number of alkane, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl sulfinyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, and a carbon number. An alkylsulfonyl group, a carboxyl group, a fluoroalkyl group having a carbon number of 丨6, an alkoxy group having a carbon number, an alkylsulfanyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, an alkylamino group having a carbon number of 6, N,N-alkylamino group having a carbon number of 2 to η, N-alkylamine 醯 2 to 12 of a carbon number, and a bismuth-based fluorenyl group. Q1 and Q3 independently represent _CR9Rl〇_, _s_, _nr9_, _c〇• or _〇_. R9 and R1G each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having a carbon number of 4. Y1, Y2 and Y3 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and 154080.doc 201133033 aromatic heterocyclic group. The hydrogen atom, the cyano group, the sulfhydryl group or the halogen atom wa and wb are each independently represented by a table of 0 Π1 representing an integer of 〇~6. η represents an integer of 〇~2]. The fluorinated material, the fluorine atom, the atom, the atom, and the like are preferably a fluorine atom, a gas atom or a bromine atom. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methyl group and ethyl group. a propyl group, a propyl butyl group, an isobutyl group, a second butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, etc. Among them, an alkyl group having a carbon number of 4 is preferred, and a carbon number is more preferred. The alkyl group of ~2 is preferably a methyl group. Examples of the alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methylsulfinylethyl fluorenylene, propylsulfinyl, and iso Propylsulfinyl, butyl sulfenyl, isobutylsulfinyl, t-butylsulfinyl, tert-butylsulfinyl, pentylsulfinyl, hexylsulfin Further, the sulfhydryl group is preferably an alkylsulfinyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, more preferably an alkylsulfinyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 2, particularly preferably a methylsulfinyl group. Examples of the alkyl group of 1 to 6 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl sulfonyl group, an isopropyl sulfonyl group, a butyl sulfonyl group, and an isobutyl sulfonate. Base, t-butylsulfonyl, tert-butylsulfonyl, pentylsulfonate The aryl group, the hexyl sulfonyl group, etc., preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a methylsulfonyl group. Examples of the fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include a fluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoroethyl group, a pentafluoroethyl 'heptafluoropropyl group, a nonafluorobutyl group, etc. Among them, preferred 154080.doc • 22- 201133033 is a fluoroalkyl group having an inverse number of 1 to 4, more preferably a fluoroalkyl group having a carbon number of 丨~2, particularly preferably a trifluoromethyl group. As the alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, a butoxy group, an isobutoxy group, a second butoxy group, a third butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group, etc. Preferably, the alkoxy group having a carbon number of 丨4 is more preferably an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 2, more preferably a methoxy group. Examples of the alkylthio group having a carbon number of 1 to 6 include: Sulfone, ethylsulfanyl, propylsulfanyl, isopropylsulfanyl, butylsulfanyl, isobutylsulfanyl, tert-butylsulfanyl, tert-butylsulfide An alkyl group, a pentylsulfanyl group, a hexylsulfanyl group, etc. Among them, an alkane having a carbon number of 1 to 4 is preferred. The sulfanyl group is more preferably a thiol group having a carbon number of 1 to 2, and particularly preferably a fluorenyl group. As the N-alkylamine group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, N-decylamine is exemplified. Base, N_ethylamino group, N-propylamino group, N-isopropylamino group, N-butylamino group, N-isobutylamino group, N-second butylamino group, N-third Butylamino group, N-pentylamino group, N-hexylamino group, etc. Among them, an N-alkylamino group having a carbon number of 1 to 4 is more preferably an N-alkyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 2. The amine group is preferably an N-methylamino group. As the carbon number of 2 to 12, the fluorenyl-dialkylamino group may, for example, be ν, Ν-dimethylamino, Ν-methyl-Ν- Ethylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine-diethylamino, ν, Ν-dipropylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine-diisopropylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine-dibutylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine Diisobutylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine-dipentylamino, hydrazine, hydrazine-dihexylamino and the like. Among them, preferred is a carbon number of 2 to 8, a fluorenyl-dialkylamino group, more preferably a carbon number of 2 to 4, a fluorenyl-dialkylamino group, particularly preferably an anthracene, a fluorenyl-dimethyl group. Amine. Examples of the fluorene-alkylamine sulfonyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 6 include fluorene-methylamine sulfonyl group, hydrazine-ethylamine sulfonyl group, fluorenyl-propylamine sulfonyl group, and hydrazine-isopropyl group. Hydrazine 154080.doc • 23· 201133033 fluorenyl, N-butylamine sulfonyl, N-isobutylamine sulfonyl, N-tert-butylamine sulfonyl, N-tert-butylamine Sulfhydryl group, N-pentylamine sulfonyl group, N-hexylamine sulfonyl group, and the like. Among them, an N-alkylamine sulfonyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferred, and an N-alkylamine sulfonyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is more preferred, and an N-decylamine sulfonyl group is particularly preferred. Examples of the N,N-dialkylamine sulfonyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms include anthracene, fluorenyl-didecylamine sulfonyl group, anthracene-fluorenyl-fluorenyl-ethylamine sulfonyl group, anthracene, Ν-Diethylamine hydrazide, hydrazine, hydrazine-dipropylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine-diisopropylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine-dibutylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine _Diisobutylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine-dipentylamine sulfonyl, hydrazine, hydrazine-dihexylamine sulfonyl hydrazide, and the like. Among them, a carbon number of 2 to 8 is preferred, a fluorenyl-dialkylamine sulfonyl group, more preferably a carbon number of 2 to 4, and a hydrazine-dialkylamine continuation base is particularly preferred. - Dimercaptosulfonyl. In the formula (Ar-Ι)~(Ar-13), Ζι is preferably a halogen atom, a methyl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group, a methylsulfonyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a oxime, and a certain ^ Base, N-methylamino, N,N dimethyl silk, _ base (tetra) or N,N-didecylamine sulfonate. Examples of the alkyl group of the carbon number include methyl group, ethyl butyl group and the like. Wherein the group is a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, and the second group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group. - Q in the formula (Ar-Ι)~(Αγ_13) is preferably - or -n(CH3)_, and q3 is preferably _s• or _c〇·. — 〇 As the aromatic hydrocarbon group and aromatic group of Υ1, Υ2, and γ3, a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group or a monocyclic aromatic clothing group may be used, and an aromatic group and a polycyclic aromatic heterocyclic group may be listed. ''Based, Polycyclic System aryl 154080.doc • 24· 201133033 Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include aromatic phenol groups having a carbon number of 6 to 20 such as a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group, a phenanthryl group or a biphenyl group. Among them, a phenyl group and a benzyl group are preferred, and a phenyl group is more preferred. Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group include a fluorenyl group, a (tetra) group, a material group, a — group, a (tetra) group, a benzo compound group, a benzoxanyl group, a benzophenantyl group, and the like, and at least one nitrogen atom is contained. An aromatic heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms of a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. Silk, base, (tetra), benzofluorenyl, benzo (tetra), = phenyl. Ο

該芳香族烴基及芳香族雜環基可具有取代基,作為該取 代基,可列舉:函素原子、碳數丨〜6之烷基、氰基、硝 基、碳數1〜6之烷基亞磺醯基、碳數丨〜6之烷基磺醯基、羧 基、碳數1〜6之氟烷基、碳數卜6之烷氧基、碳數卜6之烷 基硫烷基、碳數1〜6之N-烷基胺基、碳數2〜12之N,N_二烷 基胺基、碳數1〜6之N-烷基胺磺醯基、碳數2〜12之队…二 烷基胺磺醯基等。 作為鹵素原子、碳數1〜6之烷基、碳數丨〜6之烷基亞磺醯 基、碳數1〜6之烷基磺醯基、碳數1〜6之氟烷基、碳數卜6 之烧氧基、奴數1〜6之燒基硫院基、碳數1〜6之N-烧基胺 基、奴數2〜12之N,N-二烧基胺基、碳數1〜6之N-烧基胺續 酿基及碳數2〜12之N,N-二烷基胺磺醯基,可列舉與上述ζι 中之基相同者。 作為上述取代基,其中較佳為鹵素原子、碳數丨〜2之烧 基、氰基、确基、碳數1〜2之烧基讀醯基、礙數1〜2之氟烧 基、碳數1〜2之烧氧基、碳數1〜2之烧基硫烧基、碳數1〜2 154080.doc -25· 201133033 之N-烧基胺基 基胺績醯基。 碳數2〜4之N,N-二院基胺基、碳數丨〜]之烧 作為單環系芳香族烴基或單環系芳香族雜環基,可列舉 式(Y-1)〜式(Y-6)所表示之基。The aromatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic heterocyclic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a functional group atom, an alkyl group having a carbon number of 丨6, a cyano group, a nitro group, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Sulfosyl group, alkylsulfonyl group having a carbon number of 丨6, a carboxyl group, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 6, an alkylsulfanyl group having a carbon number of 6, an alkyl group An N-alkylamino group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an N,N-dialkylamino group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, an N-alkylamine sulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 2 to 12 ...dialkylamine sulfonyl and the like. a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfinyl group having a carbon number of 丨6, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a carbon number An alkoxy group, a sulphur-based sulfonyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an N-alkylamino group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, an N,N-dialkylamino group having a number of 2 to 12, and a carbon number The N-alkylamine continuation group of 1 to 6 and the N,N-dialkylamine sulfonyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms may be the same as those of the above oxime. As the above substituent, a halogen atom, a carbon number of 丨~2, a cyano group, an exact group, a decyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 2, a fluoroalkyl group having a hindrance of 1 to 2, and carbon are preferable. An alkoxy group having 1 to 2, an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and an N-alkylamino group having a carbon number of 1 to 2 154080.doc -25·201133033. The N, N-dienylamino group and the carbon number 丨~] of the carbon number of 2 to 4 are a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group or a monocyclic aromatic heterocyclic group, and the formula (Y-1) is exemplified. (Y-6) The base indicated.

BB

[式(Y-1)〜式(Y-6)中,*表示結合鍵,Z2表示鹵素原子、 碳數1〜6之烷基、氰基、硝基、碳數卜6之烷基亞磺醯基、 碳數1〜6之烷基磺醯基、羧基、碳數1〜6之氟烷基、碳數 1〜6之烧氧基、碳數1〜6之烧基硫烧基、碳數1〜6 2N_烧基 胺基、碳數2〜12之N,N-二烷基胺基、碳數1〜6之N-烷基胺 磺醯基或碳數2〜12之N,N-二烧基胺磺醯基。 a1表示0〜5之整數,a2表示〇〜4之整數,b1表示〇〜3之整 數,b2表示0〜2之整數,R表示氫原子或曱基] 作為Z2中之鹵素原子、碳數1〜6之烷基、碳數1〜6之烷基 亞磺醯基、碳數1〜6之烷基磺醯基、碳數1〜6之氟烷基、碳 數1〜6之烧乳基、碳數1~6之烧基硫烧基、碳數1〜6之N-烧 154080.doc -26· 201133033[In the formula (Y-1) to the formula (Y-6), * represents a bond, and Z2 represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl sulfin group having a carbon number of 6; Sulfhydryl group, alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxyl group, fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkylthio group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carbon 1 to 6 2N-alkylamino group, N,N-dialkylamino group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, N-alkylamine sulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or N having 2 to 12 carbon atoms; N-dialkylamine sulfonyl. A1 represents an integer of 0 to 5, a2 represents an integer of 〇~4, b1 represents an integer of 〇~3, b2 represents an integer of 0~2, and R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group] as a halogen atom in Z2, a carbon number of 1 An alkyl group of 1-6, an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a calcined base having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. , a calcined sulfur-based group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, and a carbon number of 1 to 6 N-burning 154080.doc -26· 201133033

基胺基石反數2〜12之Ν,Ν-二院基胺基、碳數1〜6之Ν-烧美 胺確酿基或碳數2〜12之ν,ν_二烧基胺姐基,可 I 述Ζ1中之基相同者。 〃 作為Ζ,尤佳為_素原子、甲基、氰基、頌基、確基、 竣基、三a甲基、曱氧基、f基硫燒基、Ν,Ν_ 或Ν-甲基胺基。 甲暴胺基 Ο 就製造步驟或成本之方面而言,尤佳為〜及〜別 獨立為式(Y-1)或式(γ_3)所表示之基。 作為多環㈣香族烴基❹環㈣香族 式(γΐ-υ〜式(Υ丨_7)所表示之基。 了歹]舉 ο反 基 反 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 2 2 , I can describe the same base in Ζ1. 〃 As a hydrazine, it is especially a aryl atom, a methyl group, a cyano group, a decyl group, a decyl group, a fluorenyl group, a trimethyl group, a decyloxy group, an aryl group, a fluorene group, an anthracene group, or a fluorenyl group. base. Methotrexate Ο In terms of manufacturing steps or cost, it is particularly preferable that the group is represented by the formula (Y-1) or the formula (γ_3). As a polycyclic (tetra) aromatic hydrocarbon-based anthracene ring (four) scent formula (γ ΐ - υ ~ formula (Υ丨 _7) represented by the base.

V1 σ1^)V1 σ1^)

σι-5) σ'-β) &lt;yU)Σι-5) σ'-β) &lt;yU)

σι-7) 154080.doc -27- 201133033 亞磺醯基、碳數1〜6之烷基磺醯基、羧基、碳數1〜6之氟烷 基、碳數1〜6之烷氧基、碳數1〜6之烷基硫烷基、碳數1~6 之N-烷基胺基、碳數2-12之Ν,Ν-二烷基胺基、碳數1〜6之 Ν-烷基胺磺醯基、碳數2〜12之Ν,Ν-二烷基胺磺醯基。 V1 及 V2分別獨立表示-CO-、-S-、-NR11-、-〇-、-Se·或 -SO2-。 W1〜W5分別獨立表示-CH=或-N=。 其中,V1、V2及WLW5中之至少1者表示含有s、N、〇 或Se之基。 R11表示氫原子或碳數1〜4之烧基。 a分別獨立表示〇〜3之整數。 b分別獨立表示〇〜2之整數] 進而’式〜式or。)所表示之任一基較 1)〜式(Υ3-6)所表示之基。 ·Σι-7) 154080.doc -27- 201133033 sulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxyl group, fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, Alkylsulfanyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, N-alkylamino group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, fluorene having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, fluorenyl-dialkylamino group and fluorene having 1 to 6 carbon atoms Amidoxime group, a carbon number of 2 to 12, a fluorenyl-dialkylamine sulfonyl group. V1 and V2 independently represent -CO-, -S-, -NR11-, -〇-, -Se· or -SO2-. W1 to W5 independently represent -CH= or -N=. Among them, at least one of V1, V2 and WLW5 represents a group containing s, N, 或 or Se. R11 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. a independently represents an integer of 〇~3. b denotes an integer of 〇~2, respectively, and then 'form-or'. Any one of the bases represented by the formula 1) is represented by the formula (Υ3-6). ·

(Υ3-3)(Υ3-3)

(Y34) (^-5) 0^*6) 154080.doc -28- (2\ 201133033 [式(γ3-ι)〜式(y3-6)中,*、z3、a、b、yi、v2及 w1 表示 與上述相同之含義] 作為Z3,可列舉:鹵素原子、碳數1〜6之烷基、氰基、 硝基、碳數1〜6之烧基亞續醯基、碳數1〜6之炫(基績醯基、 缓基、碳數1~6之氟烧基、碳數1〜6之炫氧基、碳數1〜6之 烧基硫烧基、碳數1〜6之N-烧基胺基、碳數2~12之N,N-二 烧基胺基、碳數1〜6之N-烧基胺績酿基、碳數2~12之N,N_ 二烷基胺磺醯基等。 〇 作為鹵素原子、碳數1〜6之烷基、碳數1〜6之烷基亞磺醯 基、碳數1〜6之烷基磺醯基、碳數i〜6之氟烷基、碳數 之烷氧基、碳數1〜6之烷基硫烷基、碳數丨^之^烷基胺 基、碳數2〜12之N,N-二烷基胺基、碳數卜6之…烷基胺磺 醯基及碳數2〜12之N,N-二烧基胺績醯基,可列舉與上述ζι 中之基相同者。 作為Z3,其中較佳為鹵素原子、曱基、乙基、異丙基、 〇 第一丁基、氰基、硝基、磺基、亞硝基、羧基、三氟曱 基曱氧基、甲基硫烷基、N,N_二甲基胺基或N_曱基胺 基,更佳為齒素原子、甲基、乙基、異丙基、第二丁基、 氛基確基、二氟甲基,尤佳為甲基、乙基、異丙基、第 二丁基、戊基、己基。 進而’ V及V2較佳為分別獨立為_s_、_NRn-或_〇_, w〜w5分別獨立為_CH=或养。 又’較佳為V1、V2及中至少i者表示含有s、N或 154080.doc 29· 201133033 a較佳為0或1,b較佳為0。 作為Ar,具體可例示下述基。 作為式(Ar-Ι)〜式(Ar-4)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式 (ar-Ι)〜式(ar-29)所表示之基。(Y34) (^-5) 0^*6) 154080.doc -28- (2\ 201133033 [Formula (γ3-ι)~式(y3-6), *, z3, a, b, yi, v2 And w1 represents the same meaning as described above. Examples of Z3 include a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cyano group, a nitro group, a decyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 1 to 6. 6 炫 (base 醯 、, slow base, carbon number 1 ~ 6 fluoroalkyl, carbon number 1 ~ 6 methoxy, carbon number 1 ~ 6 of the sulphur base, carbon number 1 ~ 6 N-alkylamino group, N,N-dialkylamino group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, N-alkylamine having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, N,N-dialkyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms Aminesulfonyl group, etc. 〇 as a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a carbon number i to 6 a fluoroalkyl group, a carbon number alkoxy group, a carbon number of 1 to 6 alkylsulfanyl group, a carbon number of an alkylamino group, and a carbon number of 2 to 12 N,N-dialkylamino group The alkylamine sulfonyl group and the N,N-dialkylamine having a carbon number of 2 to 12 may be the same as those of the above ζι. Halogen atom, fluorenyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group , 〇, butyl, cyano, nitro, sulfo, nitroso, carboxyl, trifluoromethyl decyloxy, methylsulfanyl, N,N-dimethylamino or N-fluorenyl Amino group, more preferably dentate atom, methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, second butyl group, aryl group, difluoromethyl group, especially preferably methyl group, ethyl group, isopropyl group, second Butyl group, pentyl group and hexyl group. Further, 'V and V2 are preferably independently _s_, _NRn- or _〇_, and w~w5 are independently _CH= or cultivating. Also, 'V1, V2 and At least i means that it contains s, N or 154080.doc 29·201133033 a is preferably 0 or 1, and b is preferably 0. As Ar, specifically, the following group can be exemplified. As the formula (Ar-Ι)~ Specific examples of the group represented by Ar-4) include the groups represented by the formula (ar-Ι) to (ar-29).

(ar*3) (ar*4)(ar*3) (ar*4)

(ar*XO)(ar*XO)

154080.doc -30- 201133033154080.doc -30- 201133033

OCHs (ar-17)OCHs (ar-17)

no2 (ar-18)No2 (ar-18)

(ar-25) (ar-26) (ar_27) (ar-28) (ar29) 作為式(Ar-5)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式(ar-30)〜式(ar-25) (ar-26) (ar_27) (ar-28) (ar29) Specific examples of the base represented by the formula (Ar-5) include the formula (ar-30)

(ar-39)所表示之基。(ar-39) The base represented.

154080.doc -31 - 201133033154080.doc -31 - 201133033

作為式(Ar-6)或式(Ar-7)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉 式(ar-40)〜式(ar-119)所表示之基等。Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (Ar-6) or the formula (Ar-7) include a group represented by the formula (ar-40) to the formula (ar-119).

(ar-45) (ar-46) (ar*47)(ar-45) (ar-46) (ar*47)

(ar-48)(ar-48)

154080.doc -32- 201133033154080.doc -32- 201133033

(ar*60)(ar*60)

(ar-61)(ar-61)

(ar*62)(ar*62)

(ar-64)(ar-64)

(ax-65) (ar_66) (ar*67) (ar'68) (ar-69)(ax-65) (ar_66) (ar*67) (ar'68) (ar-69)

(ar*74) (ar-7〇) (ar-7l) (ar*72) (ar-73) 154080.doc -33 - 201133033(ar*74) (ar-7〇) (ar-7l) (ar*72) (ar-73) 154080.doc -33 - 201133033

o2n Cl (ar*75)O2n Cl (ar*75)

(ar-76)(ar-76)

no2 (ar-79) (ar-77) (ar-78)No2 (ar-79) (ar-77) (ar-78)

N〇2 (ar-80) (ar-8l)N〇2 (ar-80) (ar-8l)

(ar-82)(ar-82)

H3CH3C

(ar-83) ;s(ar-83) ;s

(ar-85) (ar-86) (ar-87)(ar-85) (ar-86) (ar-87)

ch3 (ar-89) (ar*88)Ch3 (ar-89) (ar*88)

(ar*90) (ar*9l) (ar-92) (ar-93) (ar-94) 154080.doc -34- 201133033(ar*90) (ar*9l) (ar-92) (ar-93) (ar-94) 154080.doc -34- 201133033

(ar-95) (ar-96) (ar*97) (ar*98) (ar-99)(ar-95) (ar-96) (ar*97) (ar*98) (ar-99)

(ar'100) (arlOl) (ar-102) (ar-103) (ar-lO^(ar'100) (arlOl) (ar-102) (ar-103) (ar-lO^

(ar-105) (ar-106) (ar-107)(ar-105) (ar-106) (ar-107)

no2 (ar-108)No2 (ar-108)

(at-115) (ar-116) (ai*117) (arll8) (ar-119) 154080.doc -35- 201133033 作為式(Ar-8)或式(Ar-9)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉 式(ar-120)〜式(ar-129)所表示之基。(at-115) (ar-116) (ai*117) (arll8) (ar-119) 154080.doc -35- 201133033 as the basis of the formula (Ar-8) or formula (Ar-9) For example, the base represented by the formula (ar-120) to the formula (ar-129) can be cited.

(ar_120) (ar-12l) (ar-122)(ar_120) (ar-12l) (ar-122)

(ar-123) (ar-124)(ar-123) (ar-124)

(ar-125)(ar-125)

(ar-126) (ar*127)(ar-126) (ar*127)

(ar-128) (ar-129) 作為式(Ar-10)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式(ar-130)〜 式(ar-149)所表示之基。(ar-128) (ar-129) Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (Ar-10) include a group represented by the formula (ar-130) to the formula (ar-149).

(arl30) (ar-131) (ar-132) (ar-133) (ar-134) 154080.doc • 36- 201133033(arl30) (ar-131) (ar-132) (ar-133) (ar-134) 154080.doc • 36-201133033

(ar:14〇) (ar*14l) (ar-142)(ar:14〇) (ar*14l) (ar-142)

(ar*143) (ar-144)(ar*143) (ar-144)

作為式(Ar-11)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式(ar-150)〜 式(ar-159) 所表示之基。Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (Ar-11) include the groups represented by the formula (ar-150) to the formula (ar-159).

(ai'150) (ar*15l) (ar*152) (ar-153) (ar-154) 154080.doc -37- 201133033(ai'150) (ar*15l) (ar*152) (ar-153) (ar-154) 154080.doc -37- 201133033

(ai-155) (ax* 156) (ar-157) (arl58) &lt;arl59) 作為式(Ar-12)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式(ar-160)〜 式(ar-179)所表示之基。(ai-155) (ax* 156) (ar-157) (arl58) &lt;arl59) Specific examples of the base represented by the formula (Ar-12) include the formula (ar-160) to (ar- 179) The base indicated.

(ai*160) (ar*16l) (ar*162) (ar*163) (ar-164)(ai*160) (ar*16l) (ar*162) (ar*163) (ar-164)

(ar-168) (ar-169)(ar-168) (ar-169)

(ar-170) (ar-17l) (ar-172) (ar-173) (ar-174) 154080.doc •38- 201133033(ar-170) (ar-17l) (ar-172) (ar-173) (ar-174) 154080.doc •38- 201133033

(ar*175) (ar-176)(ar*175) (ar-176)

作為式(Ar-13)所表示之基之具體例,可列舉式(ar_i 8〇) 式(ar-189)所表示之基。Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (Ar-13) include a group represented by the formula (ar_i 8〇) (ar-189).

(ar-185) (ar-X86) (ar-187) (ar-188) &lt;ar-189) 作為化合物(A)中之Ar,由於容易合成化合物,且容易 實現相位差之波長分散性,故尤佳為式(Ar-6)所表示之2價 基。 式(A)中之 D1 及 D2較佳為 *_〇 c〇_、*_〇_c(=s)_、*_〇_ CR R -、*_nr1cr2r3 或 * Nr丨表示與 Ar 之結合 154080.doc -39- 201133033 鍵)。Dl及D2更佳為*_〇_c〇_ 示與Ar之結合鍵)。 *-0-C(=S)-或♦-NR^-CO-C*表 作為式(A)中之⑴及以,可列舉式㈤卜式㈣嘴表示 之可含有雜原子之脂環式烴基,較佳為五員環或六員環之 脂環式烴基。(ar-185) (ar-X86) (ar-187) (ar-188) &lt;ar-189) As Ar in the compound (A), since it is easy to synthesize a compound, and it is easy to achieve wavelength dispersion of phase difference, Therefore, it is especially preferred to be a divalent group represented by the formula (Ar-6). D1 and D2 in the formula (A) are preferably *_〇c〇_, *_〇_c(=s)_, *_〇_CR R -, *_nr1cr2r3 or *Nr丨 indicates a combination with Ar 154080 .doc -39- 201133033 key). Dl and D2 are more preferably *_〇_c〇_ showing a bond with Ar). *-0-C(=S)- or ♦-NR^-CO-C* table as (1) and (3) in the formula (A), and the alicyclic ring which may contain a hetero atom represented by the formula (5) The hydrocarbon group is preferably a five-membered or six-membered alicyclic hydrocarbon group.

R及R較佳為分別獨立為氫原子或碳數1〜4之 ’元土 :更佳為氫原子、甲基或乙基。 上述式(g-Ι)〜(g_10)所表示之基中所含之氫原子可經甲 基乙基、異丙基、第三丁基等碳數i〜4之烷基;曱氧 基、乙氧基等碳數1〜4之烷氧基;三氟曱基等碳數1〜4之氟 烷基’三氟甲氧基等碳數卜4之氟烷氧基;氰基;硝基; 氟原子、氣原?、溴原子等齒素原子取代。 乍為G及G ’較佳為包含式(g“)所表示之六員環之脂環 式煙基。其中’更佳為G1及G2均為環己烷-1,4-二基,尤佳 為反式-環己烷-i,4_二基。 式(A)中之L及L2為有機基,選自由l1及L2所組成之群中 之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基。 154080.doc -40- 201133033 示之基,L2為式(C)所表示 較佳為有機基L1為式(Β)所表 之基。 Ρ2·Ρ2ΆΑ2)1_Ε2_ [式(B)及(C)中,B1、B2、, ,Crr E及E分別獨立表示_CR5R6_ … -C〇-〇_ . -〇.c〇_ , _〇_c〇-〇. 、-C( = S)-〇_、_〇_c( = s、_ MP5 -〇-C( = S).〇. . -CO-NR5- Ο 〇 、-NR -CO-、-〇_CH2_、 2 0-、-S-CH2-、-CH2-S-或單 鍵。於k為2以上之整數 飞早 時’複數個B1彼此可相同, 亦可不同。於1為2以上之整數 ; &lt;障开乂時’複數個B2彼此可 相同,亦可不同。 R及R分別獨立表示氫原早 ^ ”、鼠原子或碳數1〜4之烧 基。 A1及A2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8 8之2價脂環式烴基或碳數 ㈠8之2價芳香族烴基’該脂環式烴基中所含之亞甲基可 經mNH_取代,該脂環式烴基令所含之次甲基可 經下式 —N-— 取代。於…以上之整數之情形時,複數個V彼此可相 同’亦可不同。糾為2以上之整數之情形時,複數個入2彼 此可相同’亦可不同。 k及1分別獨立表示〇〜3之整數。 F1及F2表示可具有取代基之碳數丨~12之2價脂肪族烴 154080.doc -41 - 201133033 基。 p1表示聚合性基。 2 Ρ表示氫原子或聚合性基] 作為Α及Α中之碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基或碳數6〜“之 2價芳香族烴基’可列舉包含上述式介式(g_i〇)所表示 之五員環或六員環等之脂環式烴基、或下述式(叫〜式卜 8)所表示之2價芳香族烴基。R and R are each independently a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of 1 to 4: more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group. The hydrogen atom contained in the group represented by the above formula (g-Ι) to (g_10) may be an alkyl group having a carbon number of i to 4 such as methylethyl, isopropyl or t-butyl; Alkoxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 4 such as an ethoxy group; a fluoroalkyl group such as a fluoroalkyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 4 such as a trifluoromethyl group; a fluoroalkoxy group; a cyano group; ; fluorine atom, gas source? A porphyrin atom such as a bromine atom is substituted.乍 G and G ' preferably comprise a six-membered ring of alicyclic nicotine represented by formula (g"), wherein 'more preferably both G1 and G2 are cyclohexane-1,4-diyl, especially Preferably, it is a trans-cyclohexane-i,4-diyl group. L and L2 in the formula (A) are an organic group, and at least one selected from the group consisting of l1 and L2 is a group having a polymerizable group. 154080.doc -40- 201133033 The basis of the formula, L2 is represented by the formula (C), preferably the organic group L1 is a group of the formula (Β). Ρ2·Ρ2ΆΑ2)1_Ε2_ [Formula (B) and (C) Among them, B1, B2, and Crr E and E respectively represent _CR5R6_ ... -C〇-〇_ . -〇.c〇_ , _〇_c〇-〇. , -C( = S)-〇_ , _〇_c( = s, _ MP5 -〇-C( = S).〇. . -CO-NR5- Ο 〇, -NR -CO-, -〇_CH2_, 2 0-, -S-CH2 -, -CH2-S- or a single bond. When k is an integer of 2 or more, the number of B1s may be the same or different. 1 is an integer of 2 or more; &lt; B2 may be the same or different from each other. R and R each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a mouse atom or a carbon number of 1 to 4. The A1 and A2 independently represent a carbon number of 5 to 8 8 alicyclic rings. Hydrocarbyl or carbon The number of (a) 8 bis-valent aromatic hydrocarbon group 'methylene group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by mNH_, and the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by the following formula -N--. In the case of the above integer, the plurality of Vs may be the same 'may be different'. When the integer is equal to 2 or more, the plurality of inputs 2 may be the same 'may be different', and k and 1 respectively represent 〇~3. F1 and F2 represent a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon having a carbon number of 丨~12 which may have a substituent 154080.doc -41 - 201133033. P1 represents a polymerizable group. 2 Ρ represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group] And a bivalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 2 carbon atoms in the oxime, and a five-membered ring or a six-membered ring represented by the above formula (g_i〇) An alicyclic hydrocarbon group or the like, or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group represented by the following formula (referred to as "B").

再者作為A及A,上述例示之基中所含之氯原子可經 曱基、乙基、異丙基或第三丁基等碳數卜4之烧基;甲氧 基或乙氧基等碳數1〜4之烷氧基;三氟甲基;三氟甲氧 基,氰基;硝基;敗原子、惫盾;七、自 τ ^ 氯原子或溴原子等鹵素原子取 代。 作為Α及A,較佳為分別獨立為單環之丨,‘伸苯基或環 己烷·Μ_二基,尤其是就容易製造化合物(A)之方面而 言,較佳為Μ-伸笨基。進而,作為α\α2,就存在容易 154080.doc -42· 201133033 製ia化合物(A)之傾向而言,較佳為同種類之基。 作為B1及B2 ’就存在容易製造化合物(A)之傾向而言, 較佳為同種類之基。又,就更加容易製造化合物(A)之方 面而言’較佳為僅與Αι鍵結之Βι、及僅與A2鍵結之B2分別 獨立為-(:^12-(:112-、-(:0-0-、-0-(:0-、-。0-;^11-、-;^11-(:0-、_0_CH;2-、-CHyO-或單鍵。尤其是就表現較高之液晶性 之方面而言,較佳為_C〇_〇_或·〇&lt;〇_。進而,更佳為與pl 鍵結之B1、及與F2鍵結之B2分別獨立為-0-、_(:0-0- 、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-或單鍵。 k及1較佳為分別獨立表示〇〜3之整數,让及丨更佳為〇〜2。k 及1之合計較佳為5以下’更佳為4以下。若k及1為上述範 圍,則容易表現液晶性,故而較佳。 F及F較佳為碳數1〜12之伸烧基。尤佳為未經取代之伸 烷基。該伸烷基中所含之氳原子可經碳數卜5之烷基、碳 數1〜5之烷氧基或鹵素原子取代。又,該伸烷基中所含之 亞甲基(-CH2·)可經-Ο-或-CO-取代。 P1為聚合性基,P2為氫原子或聚合性基。就存在所得相 位差板之硬度優異之傾向而言,較佳為ρι及p2均為聚合性 基。 此處,所謂聚合性基,係指可使化合物(A)聚合之取代 基,具體可例示:乙烯基、乙烯氧基、苯乙烯基、對(2_苯 基乙烯基)苯基、丙烯醯基、甲基丙烯醯基、丙烯醯氧 基、甲基丙烯醯氧基、幾基、乙醯基、經基、胺甲酿基、 碳數卜4之烷基胺基、胺基、氧雜環丙烷基、氧雜環丁烷 154080.doc •43- 201133033 基、甲醯基、異氰酸基或異硫氰基等。 作為聚合性基,較佳為適於光聚合之自由基聚合性基、 陽離:聚合性基’尤其是就存在容易操作且容易製造之傾 向而a ’較佳為丙婦醯基、f基丙烯醯基、丙烯醯氧基及 甲基丙婦醯氧基。纟中較佳為聚合性基分別獨立為丙稀醯 氧基或甲基丙稀醯氧基,尤佳為丙烯酿氧基。 作為L為式⑻所表示之基之情形時的表示Further, as A and A, the chlorine atom contained in the above-exemplified group may be a carbon group such as a mercapto group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group or a t-butyl group; a methoxy group or an ethoxy group; Alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; trifluoromethyl group; trifluoromethoxy group, cyano group; nitro group; ruthenium atom, ruthenium shield; VII, substituted by halogen atom such as τ ^ chlorine atom or bromine atom. As the oxime and A, it is preferred that each is independently a monocyclic ring, and a phenyl or cyclohexane fluorene-diyl group is used, and in particular, in terms of easy production of the compound (A), yttrium-extension is preferred. Stupid. Further, as α\α2, there is a tendency that the ia compound (A) is easily produced by 154080.doc -42·201133033, and the same type of group is preferable. In the case where B1 and B2' tend to produce the compound (A), the same type of group is preferred. Further, in terms of the easier production of the compound (A), it is preferable that only the bond bonded to Αι and the B2 bonded only to A2 are independently -(:^12-(:112-, -( :0-0-,-0-(:0-, -.0-;^11-, -;^11-(:0-, _0_CH; 2-, -CHyO- or single bond. Especially in performance In terms of high liquid crystallinity, it is preferably _C〇_〇_ or ·〇&lt;〇_. Further, it is more preferably -1 which is bonded to pl and B2 which is bonded to F2, respectively. -, _ (: 0-0-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO- or a single bond. k and 1 are preferably independently represented by 〇~ The integer of 3 is more preferably 22. The total of k and 1 is preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. If k and 1 are in the above range, liquid crystallinity is easily exhibited, so that it is preferable. And F is preferably a stretching group having a carbon number of 1 to 12. More preferably, it is an unsubstituted alkylene group. The fluorene atom contained in the alkyl group may be an alkyl group having a carbon number of 5 and a carbon number of 1~ The alkoxy group or the halogen atom is substituted by 5. The methylene group (-CH2.) contained in the alkylene group may be substituted by -Ο- or -CO-. P1 is a polymerizable group, and P2 is a hydrogen atom or Polymeric group. In the tendency of the obtained phase difference plate to have a high hardness, it is preferable that both of ρι and p2 are polymerizable groups. Here, the polymerizable group means a substituent which can polymerize the compound (A), and specifically, ethylene is exemplified. , vinyloxy, styryl, p-(2-phenylvinyl)phenyl, propylene fluorenyl, methacryl fluorenyl, acryloxy, methacryloxy, benzyl, ethenyl , mercapto, amine methyl, alkyl alkyl, amine, oxetane, oxetane 154080.doc • 43- 201133033 base, formazan, isocyanate Or an isothiocyanato group, etc. The polymerizable group is preferably a radical polymerizable group suitable for photopolymerization, and a cationic group: a polymerizable group is particularly easy to handle and easy to manufacture, and a 'preferably A propylene group, an acryloxy group, an acryloxy group, and a methyl propyl methoxy group. Preferably, the polymerizable group in the oxime is independently an acryloxy group or a methyl propyl oxirane group. It is preferred that propylene is an oxy group. When L is a group represented by formula (8)

Ar之、,’°。鍵)之具體例,可列舉下述式(R-1)〜式(R-120) 及式(R-129)〜式(r_131)所表示之基等。作為為式⑹所 表不之基之情形時的*_d2_g2_l2(*表示與Ar之結合鍵)之具 體例可列舉下述式(R·1)〜式(R· 134)所表示之基等。 再者式(R_1)〜式(R-134)中之η表示2〜12之整數。Ar's, '°. Specific examples of the bond include the following formula (R-1) to formula (R-120) and a group represented by the formula (R-129) to the formula (r-131). The specific example of *_d2_g2_l2 (* represents a bond with Ar) in the case of the case of the formula (6) is a group represented by the following formula (R·1) to (R·134). Further, η in the formula (R_1) to the formula (R-134) represents an integer of 2 to 12.

CR-10)CR-10)

(R-4)(R-4)

(R'12)(R'12)

(R-6) 154080.doc -44· 201133033 o(R-6) 154080.doc -44· 201133033 o

II

〇-c«nsr-〇—{~ (R-14)〇-c«nsr-〇—{~ (R-14)

}~0_yH^_c.Hgr_c^— (R-16)}~0_yH^_c.Hgr_c^— (R-16)

^™(y-o-o-Hs—〇-^~ (R-13)^TM(y-o-o-Hs-〇-^~ (R-13)

(R-19) (R-15)(R-19) (R-15)

(R-20) (R-21) (R-22) (R-17) (R-18) (R-25)(R-20) (R-21) (R-22) (R-17) (R-18) (R-25)

o^^ir*—ο—i (R-26) (R-32)O^^ir*—ο—i (R-26) (R-32)

G C^-27) o-c.tHjjr (R-28)G C^-27) o-c.tHjjr (R-28)

(R-33) (R*34)(R-33) (R*34)

(R-30) (R-29)(R-30) (R-29)

(R-35) (R-36) • 45- 154080.doc 201133033(R-35) (R-36) • 45- 154080.doc 201133033

(R-43) (R-37)(R-43) (R-37)

(R-44) (R-45)(R-44) (R-45)

(R40)(R40)

(R-46)(R-46)

(R47&gt; (R-4S)(R47&gt; (R-4S)

(R-49)(R-49)

(R*53) #x&gt;—r (R-50)(R*53) #x&gt;-r (R-50)

(R-54)(R-54)

-c„Har- I (R-51)-c„Har- I (R-51)

(R-55)(R-55)

(R-52) 'TOC^-^ (R-56) 154080.doc • 46· 201^3033 ♦(R-52) 'TOC^-^ (R-56) 154080.doc • 46·201^3033 ♦

;54〇»〇d〇c .41- 201133033;54〇»〇d〇c .41- 201133033

(R-69) (R-70) (R-72)(R-69) (R-70) (R-72)

(R-78) (R-73) (R-74&gt; (R-75) (R-76) (R-77) (R-79) i54080.doc(R-78) (R-73) (R-74&gt; (R-75) (R-76) (R-77) (R-79) i54080.doc

(R-SQ) •48·(R-SQ) •48·

(ΐΙ-»5) ^yOy^y^CrY^(ΐΙ-»5) ^yOy^y^CrY^

OyCr^rtOyCr^rt

(^n(^n

(R-89) (R.-90)(R-89) (R.-90)

(U*9«(U*9«

^54〇S〇-d〇C .49 - 201133033^54〇S〇-d〇C .49 - 201133033

(R-98) (R-99) (R-IOO) (R-101) (R-102) (R-103) (R-I04) (R-93) (R-^4) (R-95) (R-96) (R-97) 154080.doc -50- 201133033(R-98) (R-99) (R-IOO) (R-101) (R-102) (R-103) (R-I04) (R-93) (R-^4) (R-95 ) (R-96) (R-97) 154080.doc -50- 201133033

(R-105) (R-106) (R-I07) (R-108) (R-109) (R-110) (R-lll) (R-112) (R-I13) (R-114) (R-115) (R-116) 154080.doc -51 - 201133033(R-105) (R-106) (R-I07) (R-108) (R-109) (R-110) (R-lll) (R-112) (R-I13) (R-114) (R-115) (R-116) 154080.doc -51 - 201133033

(R-117) (R-I19) (R-120) (R-I21) (R-122) (R-123) (R-124) (R-125) (R-126) (R-I27) (R-128) 154080.doc -52- 201133033 CR-129)(R-117) (R-I19) (R-120) (R-I21) (R-122) (R-123) (R-124) (R-125) (R-126) (R-I27) (R-128) 154080.doc -52- 201133033 CR-129)

(R-130)(R-130)

(R-131)(R-131)

(R-132) Ο(R-132) Ο

〇 一 (R-133)〇 one (R-133)

&lt;R-134) 化合物(A)較佳為滿足式(5)及式(6)之化合物。 (N^4)/3&lt;k+l+4 (5) 12^Νπ^ 22 (6) [式(5)及式(6)中,Νπ表示Ar所具有之芳香環中所含之π 電子數。k及1表示與式(Β)及(C)中者相同之含義] 作為化合物(A)之具體例,可列舉表1及表2所示之化合 物(i)~化合物(xxxiv)。再者,表1及表2中之R1表示-D^G1-L1,R2表示-D2-G2-L2。 154080.doc -53 - 201133033 [表i] 化合物 -Ar- (i) (ar-l) (ϋ) (ar-40) (iii) (ar-41) (iv) (ar-42) (v) (ar-43) (vi) (ar-44) (νϋ) (ar-47) (viii) (ar-50) (ix) (ar-52) ⑻ (ar-70) (xi) (ar-71) (xii) (ar-80) (xiii) (ar-82) (xiv) (ar-83) (xv) (ar-84) (xvi) (ar-81) (xvii) (ar-78)/ (ar-79) (xviii) (ar-77) (xix) (ar-72) (xx) (ar-85) (xxi) (ar-89) (xxii) (ar-95) (xxiii) (ar-97) (xxiv) (ar-45) (XXV) (ar-76) (xxvi) (ar-l 10) (xxvii) (ar-l 15) (xxviii) (ar-4) (R-1)〜(R-48)、(R-57)〜(R-120)及(R-129)〜(11-131)之任 一者 -R1 -R2 (R-l)〜(R-48)&amp; (R-57)〜(R-131)之任 一者 154080.doc -54- 201133033 [表2] 化合物 -Ar- -R1 -R2 (XXX) (ar-120)/(ar-121) (R-57)~(R-120)之任一 者 (R-57HR-120) 及(R-123)〜(R-128)2 任一者 (xxxi) (ar-122)/(ar-123) (xxxii) (ar-130) (R-1HR-48)、(R-57HR-131) 及(R-129)~(R-131)之 任一者 (R-l HR-48) 及(R-57)〜(R-131)之 任一者 (xxxiii) (ar-140) (xxxiv) (ar-150) 上述表1中,化合物(xvii)係指Ar為式(ar-78)所表示之.基 之化合物、或Ar為式(ar-79)所表示之基之化合物、或Ar為 式(ar-78)所表示之基之化合物與Ar為式(ar-7 9)所表示之基 之化合物的混合物之任一者。 上述表2中,化合物(XXX)係指Ar為式(ar-120)所表示之基 之化合物、或Ar為式(ar-121)所表示之基之化合物、或Ar 為式(ar-120)所表示之基之化合物與Ar為式(Ar-121)所表示 之基之化合物的混合物之任一者。同樣地’化合物(xxxi) 係指Ar為式(ar-122)所表示之基之化合物、或Ar為式(ar-123)所表示之基之化合物、或Ar為式(ar-122)所表示之基 之化合物與Ar為式(ar-123)所表示之基之化合物的混合物 之任一者。 作為表1及表2之化合物之具體例,可列舉如下化合物。 可例示下述化合物(i)、化合物(H)、化合物(iv)、化合物 (v)、化合物(vi)、化合物(ix)、化合物(X)、化合物(xi)、化 合物(xvi)、化合物(xviii)、化合物(xix)、化合物(xx)、化 合物(xxi)、化合物(xxiii)、化合物(xxiv)、化合物(xxv)、 化合物(xxvi)、化合物(xxvii)、化合物(xxviii)及化合物 (xxix)之代表性結構式。 154080.doc -55- 201133033&lt;R-134) The compound (A) is preferably a compound satisfying the formula (5) and the formula (6). (N^4)/3&lt;k+l+4 (5) 12^Νπ^ 22 (6) [In equations (5) and (6), Νπ represents the π electron contained in the aromatic ring of Ar number. k and 1 represent the same meanings as in the formulae (Β) and (C). Specific examples of the compound (A) include the compounds (i) to (xxxiv) shown in Tables 1 and 2. Further, in Tables 1 and 2, R1 represents -D^G1-L1, and R2 represents -D2-G2-L2. 154080.doc -53 - 201133033 [Table i] Compound-Ar- (i) (ar-l) (ϋ) (ar-40) (iii) (ar-41) (iv) (ar-42) (v) (ar-43) (ar) (ar-44) (vϋ) (ar-47) (viii) (ar-50) (ix) (ar-52) (8) (ar-70) (xi) (ar-71 (xii) (ar-80) (xiii) (ar-82) (xiv) (ar-83) (xv) (ar-84) (xvi) (ar-81) (xvii) (ar-78)/ (ar-79) (xviii) (ar-77) (xix) (ar-72) (xx) (ar-85) (xxi) (ar-89) (xxii) (ar-95) (xxiii) (ar -97) (xxiv) (ar-45) (XXV) (ar-76) (xxvi) (ar-l 10) (xxvii) (ar-l 15) (xxviii) (ar-4) (R-1) Any of -(R-48), (R-57)~(R-120), and (R-129)~(11-131)-R1 -R2 (Rl)~(R-48)&amp; ( R-57) ~(R-131) either 154080.doc -54- 201133033 [Table 2] Compound-Ar--R1 -R2 (XXX) (ar-120)/(ar-121) (R- 57) Any of (R-120) (R-57HR-120) and (R-123)~(R-128)2 (xxxi) (ar-122)/(ar-123) ( Xxxii) (ar-130) (R-1HR-48), (R-57HR-131) and (R-129)~(R-131) (Rl HR-48) and (R-57) Any one of (R-131) (xxxiii) (ar-140) (xxxiv) (ar-150) In the above Table 1, the compound (xvii) means Ar is a formula The compound represented by ar-78), or the compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-79), or the compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-78) and Ar is a formula (ar- 7 9) Any of a mixture of compounds represented by the group. In the above Table 2, the compound (XXX) means a compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-120), or a compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-121), or Ar is a formula (ar-120) Any one of the compound represented by the group and the compound of Ar which is a compound represented by the formula (Ar-121). Similarly, 'compound (xxxi) means a compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-122), or a compound in which Ar is a group represented by the formula (ar-123), or Ar is a formula (ar-122) Any one of a mixture of the compound represented by the formula and Ar is a compound represented by the formula (ar-123). Specific examples of the compounds of Tables 1 and 2 include the following compounds. The following compounds (i), (H), (iv), (v), (vi), (ix), (X), (xi), (xvi), (xviii), compound (xix), compound (xx), compound (xxi), compound (xxiii), compound (xxiv), compound (xxv), compound (xxvi), compound (xxvii), compound (xxviii), and compound (xxix) representative structural formula. 154080.doc -55- 201133033

154080.doc 56- '2201133033154080.doc 56- '2201133033

(v-6) (V-1)(v-6) (V-1)

C»-l)C»-l)

(x-1) 妙1) 154080.doc -57- 201133033(x-1) Wonderful 1) 154080.doc -57- 201133033

VV

(ivi-I) (xvui-1)(ivi-I) (xvui-1)

(xxiv-1) 154080.doc 201133033(xxiv-1) 154080.doc 201133033

(xxv-1) (xxvM) (xxvii-1) (xxxii-1) (xxxiv-1) 154080.doc -59- 201133033 進而,作為化合物(A),可例示以下者(xxv-1) (xxvM) (xxvii-1) (xxxii-1) (xxxiv-1) 154080.doc -59- 201133033 Further, as the compound (A), the following may be exemplified

N02N02

〇C6Ht νο2 Ύ TM-la TM-lb〇C6Ht νο2 Ύ TM-la TM-lb

TM-2a iOH^ N〇2 TM-3n -(^2)3·TM-2a iOH^ N〇2 TM-3n -(^2)3·

TM-4a TM-Sa ;-{CH2)wTM-4a TM-Sa ;-{CH2)w

‘卞 TM-6a -60- 154080.doc 201133033‘卞 TM-6a -60- 154080.doc 201133033

CNCN

ΤΜ·9»ΤΜ·9»

TM-10aTM-10a

ΤΜ42» 154080.doc • 6卜 201133033ΤΜ42» 154080.doc • 6 Bu 201133033

TM*9b TMAQb TM^llb TM-12bTM*9b TMAQb TM^llb TM-12b

TM-13bTM-13b

\\ P-We I ^KH^KK^ e— TM-14b ^〇~(CH2)4\\ P-We I ^KH^KK^ e— TM-14b ^〇~(CH2)4

TM-lSb 154080.doc • 62- 201133033 ❹TM-lSb 154080.doc • 62- 201133033 ❹

154080.doc 63· 201133033 Η (CHjJs-K)154080.doc 63· 201133033 Η (CHjJs-K)

// TM24// TM24

•〇C(CH2)4^ TM-25•〇C(CH2)4^ TM-25

BrBr

ΤΜ^2δ KK' (CH2)6- TM-27 u^s 陳一κ&gt;Ά〇γΗ2)ιΤΜ^2δ KK' (CH2)6- TM-27 u^s 陈一κ&gt;Ά〇γΗ2)ι

(PH2&gt;4. TM-28(PH2&gt;4. TM-28

KlKl

TM-29 § H 一隱1〇Λ_.〇Γ -64-TM-29 § H 一隐1〇Λ_.〇Γ -64-

TM-3D 154080.doc 201133033 ΟTM-3D 154080.doc 201133033 Ο

TM^J3 2 ΎΜ-34 ❹TM^J3 2 ΎΜ-34 ❹

TM-3S 進而,作為化合物(A) ’亦可列舉式(Al-1)〜式(A68-8)所 表示之化合物。該式中,*表示結合鍵,例如式(A卜1)所 表示之化合物為如下表示者。 154080.doc • 65- 201133033Further, as the compound (A)', a compound represented by the formula (Al-1) to the formula (A68-8) may be mentioned. In the formula, * represents a bond, and for example, the compound represented by the formula (A) is represented as follows. 154080.doc • 65- 201133033

•^~0—C6H12—0〆 : o (Al-1)•^~0—C6H12—0〆 : o (Al-1)

(Al-3) (Al-4) *-〇 〇CeH12-〇,(AM) &gt;^^-〇-c4h8-(^^ (Al-2)(Al-3) (Al-4) *-〇 〇CeH12-〇, (AM) &gt;^^-〇-c4h8-(^^ (Al-2)

(A1^6) (Al-7) / (Al-8)(A1^6) (Al-7) / (Al-8)

'O-〇&lt;^h12-c^ (A2-1) (A2-2) (A2-3) *_0^〇^^价^~/ (A2_5) (A2-6)'O-〇&lt;^h12-c^ (A2-1) (A2-2) (A2-3) *_0^〇^^ Price ^~/ (A2_5) (A2-6)

(A2-4) y hC4HB-(^ (A2-7) (A2-8) 154080.doc -66- 201133033(A2-4) y hC4HB-(^ (A2-7) (A2-8) 154080.doc -66- 201133033

(A3-1)(A3-1)

〇6«,2〇6«,2

(A3-2) (A3-3) (A3-4)(A3-2) (A3-3) (A3-4)

(A3-6) (A3-7) (A3^8)(A3-6) (A3-7) (A3^8)

*-〇'0〇c»h12-c^/ •〇O-〇C4He-^_y*-〇'0〇c»h12-c^/ •〇O-〇C4He-^_y

*-0-t&gt;0CeH12·^ (AS-i) (A4-1) (A4-2) (A4-3) (A4-4)*-0-t&gt;0CeH12·^ (AS-i) (A4-1) (A4-2) (A4-3) (A4-4)

(A4-5) (Λ4-6) (A4-7) (A4-8)(A4-5) (Λ4-6) (A4-7) (A4-8)

(A5-2) (A5-6) 0-CeHi (A«)(A5-2) (A5-6) 0-CeHi (A«)

(A5-7) (A5^8)(A5-7) (A5^8)

(A6-1)(A6-1)

o-c4Hi (A6-3) (A6-4)o-c4Hi (A6-3) (A6-4)

*-〇-{ y'〇 CjH,2巧 / *-〇-(A6-2)*-〇-{ y'〇 CjH, 2 Q / *-〇-(A6-2)

OCeHia-COCeHia-C

'T *_〇_〇_^C4Hr^ (Αί·5) (A6-6) (A6-7) (A6-8) 154080.doc •67- 201133033'T *_〇_〇_^C4Hr^ (Αί·5) (A6-6) (A6-7) (A6-8) 154080.doc •67- 201133033

Μ&gt;-〇-&lt;Η^4ΗτΟ / (A7-2) (A7-1) (A7-5)Μ&gt;-〇-&lt;Η^4ΗτΟ / (A7-2) (A7-1) (A7-5)

(A8*l)(A8*l)

(A10-1)(A10-1)

OC4HrCOC4HrC

(A10-2) *-〇-(~yaceH, (Alfr-3) *-0〇i[ (A10-4)(A10-2) *-〇-(~yaceH, (Alfr-3) *-0〇i[ (A10-4)

*C (A7-6) (A7-7) (Α7·8) (A8-5) (A8-6) (A8-7) (A8-8) (A9-5) (A5M〇 (A»-7) (Α9-β) (A10-5) (A10-6) (A10-7) (AIO-^ 154080.doc • 68 - 201133033*C (A7-6) (A7-7) (Α7·8) (A8-5) (A8-6) (A8-7) (A8-8) (A9-5) (A5M〇 (A»-7 ) (Α9-β) (A10-5) (A10-6) (A10-7) (AIO-^ 154080.doc • 68 - 201133033

(All-1) (All-2) (All-3) (All-4) *_0^O&quot;0CeHi2'^_y (A12*!)(All-1) (All-2) (All-3) (All-4) *_0^O&quot;0CeHi2'^_y (A12*!)

•-〇-Qy〇~c4Hr&lt;^j (A12-2) *-〇〇-〇ceHir^ (A12-3) '-CeHir^_7 S-c4Hir^yo〇^H12y 师&gt; ,-c4h.-&lt;p (A13-2) *-〇-(y〇&lt;k^ry/•-〇-Qy〇~c4Hr&lt;^j (A12-2) *-〇〇-〇ceHir^ (A12-3) '-CeHir^_7 S-c4Hir^yo〇^H12y Division&gt; ,-c4h.- &lt;p (A13-2) *-〇-(y〇&lt;k^ry/

O-CeHijrC (A13-3)O-CeHijrC (A13-3)

Ce {Η54Η«ί (A13-4) 0 心略y (刪 d-^~o-c4Hs-9_/ (a14-2) (A14-3)Ce {Η54Η«ί (A13-4) 0 心略y (deleted d-^~o-c4Hs-9_/ (a14-2) (A14-3)

:4H)rQ_y (A14-4) *-〇-( ;H3eHt (All-5) (AU-6) (All-7) (All-8) (A12-5) (A12-6) (A12-7) (Α12-β) (A13-5) (A13-6) (A13-7) (A13-8) (A14-5) (A14-6) (A14-7) (A14-8) 154080.doc -69- 201133033:4H)rQ_y (A14-4) *-〇-( ;H3eHt (All-5) (AU-6) (All-7) (All-8) (A12-5) (A12-6) (A12-7 ) (Α12-β) (A13-5) (A13-6) (A13-7) (A13-8) (A14-5) (A14-6) (A14-7) (A14-8) 154080.doc - 69- 201133033

MH〇OCeH12^ ^15-1) -0^3^-0-04^7 ^15-5) 4H,^y (A15-2) ♦O-O-o-CeH^o^ (A15-6)w 〇-〇4Η,2-^ .-o-OoCeH,^ (A16-5) *^0-°^^·^ (AI6-2) *-cmQkch:»H«^ (A16-6) •。~〇4^ (爛 *-004”」(A16_7) (A16-4) *-0-&lt;^)-€6H12-^ (A16-8)MH〇OCeH12^ ^15-1) -0^3^-0-04^7 ^15-5) 4H,^y (A15-2) ♦OOo-CeH^o^ (A15-6)w 〇-〇 4Η,2-^ .-o-OoCeH,^ (A16-5) *^0-°^^·^ (AI6-2) *-cmQkch:»H«^ (A16-6) •. ~〇4^ (bad *-004""(A16_7) (A16-4) *-0-&lt;^)-€6H12-^ (A16-8)

(AIM) (A15-8) (A17·1) «_£ --O^Q-O-C^r^y (A17-2) *-〇-〇-〇-〇6»12&lt;^/ (A17-6) *·°Ό~&quot;ζΗ(AIM) (A15-8) (A17·1) «_£ --O^QOC^r^y (A17-2) *-〇-〇-〇-〇6»12&lt;^/ (A17-6) *·°Ό~&quot;ζΗ

C4H#~(^y (A17-5) 卞 (A17-3) ^Ηβ. (Α17-7)C4H#~(^y (A17-5) 卞 (A17-3) ^Ηβ. (Α17-7)

(Α17-4) *-o^yCeHi2-^_y (Α17-8)^-^y〇c,Hi2-y ίΑ18-« .-〇-〇^^Η^ ^18-5) •.分_〇^0·04Η8-^ (Α18-2) (A18-6) (A18-3) CK)4H·- (A18-7) (A18-4) (A18-8) 154080.doc • 70· 201133033(Α17-4) *-o^yCeHi2-^_y (Α17-8)^-^y〇c, Hi2-y ίΑ18-« .-〇-〇^^Η^ ^18-5) •. 分_〇 ^0·04Η8-^ (Α18-2) (A18-6) (A18-3) CK)4H·- (A18-7) (A18-4) (A18-8) 154080.doc • 70· 201133033

V〇-C*He-CV〇-C*He-C

)~〇-〇CeH12-^_/ (A19-1) .-0-^ „ (A19-2) «-OH^VcHCeHiz-O 卜 C4H,—)~〇-〇CeH12-^_/ (A19-1) .-0-^ „ (A19-2) «-OH^VcHCeHiz-O Bu C4H,-

4H8~C 6 yc^ry ^20'1) -CM^-0-C4Hr0^_y (A20-2)降3)4H8~C 6 yc^ry ^20'1) -CM^-0-C4Hr0^_y (A20-2) down 3)

O-C4H0- 卜C4H0~3 / ϋO-C4H0- Bu C4H0~3 / ϋ

C4HirC V-〇CeH1: (A20-4) (A21-2) (A21-3) (A21-1)C4HirC V-〇CeH1: (A20-4) (A21-2) (A21-3) (A21-1)

-0-CeHir' 6 0-CeHt. 0、C4H,;-0-CeHir' 6 0-CeHt. 0, C4H,;

C4He-^y VC4He-^y V

2〇V2〇V

,2P (A21-4) 〇-C4He, 2P (A21-4) 〇-C4He

-CeH-CeH

〇-C4He 〕~cy〇ceH«-^_y (似-1&gt; * (A22-2)(A22-3) *^vK-c4h CHC4Ht (A22-4) (A19-5) (A19-6) (A19-7) (A19-8) (A20-5) (A20-6) (A20-7) (A20-8) (A21-5) (A21-6) (A21-7) (A21-8) (A22-5) (A22-6) (A22-7) (A22-8) 154080.doc -71 - 201133033〇-C4He 〕~cy〇ceH«-^_y (like -1) * (A22-2)(A22-3) *^vK-c4h CHC4Ht (A22-4) (A19-5) (A19-6) ( A19-7) (A19-8) (A20-5) (A20-6) (A20-7) (A20-8) (A21-5) (A21-6) (A21-7) (A21-8) ( A22-5) (A22-6) (A22-7) (A22-8) 154080.doc -71 - 201133033

(A23-1)(A23-1)

DH〇-〇CeHlZ-^DH〇-〇CeHlZ-^

c4h8C4h8

(A23-5) (A23-6) (A23-7) (A23-8)(A23-5) (A23-6) (A23-7) (A23-8)

-cH〇e ·-〇-cH〇e ·-〇

Ηβ_^ (A24-5) r^_J (A24-6) (A24-3) (A24-4)Ηβ_^ (A24-5) r^_J (A24-6) (A24-3) (A24-4)

(A25-8) (A26-S) 0-Q-0-C4Hr&lt;^/ (A26-2) *-〇-〇-〇-〇6«12-^ (A26^) (A26-3) (A26-7) 〇·〇4^12η (A26-4) 〇-C4He-C^y (A26-8) I54080.doc -72- 201133033(A25-8) (A26-S) 0-Q-0-C4Hr&lt;^/ (A26-2) *-〇-〇-〇-〇6«12-^ (A26^) (A26-3) (A26 -7) 〇·〇4^12η (A26-4) 〇-C4He-C^y (A26-8) I54080.doc -72- 201133033

(A27-1)(A27-1)

(A27-2)(A27-2)

*-0^0^墙_〇 (A274”_〇 分 CeHl 卞cT 0*-0^0^Wall_〇 (A274"_〇 分 CeHl 卞cT 0

(AM-1) &gt;{y~〇-〇^r&lt;y/ (A28-2) *-〇-^y〇ceHir^_/(AM-1) &gt;{y~〇-〇^r&lt;y/ (A28-2) *-〇-^y〇ceHir^_/

O-CeH (Α28·3) &gt;C4Hr 0 *-〇-O-CeH (Α28·3) &gt;C4Hr 0 *-〇-

i-C^Hu-C (A28-4) (A29-1)i-C^Hu-C (A28-4) (A29-1)

.〇*c4HbH^_/.〇*c4HbH^_/

(A29-2)(A29-2)

♦-O-Q^OCeHu-t^♦-O-Q^OCeHu-t^

(A30-1) (A30-2) (A30-3)(A30-1) (A30-2) (A30-3)

(A30-4) *-〇-((A30-4) *-〇-(

(A27-5) (A27-6) (A27-7) (A27-8) (A28-5) (A28-6) (A28-7) (A28-8) (A29-5) (A29-6) (A29-7) (A29-8) (A30-5) (A3(«) (A30-7) (A30-8) 154080.doc -73- 201133033(A27-5) (A27-6) (A27-7) (A27-8) (A28-5) (A28-6) (A28-7) (A28-8) (A29-5) (A29-6) (A29-7) (A29-8) (A30-5) (A3(«) (A30-7) (A30-8) 154080.doc -73- 201133033

^HbtQ / (A31-2)^HbtQ / (A31-2)

&gt;CeH (A31-1)&gt;CeH (A31-1)

0-C4H0-C4H

(A31-3) (A31-4) *-〇^Q^oceH12^y (A32·1)(A31-3) (A31-4) *-〇^Q^oceH12^y (A32·1)

(A31-5) -Q-o-cBH12-o^j· (A31-6) o (A31-7) T 2-(A31-8) V〇-C4H8- (A32-5) 〇-〇^2-〇^J (A32-6)(A31-5) -Qo-cBH12-o^j· (A31-6) o (A31-7) T 2-(A31-8) V〇-C4H8- (A32-5) 〇-〇^2-〇 ^J (A32-6)

(A32-2) &gt;CeHir^_/1l'yT㈨3-” 斷y (啊 (A33-2) *-oO^-CeHu-c^y Λ (A33-3) *-&lt;hTV(〇 12~~》/ v._y Q_Q4^e_q^^ / (A33-8) 6H12-p (酬(偏&gt; D4He-^y (A34-2) *-〇hQ-o-c6h12^ {A34_6) (A34-7) &gt;c4h12 -α〇βΗ1: ΟΌρΗ·|2(A32-2) &gt;CeHir^_/1l'yT(9) 3-" Break y (Ah (A33-2) *-oO^-CeHu-c^y Λ (A33-3) *-&lt;hTV(〇12~ ~》/ v._y Q_Q4^e_q^^ / (A33-8) 6H12-p (reward (bias) D4He-^y (A34-2) *-〇hQ-o-c6h12^ {A34_6) (A34- 7) &gt;c4h12 -α〇βΗ1: ΟΌρΗ·|2

CK54Hi2-C *-0-( VOCe -〇~C 泰 &lt;° O-CeHt P &quot;b-C«HirqCK54Hi2-C *-0-( VOCe -〇~C Thai &lt;° O-CeHt P &quot;b-C«Hirq

(A32-7) (A32-8) 〇 (A33-6) (A33-7) (A34-3) (A34-4) 〇-c4h8-c c CeH12-q / (A34-8) 154080.doc -74- 201133033(A32-7) (A32-8) 〇(A33-6) (A33-7) (A34-3) (A34-4) 〇-c4h8-c c CeH12-q / (A34-8) 154080.doc - 74- 201133033

(A35-1)(A35-1)

(A35-5) (A35-6) (A35-7) (A3W) ._^〇-〇€^ (A36-5) &quot; (A36-2) *^ΚΙ)-0-(A36-6&gt; (Α36-7)(A35-5) (A35-6) (A35-7) (A3W) ._^〇-〇€^ (A36-5) &quot; (A36-2) *^ΚΙ)-0-(A36-6&gt; (Α36-7)

•°&quot;〇^卞(A36·3) * °〇ic b 部卞、一,r_° 分C*H1 厂} (A36-4) (A36-8) .^(y〇^n-y (A37-1) (A37-5) Η,-C^y (A37-2) *-0-0-°^«·^/ (A37-6)•°&quot;〇^卞(A36·3) * °〇ic b Part, one, r_° Minute C*H1 Factory} (A36-4) (A36-8) .^(y〇^ny (A37- 1) (A37-5) Η, -C^y (A37-2) *-0-0-°^«·^/ (A37-6)

0-CeH12-0 0&lt;;4»12-〇,0-CeH12-0 0&lt;;4»12-〇,

154080.doc -75- 201133033154080.doc -75- 201133033

&gt;*C4I&gt;*C4I

(A39-4) -〇-〇,·&lt;κν^ (祕 1&gt; (A39-1) (A39-2) (A39-3)(A39-4) -〇-〇,·&lt;κν^ (秘 1&gt; (A39-1) (A39-2) (A39-3)

0-C*H»-^_y (A39-5)0-C*H»-^_y (A39-5)

(A39-6) (A39-7) (A39-8)(A39-6) (A39-7) (A39-8)

0-0^8« (A40-2)() *-°〇^卞 cK-c4h^ (A 格 S&gt; (A406) (A40-7) (A40-8)0-0^8« (A40-2)() *-°〇^卞 cK-c4h^ (A grid S&gt; (A406) (A40-7) (A40-8)

,wv (廳 &gt; Vs&quot;,wv (hall &gt;Vs&quot;

(A42-2) *-0-0*°^^^ (A.42-6)(A42-2) *-0-0*°^^^ (A.42-6)

(A42-3) o-〇4Hr^_/ (A42-4)(A42-3) o-〇4Hr^_/ (A42-4)

(Α42·7&gt; (Α42-β) 154080.doc *76- 201133033(Α42·7&gt; (Α42-β) 154080.doc *76- 201133033

-〇CeH12^q i (A43-1) Λ -Ο-〇CeH12^q i (A43-1) Λ -Ο

〇-C4He~C -O-C4H1 l8-^_/ (A43-2) *-0-(]}-0-C6Hi2-^_jc (Λ43-3) (A44-1)〇-C4He~C -O-C4H1 l8-^_/ (A43-2) *-0-(]}-0-C6Hi2-^_jc (Λ43-3) (A44-1)

w/ 〇~CeHig-^ f c4Hr^ / (A44-2) 1 (Α4Φ-3) CAHg &gt;CeH12-Q^ y &gt;C4Htf (A4‘4”-〇〇dyw/ 〇~CeHig-^ f c4Hr^ / (A44-2) 1 (Α4Φ-3) CAHg &gt;CeH12-Q^ y &gt;C4Htf (A4‘4”-〇〇dy

(Α46·1) 卞(Α46·1) 卞

,'v 〇-C4H12*^y (A46-2) *-〇 (Α46·3) *-〇- (A43-5) (A43&lt;6) (A43-7) (A43-8) (A44-5) (A44-6) (A44-7) (A44-8) (A45-5) (Α45-ύ) (A4S-7) (A45-8) (A46-5) (A46-6) (A46-7) (A46-8) 154080.doc -77-, 'v 〇-C4H12*^y (A46-2) *-〇(Α46·3) *-〇- (A43-5) (A43&lt;6) (A43-7) (A43-8) (A44-5 ) (A44-6) (A44-7) (A44-8) (A45-5) (Α45-ύ) (A4S-7) (A45-8) (A46-5) (A46-6) (A46-7 ) (A46-8) 154080.doc -77-

W〆(刺(綱 (A47-2) (A47-6) (A47-3) *-0〇(°C4Ha_c . &lt;A47-7)W〆(纲(纲(A47-2)(A47-6)(A47-3) *-0〇(°C4Ha_c . &lt;A47-7)

* (ΓIc^ry {M%4) -°0^y ^A47-8) -c^yo^ry ^1) &lt;A48*5&gt; (A48-2) «-O-O-O-CeHu-Q^/ (A48-6)* (ΓIc^ry {M%4) -°0^y ^A47-8) -c^yo^ry ^1) &lt;A48*5&gt; (A48-2) «-OOO-CeHu-Q^/ ( A48-6)

)-〇sH^2' (Λ48-3))-〇sH^2' (Λ48-3)

h〇4^lH〇4^l

(A48-T) (A48-4) *~chT^c^h«-Q/ (A48-8) w cT 0分,(綱-〇&gt;,(A49·5)(A48-T) (A48-4) *~chT^c^h«-Q/ (A48-8) w cT 0 points, (class-〇&gt;, (A49·5)

1540B0.doc .C^-O-CHr^y (A49-2) «-〇〇〇CeH,zy/ (A49-^&gt; (A49-3) * . _ (A49-7)1540B0.doc .C^-O-CHr^y (A49-2) «-〇〇〇CeH,zy/ (A49-^&gt; (A49-3) * . _ (A49-7)

&lt;i2y ^ (A49-8) (A50-1)&lt;i2y ^ (A49-8) (A50-1)

-o-c^He-iyj (Λ50-5) (一身,(_ 广\ Ϋ-o-c^He-iyj (Λ50-5) (one body, (_ 广\ Ϋ

(A50-4) y (A50-3) (A50-T) (Λ50-8) -78- 201133033 C3H7(A50-4) y (A50-3) (A50-T) (Λ50-8) -78- 201133033 C3H7

•-O-^Q-oCeH^'^y (A51-1) *-〇-Q-〇-c4Hr^_y (A51-2) O-CiHg-•-O-^Q-oCeH^'^y (A51-1) *-〇-Q-〇-c4Hr^_y (A51-2) O-CiHg-

&lt;〇 〇-CeH1: P (A5I-3)&lt;〇 〇-CeH1: P (A5I-3)

P 3-C4H8P 3-C4H8

D~Q^aceH12-o ^ (A52-1) (A51-4) CgH 12D~Q^aceH12-o ^ (A52-1) (A51-4) CgH 12

Q -C4He- 〇C4H8-〇 , (A52-2) *^~〇- 〇 ceH12〇 (A52-3) 3供。7 (綱Q -C4He- 〇C4H8-〇 , (A52-2) *^~〇- 〇 ceH12〇 (A52-3) 3 for supply. 7

Q v-o-c4h,Q v-o-c4h,

(A53-1) Ή(A53-1) Ή

H^jK-OCBHlr^j· ,-Ο^Ο-^Η,-^ (A53-2) *-0^&gt;0-C6H12r0^ W 〇CeH12-^y (A53-3)H^jK-OCBHlr^j· , -Ο^Ο-^Η,-^ (A53-2) *-0^&gt;0-C6H12r0^ W 〇CeH12-^y (A53-3)

0-C4He-C -4«„-q f (A53-4) *-〇^^c6H12-c^y0-C4He-C -4«„-q f (A53-4) *-〇^^c6H12-c^y

(A54-1)(A54-1)

3-^^-〇〇6H12~^ /3-^^-〇〇6H12~^ /

-〇-C4H$-^ / (A54-1)(_*'〇仆二-〇-C4H$-^ / (A54-1)(_*'〇仆二

(A51-5) (A51-6) (AS1-7) (A51-8) (A52-5) (A52-6) (A52-7) (AS2-8) (A53-5) (A53-6) (A53-7) (A53-8) (A54-5) (A54-6) (A54-7) (A54-8) 154080.doc -79- 201133033(A51-5) (A51-6) (AS1-7) (A51-8) (A52-5) (A52-6) (A52-7) (AS2-8) (A53-5) (A53-6) (A53-7) (A53-8) (A54-5) (A54-6) (A54-7) (A54-8) 154080.doc -79- 201133033

(A5S-2) *^-〇-0-0βΗΐ2^/ (A55-1)(A5S-2) *^-〇-0-0βΗΐ2^/ (A55-1)

灿卞Ο'2?h-f^-〇CeHi2-J_/ (A56-1) ._〇_Q_&lt;J-c (Α55-4) 'C4H1灿卞Ο'2?h-f^-〇CeHi2-J_/ (A56-1) ._〇_Q_&lt;J-c (Α55-4) 'C4H1

-〇ΆΗβ— (Α56-2) -〇&lt;-^ry (AS6-3) (A56-4) (ASM)-〇ΆΗβ—(Α56-2) -〇&lt;-^ry (AS6-3) (A56-4) (ASM)

*-o-^y-〇-c4He-c^_y (A57-2)7 (縱3”-ch^_ h〇4Hirc (A57-4) 'eHt*-o-^y-〇-c4He-c^_y (A57-2)7 (vertical 3"-ch^_ h〇4Hirc (A57-4) 'eHt

*-o-^y〇csHir^ ^58-1) *-〇-(3~0&quot;c*H8_J_/ (A58-2) *-〇-〇-〇-CeHtt-^_y P 〇CsH,r^y (A58-3) o-c4h. , (A5JM) (A55-6) (A55-7) (AS5-8) (A56-5) (A56-6) (A56-7) (A56-8) (A57-5) (A57-6) (A57-7) (A57-8) (A58-S) (AS8-6) (A58-7) (Λ58-8) 154080.doc • 80 · 201133033*-o-^y〇csHir^ ^58-1) *-〇-(3~0&quot;c*H8_J_/ (A58-2) *-〇-〇-〇-CeHtt-^_y P 〇CsH,r^ y (A58-3) o-c4h. , (A5JM) (A55-6) (A55-7) (AS5-8) (A56-5) (A56-6) (A56-7) (A56-8) ( A57-5) (A57-6) (A57-7) (A57-8) (A58-S) (AS8-6) (A58-7) (Λ58-8) 154080.doc • 80 · 201133033

(A59-2) (A5t3) O-cStr (A59-4)(A59-2) (A5t3) O-cStr (A59-4)

*-〇-Q-〇CeH12-^y (A60-1) (A60-2) ^-O-^-O-CgHirC^y*-〇-Q-〇CeH12-^y (A60-1) (A60-2) ^-O-^-O-CgHirC^y

«Hire (A60-3)«Hire (A60-3)

OC4He—C (A6〇-4)OC4He-C (A6〇-4)

p -CeHirq *&lt;H^^OCeH12-(^y (A61-1) *ό-〇κ〇〇4Η(Γ^^ (A61-2) (A61-3) (Λ61-4)p -CeHirq *&lt;H^^OCeH12-(^y (A61-1) *ό-〇κ〇〇4Η(Γ^^ (A61-2) (A61-3) (Λ61-4)

丨-C4Hl2^y -〇Ό^η«·^ (a62*·^ *-〇-Q-^&lt;W54H*^-/ (A62-2) *^&gt;-{2h〇-CeH,2-^_/· h12-〇 , (A62^) 12^-, 、」0 必 H「0〆 0 0 b-CiHu-C^y (A62_4) (A59-5) (A59-6) (A59-7) (AS9-8) (A60-5) (A60-6) (A60-7) (A60-8) (A61-5) (A61-6) (A61-7) (A61-8) (A62-5) (A62-6) (A62rT) (A62-8) 154080.doc -81 - 201133033丨-C4Hl2^y -〇Ό^η«·^ (a62*·^ *-〇-Q-^&lt;W54H*^-/ (A62-2) *^&gt;-{2h〇-CeH,2- ^_/· h12-〇, (A62^) 12^-, , "0" must be H "0〆0 0 b-CiHu-C^y (A62_4) (A59-5) (A59-6) (A59-7 ) (AS9-8) (A60-5) (A60-6) (A60-7) (A60-8) (A61-5) (A61-6) (A61-7) (A61-8) (A62-5 ) (A62-6) (A62rT) (A62-8) 154080.doc -81 - 201133033

*-〇-〇~oc*H)2^_y ^63*1) (A63-5) ^Ό^-^Ηβ-^ (A63-2) *&lt;n(J)-0-CeHi2-&lt;^_y (A63-6) p (A6W) (A63-7)*-〇-〇~oc*H)2^_y ^63*1) (A63-5) ^Ό^-^Ηβ-^ (A63-2) *&lt;n(J)-0-CeHi2-&lt; ^_y (A63-6) p (A6W) (A63-7)

d-c4h12-^ ^ ^-v^^,r-Q_y M^-Q-oCeH^^y (A64-1) (A64-5) 3O^b-CeH12 y *-〇 '&lt;yL^-y ^ (A64-2) *-OH〇&gt;-〇-CeH,sr^_y (A64-6) (A64-3) *-〇_Q^c^ (A64.7) ;©Hi2~/ (A64-8)D-c4h12-^ ^ ^-v^^,r-Q_y M^-Q-oCeH^^y (A64-1) (A64-5) 3O^b-CeH12 y *-〇'&lt;yL^-y ^ (A64-2) *-OH〇&gt;-〇-CeH,sr^_y (A64-6) (A64-3) *-〇_Q^c^ (A64.7) ;©Hi2~/ (A64 -8)

(A66-1)(A66-1)

c4H8- -〇-^^-CK)4He-^/ (A66-2) *O-(3~0'ceHi2^_/ (A66-3) ^c4H8- -〇-^^-CK)4He-^/ (A66-2) *O-(3~0'ceHi2^_/ (A66-3) ^

CeHtT-^y (Λ66-5) (A66-6) (A66-7) (A66-8)CeHtT-^y (Λ66-5) (A66-6) (A66-7) (A66-8)

5^4H«-Q / (A66-4) *-0-Q-c9h12-5^4H«-Q / (A66-4) *-0-Q-c9h12-

I54080.doc -82- 201133033I54080.doc -82- 201133033

(A68-1) (A68-2) (A68-3) (A68-4) }r&gt;p 、J 〇-C^*-^_y(A68-1) (A68-2) (A68-3) (A68-4) }r&gt;p , J 〇-C^*-^_y

(A68-5&gt; (A68-6) (A68-7) (A68-8) 化合物(A)可藉由根據其結構,適當組合Methoden der Organischen Chemie 、 Organic Reactions 、 Organic Syntheses、Comprehensive Organic Synthesis、新實驗化學 講座等中記載之公知之有機合成反應(例如縮合反應、酯 化反應、威廉遜反應(Williamson reaction)、烏爾曼反應 (Ullmann Reaction)、維提希反應(Wittig Reactio)、希夫驗 生成反應、苄基化反應、菌頭反應、鈐木-宮浦反應、根 岸反應、熊田反應、檜山反應、布赫瓦爾德-哈特維希反 應(Buchwald-Hartwig Reaction)、傅瑞德爾-克拉夫茨反應 (Friedel-Crafts Reaction)、赫克反應(Heck Reaction)、酵 醛反應等)而製造。 例如,於化合物(A)之D1及D2為*-0-C0-之情形時,可藉 由使式(1-1): HO—Ar—OH (l*l) [式中,Ar表示與上述相同之含義] 所表示之化合物與式(1-2): P1一E1—G1一COgH (ι*2) 154080.doc -83· 201133033 中,G1、E1、Al ,、Fl 】 16f, . _ B ^及匕表不與上述相同之含 不之化合物進行反應,而獲得式(1·3) pi -(A68-5&gt; (A68-6) (A68-7) (A68-8) Compound (A) can be combined according to its structure, Methoden der Organischen Chemie, Organic Reactions, Organic Syntheses, Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, New Experiment Well-known organic synthesis reactions (such as condensation reaction, esterification reaction, Williamson reaction, Ullmann reaction, Wittig Reactio, and Schiff test) described in the chemical lectures and the like. Reaction, benzylation reaction, bacterial head reaction, eucalyptus-gongpu reaction, root-bank reaction, bearfield reaction, Laoshan reaction, Buchwald-Hartwig Reaction, Friedel-Krafts By the reaction (Friedel-Crafts Reaction), Heck reaction, aldehyde reaction, etc., for example, when D1 and D2 of the compound (A) are *-0-C0-, Formula (1-1): HO—Ar—OH (l*l) [wherein, Ar represents the same meaning as above] The compound represented by the formula (1-2): P1—E1—G1—COgH ( *2) 154080.doc -83· 201133033, G1, E1, Al, Fl 】 16f, . _ B ^ and 匕 table do not react with the same compound containing the above, and obtain the formula (1·3) pi -

^Gl—C—0—Ar—〇H (1·3&gt; B、F、P!及k表示與上述相同 並藉由使所得之式(1_3)所表示 [式中,Ar、Gi、β1、Αι 之含義]所表示之化合物 之化合物與式(1_4): H02C~G2-E24A2~~B2)rF2-HP2 (1-4) [式中’ G2、Ε2' Α2、β2、F2、pw表示與上述相同之含 義]所表示之化合物進行反應而製造。 式(1-1)所表示之化合物與式(1_2)所表示之化合物之反 應、及式(1-3)所表示之化合物與式(1_4)所表示之化合物之 反應較佳為於酯化劑之存在下實施。 作為酯化劑(縮合劑)’可列舉:環己基_3_(2_咪啉基乙 基)碳二酿亞胺間-對甲苯磺酸酯、二環己基碳二醯亞胺、 1-乙基-3-(3-二甲基胺基丙基)碳二醯亞胺、丨_乙基·3_(3_二 甲基胺基丙基)碳二酿亞胺鹽酸鹽(部分水溶性碳二醯亞 胺:作為WSC而市售)、雙(2,6-二異丙基苯基)碳二醯亞 胺、雙(三甲基矽烷基)碳二醯亞胺、雙異丙基碳二醢亞胺 等碳二醯亞胺;2-甲基-6-硝基苯甲酸酐、2,2,-羰基雙-1H-咪唑、1,1·-草醯基二咪唑、疊氮磷酸二苯酯、1_(4_硝基苯 磺醯基)-1Η-1,2,4-三唑、1H-苯并三唑-1-基氧基三吡咯烷 基鎸六氟鱗酸鹽、1H-笨并三唑-1-基氧基三(二甲基胺基) 154080.doc •84- 201133033 Ο^Gl—C—0—Ar—〇H (1·3&gt; B, F, P!, and k are the same as described above and are represented by the obtained formula (1_3) [wherein, Ar, Gi, β1, Αι meaning] Compound of formula and formula (1_4): H02C~G2-E24A2~~B2)rF2-HP2 (1-4) [wherein G2, Ε2' Α2, β2, F2, pw The compound represented by the above meaning is produced by reacting the compound. The reaction of the compound represented by the formula (1-1) with the compound represented by the formula (1-2), and the reaction of the compound represented by the formula (1-3) with the compound represented by the formula (1-4) are preferably carried out in the esterification. It is carried out in the presence of a agent. Examples of the esterifying agent (condensing agent) include cyclohexyl_3_(2-morpholinoethyl)carbodiimide-p-toluenesulfonate, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 1-B. 3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, 丨_ethyl·3_(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (partially water soluble) Carboimine: commercially available as WSC), bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)carbodiimide, bis(trimethyldecyl)carbodiimide, diisopropyl Carbonodiimide such as carbodiimide; 2-methyl-6-nitrobenzoic anhydride, 2,2,-carbonylbis-1H-imidazole, 1,1·-oxalyldiimidazole, azide Diphenyl phosphate, 1-(4-nitrophenylsulfonyl)-1Η-1,2,4-triazole, 1H-benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinium hexafluorophosphate , 1H-stupidyltriazol-1-yloxytris(dimethylamino) 154080.doc •84- 201133033 Ο

鱗六氟磷酸鹽、Ν,Ν,Ν’,Ν,-四曱基_〇_(Ν_丁二醯亞胺基)脲 鑌四氟硼酸鹽、:^-(1,2,2,2-四氣乙氧基羰氧基)丁二醯亞 胺、N-苄氧幾基丁二醯亞胺、〇_(6_氯苯并三唑-卜 基)-N,N,N',N’-四曱基脲鏽四氟硼酸鹽、〇_(6_氯苯并三 唑-1-基)-N,N,N’,N’-四甲基脲鏽六氟磷酸鹽、2_溴·乙基 吡啶鏽四氟硼酸鹽、氯化2_氣_1,3_二曱基咪唑鏽、2_ 氣-1,3-二甲基咪唑鑌六氟磷酸鹽、碘化2_氣_丨_甲基吡啶 鏽、2-氣-1-曱基吡啶鏽對甲苯磺酸鹽、2_氟_丨_甲基吡啶鏽 對甲苯磺酸鹽、三氯乙酸五氯苯酯等。其中,就反應性、 成本、可使用之溶劑之方面而言,作為縮合劑,較佳為二 環己基碳二醯亞胺、丨_乙基_3_(3_二曱基胺基丙基)碳二醯 亞胺、1-乙基-3-(3-二甲基胺基丙基)碳二醯亞胺鹽酸鹽、 雙(2,6-二異丙基苯基)碳二醯亞胺、雙(三甲基矽烷基)碳二 醯亞胺、雙異丙基碳二醯亞胺、2,2,_羰基雙_ih_咪唑。 含有化合物(A)之組合物亦可含有與化合物(a)不同之液 晶化合物。 作為上述液晶化合物之具體例,可列舉液晶便覽(液晶 便覽編集委M會編’丸善股份有限公司鳩㈣月则發 2)之第3章分子結構與液晶性之3 2非手性棒狀液晶分 子、3.3手性棒狀液晶分子中所記載之化合物等。其中, 較佳為具有聚合性基且表現液晶性之化合物。 用上述液晶化合物可單獨使用,或者亦可組合2種以上使 用。 作為液晶化合物 可列舉式(6)所表示之化合物(以下, 154080.doc -85- 201133033 有時稱作「化合物(6)」)。Squamous hexafluorophosphate, bismuth, bismuth, Ν', Ν, -tetradecyl 〇 Ν Ν Ν 丁 丁 丁 镔 镔 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : -tetrakis ethoxycarbonyloxy)butaneimine, N-benzyloxybutylideneimide, 〇_(6-chlorobenzotriazole-bu)-N,N,N', N'-tetradecylurea rust tetrafluoroborate, 〇_(6-chlorobenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethylurea rust hexafluorophosphate, 2 _Bromoethylpyridyl rust tetrafluoroborate, chlorinated 2_gas_1,3_dimercaptoimidazole rust, 2_gas-1,3-dimethylimidazolium hexafluorophosphate, iodized 2 gas _丨_Methylpyridine rust, 2-air-1-pyridylpyridyl rust p-toluenesulfonate, 2-fluoro-oxime-methylpyridine rust p-toluenesulfonate, pentachlorophenyl trichloroacetate, and the like. Among them, as a condensing agent, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, 丨_ethyl_3_(3-didecylaminopropyl) is preferred as the condensing agent in terms of reactivity, cost, and solvent to be used. Carboimine, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride, bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)carbodiimide Amine, bis(trimethyldecyl)carbodiimide, diisopropylcarbodiimide, 2,2,-carbonylbis-ih-imidazole. The composition containing the compound (A) may also contain a liquid crystal compound different from the compound (a). Specific examples of the liquid crystal compound include a liquid crystal display (Limited by Liquid Crystal Handbook Compilation Committee M, 'Maruzen Co., Ltd. 四 (4), and 2). Chapter 3 Molecular Structure and Liquid Crystallinity 3 2 Non-chiral Rod-shaped Liquid Crystal A compound or the like described in the molecule or the 3.3 chiral rod-like liquid crystal molecule. Among them, a compound having a polymerizable group and exhibiting liquid crystallinity is preferred. These liquid crystal compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The liquid crystal compound is a compound represented by the formula (6) (hereinafter, 154080.doc-85-201133033 may be referred to as "compound (6)").

Pn-E11-(B11-A11)t-B12-G (6) [式⑹中’ A丨1表示碳數6〜18之2價芳香族烴基或碳數μ 之^賈脂環式烴基,該芳香族烴基及該月旨環式煙基中所含 之氫原子可經鹵素原子、可具有款基之碳數卜6之炫基、 可具1 有氟基之碳數卜6之絲基m氰基取代。 B&quot;及B丨2分別獨立表示_CsC_、ch=ch _c出 S -c(-〇)- ' 〇(=〇)-〇. &gt; -〇-c(=〇). , -〇-〇(=〇)-〇- 、-CH=N-、养CH_、_N=N_、_c(=〇) nr16、取i6_ c(哪、-〇CH2…0CF2_、_CH2〇、_cF2〇 .〔η· C(=0)-〇_、_〇_c(=〇)或單鍵。r16表示氫原子或碳數卜 烷基。 G表示氫原子、_素原子、碳數1〜13之院基、碳數卜13 ^烧氧基、碳數卜13之氟烧基、碳數HkN.烧基胺基' 氰基、硝基或-E12-p12。 E1丨及E12表示碳數卜以 - 一基,s亥烷二基中所含之氫 原子可經鹵素原子取代,該烧二基中所含之偶-可經_〇_ 或-CO-取代。 Ρ11及ρ12表示聚合性基。 之整數。於鹄2以上之整數之情形時,複數個 彼此可相同,亦可不同] 作為P11及ρ〗2,可列集你儿人 J歹〗舉與化合物(A)之ρι及P2相同 就可於更低溫度下淮耔 土 進仃硬化之方面而言,較佳為光聚合性 巷’較佳為自由基臀人^甘丄、β 土聚&amp;性基或陽離子聚合性基,尤其是就 154080.doc -86- 201133033 合易操作且容易製造化合物(6)之方面而言,較佳為式(Ρ 1)〜(Ρ-5)所表示之基。 RC=R18 * IR19 Λ- R21 (P-1) &lt;Ρ·2&gt; (Ρ-3) (Ρ-4)Pn-E11-(B11-A11)t-B12-G (6) [In the formula (6), 'A丨1 represents a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of 6 to 18 or a glycerol ring hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of μ. The aromatic hydrocarbon group and the hydrogen atom contained in the cyclic nicotine group may pass through a halogen atom, may have a carbon number of the group, and may have a fluorine group-based carbon number. Cyano substitution. B&quot; and B丨2 respectively represent _CsC_, ch=ch _c out S -c(-〇)- ' 〇(=〇)-〇. &gt; -〇-c(=〇). , -〇-〇 (=〇)-〇-, -CH=N-, raise CH_, _N=N_, _c(=〇) nr16, take i6_c (which, -〇CH2...0CF2_, _CH2〇, _cF2〇.[η·C (=0)-〇_, _〇_c(=〇) or single bond. r16 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon number of alkyl groups. G represents a hydrogen atom, a _ atom, a carbon number of 1 to 13, and carbon. a number of 13 ^ alkoxy, carbon number 13 fluoroalkyl, carbon number HkN. alkylamino 'cyano, nitro or -E12-p12. E1 丨 and E12 means carbon number - a base, The hydrogen atom contained in the s-halodiyl group may be substituted by a halogen atom, and the even-option contained in the succinyl group may be substituted by _〇_ or -CO-. Ρ11 and ρ12 represent an integer of a polymerizable group. In the case of an integer greater than 2, the plurals may be the same or different. As P11 and ρ〗 2, you can list your children. J歹 is the same as the compound (A) and ρι and P2. In terms of the softening of the Huai-Yu soil at low temperatures, it is preferred that the photopolymerizable lane is preferably a free radical hip-manganese, a beta-earth poly-amplifier or a cationic polymer. The basis of the formula (6) is preferably a group represented by the formula (Ρ 1) to (Ρ-5), in particular, in terms of ease of operation and easy production of the compound (6). RC=R18 * IR19 Λ- R21 (P-1) &lt;Ρ·2&gt; (Ρ-3) (Ρ-4)

ΟΟ

= (Ρ-υ〜〇Μ)中,r17〜r21分別獨立表示碳數卜6之烧基或 氫原子。*表示與B丨1之結合鍵] 其中’作為P11及Pi較佳為乙稀基、丙烯基、氧雜環 丙烷基、曱基氧雜環丙烷基、氧雜環丁烷基、丙烯醯氧基 或曱基丙烯醯氧基,更佳為丙烯醯氧基或曱基丙烯醯氧 基。 A之芳香族烴基及脂環式烴基之碳數例如為3〜丨8,較 仫為5 12,尤佳為5或6。作為A11,較佳為丨,4_伸環己基或 1,4 -伸笨基。 E及E為碳數1〜18之烷二基,較佳為直鏈狀或支鏈為i 個部位之碳數1〜12之烷二基。 具體可列舉:亞曱基、伸乙基、丙二基、丁二基、戊二 基、己二基、庚二基、辛二基、壬二基、癸二基、十一烧 一基十一烷二基、-ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2-、-ch2-ch2-o -ch2-ch2-〇-ch2-ch2-^-ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2 -o-ch2-ch2-等。 化合物(6)中,例如作為1為4且G為_Εΐ2·ρ12之化合物之具 體例,可列舉式(Μ)〜式(1_4)所表示之化合物, 154080.doc -87- 201133033 作為t為4且G為·ΕΚΡ12以外之基之化合物的具體例,可 列舉式(II-1)〜式(ΙΙ·4)所表示之化合物, 作為t為3且G為-Ε12-Ρ12之化合物之具體例,可列舉式 (ΙΙΙ-1)〜式(III-26)所表示之化合物, 作為t為3且G為-Ε〗2-Ρ丨2以外之基之化合物的具體例,可 列舉式(IV-1)〜式(IV-19)所表示之化合物, 作為t為2且G為-Ε12·Ρ12之化合物之具體例,可列舉式(ν_ 1)及式(V-2)所表示之化合物, 作為t為2且G為-Ε〗2-Ρ12以外之基之化合物的具體例,可 列舉式(VI-1)〜式(VI-6)所表示之化合物等。其中,式中之 kl及k2表示2〜12之整數。只要為該等液晶化合物,則合成 容易’可市售等而容易獲得,故而較佳。 佩〇(㈣ 154080.doc -88- 201133033= (Ρ-υ~〇Μ), r17 to r21 each independently represent a carbon number or a hydrogen atom. * indicates a bond with B丨1] wherein 'as P11 and Pi is preferably an ethylene group, a propenyl group, an oxiranyl group, a fluorenyl oxiranyl group, an oxetanyl group, an propylene oxime The base or mercaptopropenyloxy group is more preferably an acryloxy group or a mercaptopropenyloxy group. The carbon number of the aromatic hydrocarbon group and the alicyclic hydrocarbon group of A is, for example, 3 to 丨8, more preferably 5 12 or more preferably 5 or 6. As A11, it is preferably an anthracene, a 4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-extension base. E and E are alkanediyl groups having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and preferably a linear or branched alkanediyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms at i sites. Specific examples thereof include: anthracenylene, ethylidene, propylenediyl, butyldiyl, pentanediyl, hexamethylene, heptyl, octyldiyl, fluorenyl, decyl, and eleven Monoalkyldiyl, -ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2-, -ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2-〇-ch2-ch2-^-ch2-ch2-o-ch2-ch2-o-ch2- Ch2 -o-ch2-ch2- and so on. In the compound (6), for example, as a specific example of a compound in which 1 is 4 and G is _Εΐ2·ρ12, a compound represented by the formula (Μ) to (1_4), 154080.doc -87-201133033 is used as t Specific examples of the compound in which G is a group other than ΕΚΡ12 include a compound represented by the formula (II-1) to the formula (ΙΙ·4), and specific examples of the compound wherein t is 3 and G is -Ε12-Ρ12. For example, a compound represented by the formula (ΙΙΙ-1) to the formula (III-26), and a specific example of a compound in which t is 3 and G is a group other than -Ε2-Ρ丨2, IV-1) The compound represented by the formula (IV-19), and specific examples of the compound wherein t is 2 and G is -Ε12·Ρ12, and are represented by the formula (ν_1) and the formula (V-2). Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (VI-1) to the formula (VI-6), and the like, are specific examples of the compound of the formula (VI-1) to the formula (VI-6). Where k1 and k2 in the formula represent integers from 2 to 12. If it is such a liquid crystal compound, it is easy to synthesize it because it is commercially available, and it is preferable. Pei Wei ((4) 154080.doc -88- 201133033

(XCHP(XCHP

〇-(〇Η2)κ2-Η〇-(〇Η2)κ2-Η

^(CH2)k1 心^(CH2)k1 heart

Ο ^&quot;0—(CH2)m~ 丨、(CH2)k2-H 0_(CH2)|(2~〇 七 O-iCHj)Ο ^&quot;0—(CH2)m~ 丨, (CH2)k2-H 0_(CH2)|(2~〇 七 O-iCHj)

,(CH2)k2- )-0-(CH2)k1-(C,—0&lt;— °^=,(CH2)k2- )-0-(CH2)k1-(C,-0&0;; °^=

GG

Jo-謂一 分&gt;。-(叫「〇( ^^0—(CH2)kr-〇-^~~^-^ -(CH2)k2-〇-^_ )o~(CH2&gt;«-〇-〇-〇&gt;_^^〇{^〇-(CH2)k2_o尤 七 (H-2) (B-3) (H-4) (HU) (HI-2)(IH-3) (HM) (III-5) (IH〇 (ΠΙ-7) (UI-8) 154080.doc •89· 201133033 -o—(CH2)ki—1Jo- is a point &gt;. - (called "〇( ^^0—(CH2)kr-〇-^~~^-^ -(CH2)k2-〇-^_ )o~(CH2&gt;«-〇-〇-〇&gt;_^ ^〇{^〇-(CH2)k2_o尤七(H-2) (B-3) (H-4) (HU) (HI-2)(IH-3) (HM) (III-5) (IH 〇(ΠΙ-7) (UI-8) 154080.doc •89· 201133033 -o—(CH2)ki—1

(CH^k2- -〇七 (CH2X2—0-(CH^k2- - 〇7 (CH2X2—0-

Br Ρ °· 0·Br Ρ °· 0·

N〇2 -d -0七 s3^〇-(CH2)kr〇~^'^^C-^^~o^&quot;^^〇-(c,- N〇2 -(CH2)k2-㈣「。HQ^分#〇_,『。七 &gt;~(CH2)k1—0- -〇—(CH2)k2- o 0七 (III-9) (111-10) (111-11) (HI-12) (^KK-\Z\ (111-14) (111-15) (IIM6) (&quot;1-17)(111-18) (111-19) 154080.doc -90- 201133033 ^ 一(ch^2-ο] ==^-〇-(〇Η2)μ~〇~-^^—^_^^^)-^^-〇-(ΟΗ2)κ2-〇-^_ 〇7γ〇-陶&quot;_0^〇~{^〇_^-〇^0-(略-0_\^ 』〇-(CH2)k1-〇-Q^(^~Q-〇 一 (CHzJka-。七 s^〇-{CH2)k1-〇-^^&lt;^^-y^〇-^^〇-(CH2)ia^^_N〇2 -d -0七s3^〇-(CH2)kr〇~^'^^C-^^~o^&quot;^^〇-(c,- N〇2 -(CH2)k2-(4)" HQ^分#〇_,『.七&gt;~(CH2)k1—0- -〇—(CH2)k2- o 07(III-9) (111-10) (111-11) (HI- 12) (^KK-\Z\ (111-14) (111-15) (IIM6) (&quot;1-17)(111-18) (111-19) 154080.doc -90- 201133033 ^ one (ch ^2-ο] ==^-〇-(〇Η2)μ~〇~-^^—^_^^^)-^^-〇-(ΟΗ2)κ2-〇-^_ 〇7γ〇-陶&quot ;_0^〇~{^〇_^-〇^0-(slightly -0_\^ 』〇-(CH2)k1-〇-Q^(^~Q-〇一(CHzJka-.七s^〇-{ CH2)k1-〇-^^&lt;^^-y^〇-^^〇-(CH2)ia^^_

Jo 一 (CH2)m- °^o-C_q_〇k&gt;° _(CHa)fc2-。 Ο (111-20) Ο (111-21) (III-22) (MI-23) (111-24) (111-25) (111-26) Ο 〇 aa^〇~(CH2)kr-&lt;&gt;-^^-&lt;^^^^^—^^-〇—(CH2)k2—Η=3^,,^^〇^〇^〇^观2-&quot; 义CH 一 «*^〇〜(CH2)k.Jo I (CH2)m- °^o-C_q_〇k&gt;° _(CHa)fc2-. Ο (111-20) Ο (111-21) (III-22) (MI-23) (111-24) (111-25) (111-26) Ο 〇aa^〇~(CH2)kr-&lt;&gt;-^^-&lt;^^^^^—^^-〇—(CH2)k2—Η=3^,,^^〇^〇^〇^View2-&quot; Meaning CH A «*^〇 ~(CH2)k.

(CH2X2-H(CH2X2-H

(iv-1)(IV-2) (!V-3) (lV-4) (IV-5) «s=^〇-(CH2)k1-〇 (IV-6) 154080.doc -91 - 201133033(iv-1)(IV-2) (!V-3) (lV-4) (IV-5) «s=^〇-(CH2)k1-〇 (IV-6) 154080.doc -91 - 201133033

-〇-(CH2)k^O^Q-{HQ_QKcN-〇-(CH2)k^O^Q-{HQ_QKcN

=J-0-(CH2)ki 一 &gt; {CH2)ki - cH:识 -{CH2)k1-0 3~° —(〇叫1=J-0-(CH2)ki a &gt; {CH2)ki - cH: know -{CH2)k1-0 3~° —(〇1

3^*' (CH2)k^0-\3^*' (CH2)k^0-\

(IV-7) (IV-8) (IV-9) (IV-10) (IV-11) (IV-12) (IV-13) (IV-14) 3~〇- &gt;〇-(ch^-〇H°^〇hQ-K&gt;(CH^ _^-0—(CH2)ki—〇 -^~^-〇 (CH2)ki—〇~(IV-7) (IV-8) (IV-9) (IV-10) (IV-11) (IV-12) (IV-13) (IV-14) 3~〇- &gt;〇-(ch ^-〇H°^〇hQ-K&gt;(CH^ _^-0—(CH2)ki—〇-^~^-〇(CH2)ki—〇~

(CH2)k2—H -}(CH2)k2—H -}

(CHaJka-H 0(CHaJka-H 0

3^°-(叫1-〇^0~0^η〇_ 丨 y° -(CHz)k1-0 I 0-(0Η2)ω-Η (IV-15)(IV-16) (IV-17)(IV-18) (IV-19) 154080.doc -92- 2011330333^°-(called 1-〇^0~0^η〇_ 丨y° -(CHz)k1-0 I 0-(0Η2)ω-Η (IV-15)(IV-16) (IV-17 )(IV-18) (IV-19) 154080.doc -92- 201133033

~{CH2\r~〇~{CH2\r~〇

(V-1) (V-2) (Vl-1) (VI-2)(V-1) (V-2) (Vl-1) (VI-2)

(Vl^3) (VM) (VI-5) (VI-6)(Vl^3) (VM) (VI-5) (VI-6)

佩-wear-

液晶化合物之含量相對於液晶化合物與化合物(A)之合 计$ 100質篁份,通常為0〜90質量份,較佳為〇〜70質量 份,進而較佳為〇〜4〇質量份。 構成本發明之立體顯示系統之顯示裝置及/或眼鏡所具 有的相位差板(1)之波長分散特性可根據相位差板(丨)中之 源自化合物(A)之結構單元之含量及源自液晶化合物之結 構單το之含量而決定。若增加相位差板(1)中之源自化合物 (A)之結構單元之含量,則進一步顯示反波長分散特性。 154080.doc -93· 201133033 具體而言,只要製備2〜5種左右之源自化合物(A)之結構 卓元的含量不同之組合物,對於各組合物,如下所述製造 相同膜厚之相位差板’求出所得相位差板之相位差值,根 據其結果求出源自化合物(A)之結構單元之含量與相位差 板之相位差值之關聯,根據所得之關聯關係,而決定為對 上述膜厚之相位差板賦予所需之相位差值所必需的源自化 合物(A)之結構單元之含量即可。 [聚合起始劑] 含有化合物(A)之組合物(以下有時稱作「組合物(A)」) 較佳為進而含有聚合起始劑者。聚合起始劑較佳為光聚合 起始劑,更佳為藉由光照射而產生自由基之光聚合起始 劑。藉由含有聚合起始劑,而存在相位差板之耐久性提高 之傾向,故而較佳。 作為光聚合起始劑,可列舉:安息香、安息香甲醚、安 息香乙醚等安息香類;二苯甲酮、4_苯曱醯基_4,_甲基二 苯基硫醚、3,3,,4,4'-四(第三丁基過氧基羰基)二苯甲酮、 2,4,6-二甲基二苯甲酮等二苯甲酮類;苯偶醯縮酮等苯偶 醯縮酮類;二乙氧基苯乙酮、2_羥基_2_曱基小苯基丙烷 -1-酮、1,2_二苯基_2,2-二甲氧基·卜乙酮、2_羥基_2_甲基 1 [4-(2-羥基乙氧基)苯基]丙烷酮、卜羥基環己基苯基 嗣、2-¾基-2-〒基甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙淀小嗣等 經基_類;2-甲基咪琳基_W4_甲基硫炫基苯基)丙 烷-1-酮、2-二甲基胺基咪啉基苯基)_2苄基丁烷-卜 酮等心胺基綱類;錤鹽或錡鹽等。亦可使用Irgacure 907、 154080.doc -94· 201133033The content of the liquid crystal compound is usually from 0 to 90 parts by mass, preferably from 〇 to 70 parts by mass, more preferably from 〇 to 4 parts by mass, based on the total amount of the liquid crystal compound and the compound (A). The wavelength dispersion characteristic of the phase difference plate (1) constituting the display device and/or the spectacles constituting the stereoscopic display system of the present invention may be based on the content and source of the structural unit derived from the compound (A) in the phase difference plate (丨). It is determined from the content of the structure το of the liquid crystal compound. When the content of the structural unit derived from the compound (A) in the phase difference plate (1) is increased, the reverse wavelength dispersion property is further exhibited. 154080.doc -93· 201133033 Specifically, as long as a composition of about 2 to 5 kinds of structural elements derived from the compound (A) is prepared, for each composition, the same film thickness is produced as follows. The phase difference of the obtained phase difference plate is determined by the difference plate, and the correlation between the content of the structural unit derived from the compound (A) and the phase difference value of the phase difference plate is determined based on the result, and is determined based on the correlation relationship obtained. The content of the structural unit derived from the compound (A) necessary for imparting the desired phase difference value to the above-mentioned film thickness phase difference plate may be sufficient. [Polymerization Initiator] The composition containing the compound (A) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "composition (A)") preferably further contains a polymerization initiator. The polymerization initiator is preferably a photopolymerization initiator, more preferably a photopolymerization initiator which generates a radical by light irradiation. Since the polymerization initiator is contained, the durability of the phase difference plate tends to be improved, which is preferable. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include benzoin such as benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, and benzoin ether; benzophenone, 4-benzoyl-4, methyl diphenyl sulfide, 3, 3, Benzophenones such as 4,4'-tetrakis(t-butylperoxycarbonyl)benzophenone and 2,4,6-dimethylbenzophenone; benzophenones such as benzoin ketal a ketal; diethoxyacetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-indoleyl small phenylpropan-1-one, 1,2-diphenyl-2,2-dimethoxy-acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1 [4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)phenyl]propanone, hydroxycyclohexylphenyl hydrazine, 2-3⁄4yl-2-mercaptomethylvinyl)phenyl]丙丁嗣小等等基基类; 2-methylimilinyl_W4_methylsulfanylphenyl)propan-1-one, 2-dimethylaminophenylphenyl)-2-benzyl Butane-buprole is an amine-based group; a phosphonium salt or a phosphonium salt. Also use Irgacure 907, 154080.doc -94· 201133033

Irgacure 1 84、Irgacure 651、Irgacure 819、Irgacure 250、 1犷吕3。11代369(以上均由(1^&amp;】&amp;卩汪11股份有限公司製造)、 Seikuol BZ、Seikuol Z、Seikuol BEE(以上均由精工化學 股份有限公司製造)、Kayacure BP 1 00(日本化藥股份有限 公司製造)、Kayacure UVI-6992(Dow 公司製造)、Adeka Optomer SP-152 或 Adeka Optomer SP-170(以上均由 ADEKA 股份有限公司製造)等市售之光聚合起始劑。 又,聚合起始劑之含量相對於化合物(A) 1 00質量份,通 常為0.1質量份~30.質量份,較佳為0.5質量份〜10質量份。 組合物(A)亦可進而含有聚合抑制劑、光敏劑、調平劑 及有機溶劑等。 [聚合抑制劑] 作為聚合抑制劑,可列舉:對苯二酚或具有烷基醚等取 代基之對苯二酚類、丁基鄰苯二酚等具有烷基醚等取代基 之鄰苯二酚類、鄰苯三酚類、2,2,6,6-四甲基-1-哌啶氧基 自由基等自由基捕獲劑、苯硫酚類、β-萘基胺類或β-萘酚 類等。 藉由使用聚合抑制劑,可控制化合物(Α)等之聚合,可 提高所得相位差板之穩定性。聚合抑制劑之使用量相對於 化合物(Α)100質量份,通常為0.1質量份〜30質量份,較佳 為0.5質量份〜10質量份。 [光敏劑] 作為光敏劑,可列舉:氧雜蒽酮及硫雜蒽酮等氧雜蒽酮 類、蒽及具有烷基醚等取代基之蒽類、酚噻畊或紅螢烯。 154080.doc -95- 201133033 藉由使用光敏劑,可使化合物(A)等之聚合高感度化。 作為光敏劑之使用量,相對於化合物(A) 100質量份,通常 為0.1質量份〜30質量份,較佳為0.5質量份〜10質量份。 [調平劑] 作為調平劑,可列舉有機改性聚矽氧油系、聚丙烯酸酯 系、全氟烷基系等。具體可列舉:DC3PA、SH7PA、 DC11PA、SH28PA、SH29PA、SH30PA、ST80PA、 ST86PA、SH8400、SH8700、FZ2123(以上均由 Dow Corning Toray 股份有限公司製造)、KP321、KP323、 KP324、KP326、KP340、KP341、X22-161A、KF6001(以 上均由信越化學工業股份有限公司製造)、TSF400、 TSF401、TSF410、TSF4300、TSF4440、TSF4445、TSF-4446、TSF4452、TSF4460(以上均由 Momentive Performance Materials Japan合同公司製造)、Fluorinert(商品名)FC-72 ' Fluorinert FC-40、Fluorinert FC-43、Fluorinert FC-3283(以上均由住友3M股份有限公司製造)、Megaface(商 SS)R-08、MegafaceR-30、MegafaceR-90、MegafaceF· 410、Megaface F-411、Megaface F-443、Megaface F-445、Megaface F-470 ' Megaface F-477 ' Megaface F-479、Megaface F-482、Megaface F-483(以上均由 DIC股份 有限公司製造)、Eftop(商品名)EF301、Eftop EF303、 Eftop EF351、Eftop EF352(以上均由 Mitsubishi Materials Electronic Chemicals股份有限公司製造)、Surflon(商品 名)S-381、Surflon S-382、Surflon S-383、Surflon S-393、 154080.doc -96- 201133033Irgacure 1 84, Irgacure 651, Irgacure 819, Irgacure 250, 1 犷 Lu 3. 11 369 (all manufactured by (1^&amp;]&amp; 卩Wang 11 Co., Ltd.), Seikuol BZ, Seikuol Z, Seikuol BEE (all of the above are manufactured by Seiko Chemical Co., Ltd.), Kayacure BP 1 00 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Kayacure UVI-6992 (manufactured by Dow), Adeka Optomer SP-152 or Adeka Optomer SP-170 (all of the above) The photopolymerization initiator is commercially available, such as ADEKA Co., Ltd., and the content of the polymerization initiator is usually 0.1 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the compound (A). 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass. The composition (A) may further contain a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer, a leveling agent, an organic solvent, etc. [Polymerization inhibitor] Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone or a catechol having a substituent such as an alkyl ether such as hydroquinone or a butyl catechol having a substituent such as an alkyl ether; pyrogallol; 2,2,6,6-tetra A radical scavenger such as methyl-1-piperidinyloxy radical, thiophenol, β- Naphthylamines, β-naphthols, etc. By using a polymerization inhibitor, polymerization of a compound (Α) or the like can be controlled, and the stability of the obtained phase difference plate can be improved. The amount of the polymerization inhibitor used is relative to the compound (Α) 100 parts by mass, usually 0.1 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass, preferably 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass. [Photosensitizer] Examples of the photosensitizer include xanthone such as xanthone and thioxanthone. A ketone, an anthracene, and an anthracene having a substituent such as an alkyl ether, phenol thiophene or erythritol. 154080.doc -95- 201133033 By using a photosensitizer, polymerization of the compound (A) or the like can be highly sensitive. The amount of the photosensitizer to be used is usually 0.1 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass, preferably 0.5 parts by mass to 10 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the compound (A). [Leveling agent] As a leveling agent, it can be enumerated An organically modified polyoxophthalic acid system, a polyacrylate type, a perfluoroalkyl group, etc. Specific examples thereof include DC3PA, SH7PA, DC11PA, SH28PA, SH29PA, SH30PA, ST80PA, ST86PA, SH8400, SH8700, and FZ2123 (all of which are Dow Corning Toray Co., Ltd.), KP321, KP323 KP324, KP326, KP340, KP341, X22-161A, KF6001 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), TSF400, TSF401, TSF410, TSF4300, TSF4440, TSF4445, TSF-4446, TSF4452, TSF4460 (all above by Momentive Performance Materials Japan contract company), Fluorinert (trade name) FC-72 'Fluorinert FC-40, Fluorinert FC-43, Fluorinert FC-3283 (all manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Megaface (Business SS) R- 08, MegafaceR-30, MegafaceR-90, MegafaceF· 410, Megaface F-411, Megaface F-443, Megaface F-445, Megaface F-470 ' Megaface F-477 ' Megaface F-479, Megaface F-482, Megaface F-483 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation), Eftop (trade name) EF301, Eftop EF303, Eftop EF351, Eftop EF352 (all manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Electronic Chemicals Co., Ltd.), Surflon (trade name) S- 381, Surflon S-382, Surflon S-383, Surflon S-393, 154080.doc -96- 201133033

Surflon SC-101、Surflon SC-105、ΚΗ-40、SA-l〇〇(以上均 由AGC Seimi Chemical股份有限公司製造)、商品名 E1830、商品名 E5844(Daikin Fine Chemical研究所股份有 限公司製造)、BM-1000、BM-1100、BYK-352、BYK-353、BYK-361N(均為商品名,由BM Chemie公司製造) 等。該等調平劑可併用2種以上而使用。 ΟSurflon SC-101, Surflon SC-105, ΚΗ-40, SA-l〇〇 (all manufactured by AGC Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.), trade name E1830, trade name E5844 (manufactured by Daikin Fine Chemical Research Co., Ltd.) BM-1000, BM-1100, BYK-352, BYK-353, BYK-361N (all trade names, manufactured by BM Chemie). These leveling agents can be used in combination of two or more kinds. Ο

藉由使用調平劑,可使相位差板平滑化。進而,於相位 差板之製造過程中’可控制組合物(A)之流動性,或者調 整使化合物(A)等聚合所得之相位差板之交聯密度。調平 劑之使用量之具體數值相對於化合物(A)丨〇〇質量份,通常 為0·1質量份〜3〇質量份,較佳為〇 5質量份〜1〇質量份。 [有機溶劑] 乍為有機洛h彳,只要為可溶解化合物(Α)等組合物(a)之 構成成分,且對聚合反應具有惰性之有機溶劑即可,具體 可列舉:甲醇、乙醇、乙二醇、異丙醇、丙二醇、甲基溶 纖劑、丁基溶纖劑、丙二醇單甲_或苯盼等醇;乙酸乙 酯、乙酸丁醋、乙二醇曱醚乙酸醋、γ_ 丁内醋、丙二醇甲 越乙酸醋或乳酸乙醋等醋系溶劑;丙嗣、甲基乙基綱、環 戊酮裒己酮、甲基戊酮或甲基異丁基酮等酮系溶劑;戊 、-己燒或庚院等非氣系脂肪族煙溶劑;甲苯或二甲苯等 非氯系芳香族烴溶劑、r眭望 ”, 4腈系溶劑;四氫呋嗓或二甲 f則,氯仿或氯笨等氣系溶 機溶劑可單獨使用,n,人 彳于邊寺有 之租入你 複數種❹。尤以本發明 之組合物之相溶性優显介 優異亦可溶解於醇、Μ溶劑、酮系 154080.doc -97- 201133033 溶劑、非氯系脂肪族烴溶劑及非氣系芳香族烴溶劑等,故 即便不使用氯仿等氣系溶劑,亦可溶解而塗敷。 組合物(A)中之固形物成分之濃度較佳為5〜5〇質量。若 固形物成分之漠度為5質量%以上,則存在相位差板不會 變得過薄,可賦予液晶面板之光學補償所必需之雙折射率 的傾向。X,若為50質量%以下,則存在組合物(A)之黏度 較低,故難以於相位差板之膜厚中產生不均之傾向,故而 較佳。此處’所謂固形物成分,係指自組合物(A)總量去 除溶劑所得之量。 組合物㈧之黏度較佳為〜1〇〜更佳為〇1〜7 mPa’s。若為该範圍,則可均勻地塗敷。 以下,對相位差板(a)之製造方法進行說明。 相位差板⑷可藉由將組合物⑷塗佈於基板上,加以乾 燥,並進行聚合而獲得形成於基板上之目標相位差板。 [未聚合膜製備步驟j 若於基板上塗佈組合物(A) 聚合膜。亦可於該基板上形成 列相等液晶相之情形時,所得 引起之雙折射性。 ,並加以乾燥,則可獲得未 配向膜。於未聚合膜表現向 之相位差板具有由單嘴配向 作為對基板之塗佈方法,例如可列舉:擠出塗佈法、直 接凹的難佈法、反向凹版印㈣料、⑽(鱗賴) 塗佈法或模塗佈法等。χ,可列舉使用浸清塗佈機、棒式 塗佈機或旋轉式塗佈機等塗佈機而塗佈之方法等。 作為上述基板,例如可列舉玻璃、塑膠片材、塑膠膜或 154080.doc •98· 201133033 透光性膜。再者’作為上述透光性瞑,例如可列舉:聚乙 烯、聚丙烯、降冰片烯系聚合物等聚浠烴膜;聚乙稀醇 膜、聚對苯二曱酸乙二酯膜、聚曱基丙烯酸酯膜、聚丙烯 酸酯膜、纖維素酯膜、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯膜、聚碳酸酯 膜、聚硬膜、聚醚礙膜、聚醚酮膜、聚苯硫謎膜或聚苯醚 膜等。 例如’藉由在相位差板(a)之貼合步驟、搬運步驟、保管 Ο 〇 步驟等必需相位差板之強度之步驟中亦使用基板,可容易 地操作而無破裂等。 又,較佳為於形成配向膜之基板上塗佈組合物(A)。配 向膜較佳為於組合物(A)之塗佈時具有不溶於混合液之溶 齊J耐f生,於,谷劑之去除或液晶配向之加熱處理時具有耐熱 性’於摩擦時不產生由摩擦等引起之剝落等,較佳為包含 聚合物或含有聚合物之組合物。 作為上述聚合物,例如可列舉:於分子内具有醯胺鍵之 聚醯胺或明膠類、於分子内具有醯亞胺鍵之聚醯亞胺及其 水解物即聚酿胺酸、聚乙稀醇、院基改性聚乙烯酵、聚丙 烯醯胺t圬唑、聚乙烯亞胺'聚苯乙烯、聚乙烯吡咯烷 酮、聚丙烯酸或聚丙烯酸酯類等聚合物。該等聚合物可單 獨使用,或者混合2種以上而形成共聚物。該等聚合物可 1由利用脫水或脫胺等之縮聚合、或自由基聚合、陰離子 聚 '陽離子聚合等鏈聚合、配位聚合或開環聚合等而容 易地獲得。 亥等聚合物可溶解於溶劑t而塗佈。溶劑並無特別 154080.doc -99· 201133033 限制,具體可列舉:水;甲醇、乙醇、乙二醇、異丙醇、 丙-醇、曱基溶纖劑、丁基溶纖劑或丙 乙酸乙酿、乙酸丁醋、。二酵甲鍵乙酸醋,丁内;丙 -醇甲喊乙酸醋或乳酸乙醋等醋系溶劑;丙 酮、環己酮、甲基戍酮或甲基異丁基_等:系; 齊!,戊燒、己烧或庚燒等非氣系脂肪族烴溶劑 甲本4非氯系芳香族煙溶劑· ^ 3 或:甲乳基乙烷等_系溶劑;氣仿或氣苯等氯系溶劑等。 該專有機溶劑可單獨使用,亦可組合複數種而使用。 又’為形成配向膜,亦可直接使用市售之配向膜材料。 作為市售之配向膜材料,可列舉:Sun叫註冊商標,日 產化學工業股份有限公司製造)或〇pt。贿(註冊商標,JSR 股份有限公司製造)等。 若使用上述配向膜,則起到如τ效果:可提供_種由於 雙折射之面内差異變小’故亦可應對平板顯示裝置⑽d, Flat Panel Display)之大型化的較大之相位差板。 作為於上述基板上形成配向膜之方法,例如可將市售之 配向膜材料或成為配向膜之材料之化合物製成溶液而塗佈 於上述基板上’其後進行退火’藉此於上述基板上形成配 向膜。 以上述方式所得之配向膜之厚度例如為1〇 nm〜i〇〇〇〇 nm,較佳為1〇 nm〜1000 nm。若設為上述範圍則可使化 合物(A)等在該配向膜上配向為所需之角度。 又’該等配向膜視需要可進行摩擦或偏光 154080.doc •100· 201133033 uv(ultraVi〇let,紫外線)照射。藉由該等 配向於所需之方向。 。物(Α)等 作為對配向料行料之方法,•可使用如 將纏繞有摩擦布且旋轉之摩擦輥載 、 送之配向膜相接觸。 上,使其與搬 如上所述,於未聚合膜製備步驟中,在積層於任 上之配向膜上積層未聚合膜(液晶層)。因此,盘製:二曰 ❹ Ο 胞並於該液晶胞中注入液晶化 曰曰 刃您方去相比,可降低生 產成本。進而,可利用捲膜來生產膜。 溶劑之乾燥亦可與聚合一扭 _ 一 起進仃,就成膜性之方面而 。較佳為於聚合前使幾乎所有之溶劑乾燥。 作為溶劑之乾燥方法,例如 铁 檢,,^ j幻舉自然乾焯、通風乾 屌、減屋乾燥等方法。於加埶乾 …钇岛未聚合膜之情形時,作 為”體之加熱溫度,較佳為〇〜25〇t,更佳為5〇〜2阶, 進二更佳為8〇〜17〇t。又,作為加熱時間,較佳為!0秒 上,f刀益鐘更佳為3〇秒〜3〇分鐘。若加熱溫度及加熱時間為 ^述範圍内,料使料熱性未必充分之基板作為上述基 板0 [未聚合膜聚合步驟j 未聚合媒聚合步驟中’使上述未聚合膜製備步驟中所 ^之未聚合膜進行聚合而硬化。藉此成為化合物⑷之配 ^固疋化之膜、即聚合膜。因此,可難以受到熱對雙折 射之影響。 聚口膜進行聚合之方法可根據化合物(A)等之種類 15408〇^ς 201133033 而選擇。若化合物(A)中所含之?1及/或P2等聚合性基為光 聚合性,則可藉由光聚合使上述未聚合膜進行聚合,若該 聚合性基為熱聚合性,則可藉由熱聚合使上述未聚合膜進 行聚合。於相位差板⑷巾’較佳為藉由光聚合使未聚合膜 進行聚合。藉由光聚合,可於低溫下使未聚合膜進行聚 合,故亦可選擇耐熱性更低之基板。又,工業上亦容易製 造。又,就成膜性之觀點而言,光聚合亦較佳。光聚合可 藉由對未聚合膜照射可見光、紫外光或雷射光而進行。就 容易操作之方面而t,尤佳為紫外光。光照射亦可一面加 溫至組合物(A)成為液晶相之溫度一面進行❶此時,亦可 藉由遮蔽等將聚合膜圖案化。 於相位差板⑷之製造方法中,於上述步驟之後亦可包含 將基板剝離之步驟。藉由形成上述構成,可使所得之積^ 體成為包含配向膜與相位差板(a)之膜。又,除了上述將基 板剝離之步驟以外,亦可進而具有將配向膜剝離之步驟: 藉由形成上述構成,可獲得相位差板(a)。 —相位差板⑷之相位差值(延遲值,ReW)係如式_所決 定,因此為獲得所需之Re(:g,只要調整膜厚4及雙折射 Δη(λ)即可。 Κ^(λ)=(!χΔη(λ) (30) (式中,Re(X)表示波長ληΓη下之相位差值,d表示膜厚, △η(λ)表示波長人nm下之雙折射率) 關於膜厚d,於未聚合膜製備步驟中,可以藉由適當調 整組合物(A)之固形物成分濃度或塗佈量而賦予所需2相 154080.doc 201133033 位差之方式進行製備。相位差板(a)之厚度(膜厚d)較佳為 Ο·1 1〇 μΠ1,就降低光彈性之方面而言,更佳為0.5〜5 μηι此處,所謂相位差板之厚度,係指組合物(a)所形 成之層之厚度。 又,關於雙折射率,於未聚合膜聚合步驟中,可 Μ糟由適當調整聚合時之曝光量、加熱溫度、加熱時間而 賦予所需之相位差之方式進行製備。 ◎ 如此所得之相位差板Ο)具有滿足式(1)之光學特性。因 此,可於較廣之波長帶中進行均勻之偏光轉換。 繼而,對相位差板(b)進行說明。 相位差板(b)係藉由使膜延伸而獲得。 膜可藉由使含有樹脂(B1)之組合物(以下,有時稱作 「組合物(B)」)成膜而獲得。組合物(B)較佳為除了樹脂 (B1)以外,亦含有選自由聚合性單體(B2)及具有源自聚合 性單體(B2)之結構單元之樹脂(但與樹脂(B丨)不同)所組成 ◎ 之群中的至少一種,更佳為進而含有光聚合起始劑(B3)。 作為樹脂(B1),可列舉:聚酯、聚碳酸酯、聚醯胺、聚 胺基甲酸酯及聚胺基甲酸酯脲。藉由組合物(B)含有樹脂 (B1),可於所得之膜中導入源自聚酯之結構單元、源自聚 - 碳酸酯之結構單元、源自聚醯胺之結構單元、源自聚胺基 曱酸酯之結構單元或源自聚胺基曱酸酯脲之結構單元。 其中,膜較佳為含有源自聚碳酸酯之結構單元、源自聚 胺基甲酸酯之結構單元或源自聚胺基曱酸酯脲之結構單元 的膜。含有該等結構之瞑於相位差表現性、耐久性、耐光 154080.doc •103· 201133033 性之方面較為優異。 作為聚胺基曱酸酯,可舉出使具有2個以上羥基之化合 物(以下有時稱作「多元酵」)與具有2個以上之異氰酸基之 化合物(以下有時稱作「聚異氰酸酯」)進行反應而得之化 合物。進而,亦可與含羥基之丙烯酸系化合物進行反應。 作為聚胺基曱酸酯脲,可舉出使多元醇與聚異氰酸酯及 具有2個以上胺基之化合物(以下有時稱作「聚胺」)進行反 應而得者。進而,亦可與含羥基之丙烯酸系化合物進行反 應。 作為多元醇,較佳為以聚苯乙烯換算,利用Gpc(gei permeation chromatography,凝膠滲透層析法)所得之數量 平均分子量為1000〜5000之多元醇。具體可列舉:聚酯多 元醇、聚醚多元醇、聚碳酸酯多元醇、聚己内酯聚酯多元 醇等。 作為聚異氰酸酯,可列舉:2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯、2,6_ 甲苯二異氰酸酯、二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、其一部分經碳 二醯亞胺化之二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、聚亞甲基聚苯基聚 異氰酸酯、甲苯二異氰酸酯、萘二異氰酸酯、苯二異氰酸 酉曰亞甲基一異氰酸醋、異佛爾酮二異氰酸醋、二甲苯 二異氰酸酯、氫化二甲苯二異氰酸酯、氫化二苯基甲燒二 異氰酸酯、環己烧二異氰酸酯等。 作為聚胺’可列舉:乙二胺、伸丙二胺、己二胺、三甲 基己二胺、異佛爾酮二胺、二胺基環己烷、甲基二胺基環 己燒、派P井等。 154080.doc -104· 201133033The phase difference plate can be smoothed by using a leveling agent. Further, the fluidity of the composition (A) can be controlled during the production of the phase difference plate, or the crosslinking density of the phase difference plate obtained by polymerizing the compound (A) or the like can be adjusted. The specific value of the amount of the leveling agent used is usually from 0.1 part by mass to 3 parts by mass, more preferably from 5 parts by mass to 1 part by mass, based on the mass of the compound (A). [Organic solvent] The organic solvent may be an organic solvent which is inert to the polymerization reaction as long as it is a constituent component of the composition (a) such as a soluble compound (Α), and specific examples thereof include methanol, ethanol, and B. Alcohols such as diol, isopropanol, propylene glycol, methyl cellosolve, butyl cellosolve, propylene glycol monomethyl or benzophenone; ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene glycol oxime acetate, γ-butane vinegar, a ketone solvent such as propylene glycol, acetaminophen or lactic acid; a ketone solvent such as propyl hydrazine, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclopentanone hexanone, methyl amyl ketone or methyl isobutyl ketone; Non-gas-based aliphatic smoke solvents such as smelting or Gengyuan; non-chlorinated aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene or xylene, r hope, 4 nitrile solvents; tetrahydrofurazan or dimethyl f, chloroform or chloroform The gas-based solvent can be used alone, n, and people can rent a plurality of kinds of cockroaches in the temple. Especially, the composition of the present invention is excellent in compatibility and can be dissolved in alcohol, hydrazine solvent, ketone. 154080.doc -97- 201133033 Solvent, non-chlorinated aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent and non-gas aromatic hydrocarbon solvent Therefore, even if a gas solvent such as chloroform is not used, it can be dissolved and applied. The concentration of the solid content in the composition (A) is preferably 5 to 5 Å. If the solid content is 5% by mass or more In addition, the phase difference plate does not become too thin, and the birefringence necessary for optical compensation of the liquid crystal panel can be imparted. When X is 50% by mass or less, the viscosity of the composition (A) is low. Therefore, it is difficult to cause unevenness in the film thickness of the phase difference plate, and therefore, the term "solid content" means the amount obtained by removing the solvent from the total amount of the composition (A). The viscosity of the composition (eight) is higher. Preferably, it is 1 to 7 mPa's. If it is this range, it can be uniformly applied. Hereinafter, a method of manufacturing the phase difference plate (a) will be described. The phase difference plate (4) can be The composition (4) is applied onto a substrate, dried, and polymerized to obtain a target phase difference plate formed on the substrate. [Unpolymerized film preparation step j If the composition (A) polymer film is coated on the substrate, When a column of liquid crystal phases is formed on the substrate, the result is When the birefringence is caused and dried, an unaligned film can be obtained. The non-polymerized film exhibits a phase difference plate having a single nozzle alignment as a method of coating the substrate, and examples thereof include extrusion coating. , direct concave refractory method, reverse gravure printing (four) material, (10) (scale) coating method or die coating method, etc. χ, may be exemplified by using a immersion coating machine, a bar coater or a rotary coating A method of coating with a coater such as a cloth machine, etc. Examples of the substrate include glass, a plastic sheet, a plastic film, or a light transmissive film of 154080.doc • 98·201133033. Examples thereof include a polyfluorene hydrocarbon film such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and a norbornene-based polymer; a polyethylene glycol film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a polydecyl acrylate film, and a polyacrylate. Film, cellulose ester film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polycarbonate film, polyhard film, polyether film, polyether ketone film, polyphenylene sulfide film or polyphenylene ether film. For example, the substrate is also used in the step of the strength of the phase difference plate required for the bonding step of the phase difference plate (a), the conveyance step, and the storage step, so that it can be easily handled without cracking or the like. Further, it is preferred to apply the composition (A) on the substrate on which the alignment film is formed. The alignment film preferably has a solubility insoluble in the mixed solution when the composition (A) is applied, and has heat resistance during the removal of the paste or the heat treatment of the liquid crystal alignment. The peeling or the like caused by friction or the like is preferably a polymer or a composition containing the polymer. Examples of the polymer include polydecylamine or gelatin having a guanamine bond in the molecule, polyimine which has a quinone imine bond in the molecule, and a hydrolysate which is a polyacrylic acid or a polyethylene. Polymers such as alcohol, home-based modified polyethylene yeast, polypropylene guanamine t-carbazole, polyethyleneimine polystyrene, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyacrylic acid or polyacrylate. These polymers may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds to form a copolymer. These polymers 1 can be easily obtained by condensation polymerization such as dehydration or deamination, or chain polymerization such as radical polymerization or anionic polycation polymerization, coordination polymerization or ring-opening polymerization. A polymer such as hai can be coated by dissolving in solvent t. Solvents are not limited to 154080.doc -99· 201133033, specifically: water; methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol, isopropanol, propanol, thiol cellosolve, butyl cellosolve or propionic acid Butyl acetate,. Two yeasts, acetic acid, vinegar, glycerin, propylene, alcohol, vinegar, vinegar, vinegar, vinegar, etc.; acetone, cyclohexanone, methyl ketone or methyl isobutyl _, etc.; , non-gas-based aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent such as pentyl alcohol, hexane or gamma, and a non-chlorinated aromatic smog solvent · ^ 3 or : methyl lactyl ethane and other solvents; gas or gas benzene and other chlorine systems Solvents, etc. The specific organic solvent may be used singly or in combination of plural kinds. Further, in order to form an alignment film, a commercially available alignment film material can be used as it is. As a commercially available alignment film material, for example, Sun is a registered trademark, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries Co., Ltd., or 〇pt. Bribe (registered trademark, manufactured by JSR Co., Ltd.), etc. When the above alignment film is used, it has a τ effect: it can provide a large phase difference plate which can be enlarged in size due to the in-plane difference in birefringence becoming smaller (the flat panel display) . As a method of forming an alignment film on the substrate, for example, a commercially available alignment film material or a compound which is a material of an alignment film can be applied onto the substrate and then annealed on the substrate. An alignment film is formed. The thickness of the alignment film obtained in the above manner is, for example, 1 〇 nm to i 〇〇〇〇 nm, preferably 1 〇 nm to 1000 nm. When it is set to the above range, the compound (A) or the like can be aligned on the alignment film to a desired angle. Further, these alignment films can be rubbed or polarized as needed. 154080.doc •100· 201133033 uv (ultraVi〇let, ultraviolet light). With these alignments in the desired direction. . (Α), etc. As a method of aligning the material, it is possible to use, for example, a rubbing roll wound with a rubbing cloth and a rotating rubbing roller to be brought into contact with the alignment film. Further, as described above, in the unpolymerized film preparing step, an unpolymerized film (liquid crystal layer) is laminated on the alignment film which is laminated thereon. Therefore, the disk system can reduce the production cost by injecting a liquid crystal enthalpy into the liquid crystal cell. Further, a film can be produced using a roll film. The drying of the solvent can also be carried out in conjunction with the polymerization, in terms of film formability. It is preferred to dry almost all of the solvent before polymerization. As a solvent drying method, for example, iron inspection, ^ j magic lifting natural drying, ventilation drying, reducing house drying and the like. In the case of 埶 埶 dry... 钇 未 未 聚合 聚合 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 未 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体Further, as the heating time, it is preferably 0 seconds, and the f-knife clock is preferably 3 seconds to 3 minutes. If the heating temperature and the heating time are within the range, the substrate is not necessarily sufficient for the heat of the material. As the substrate 0 [unpolymerized film polymerization step j in the polymerization polymerization step], the unpolymerized film obtained in the above-mentioned unpolymerized film production step is polymerized and cured, whereby the film of the compound (4) is cured. That is, it is a polymer film. Therefore, it is difficult to be affected by heat to birefringence. The method of polymerizing the poly-membrane film can be selected according to the type of compound (A), etc. 15408〇^ς 201133033. If it is contained in the compound (A) When the polymerizable group such as 1 and/or P2 is photopolymerizable, the unpolymerized film can be polymerized by photopolymerization, and if the polymerizable group is thermally polymerizable, the unpolymerized film can be obtained by thermal polymerization. Polymerization is carried out. The phase difference plate (4) towel is preferably unpolymerized by photopolymerization. The polymerization is carried out, and the unpolymerized film can be polymerized at a low temperature by photopolymerization, so that a substrate having lower heat resistance can be selected, and industrially easy to manufacture. Further, in terms of film formability, light is used. Polymerization is also preferred. Photopolymerization can be carried out by irradiating the unpolymerized film with visible light, ultraviolet light or laser light. It is easy to handle, and particularly preferably ultraviolet light. The light irradiation can also be heated to the composition ( A) When the temperature of the liquid crystal phase is increased, the polymer film may be patterned by masking or the like. In the method of manufacturing the phase difference plate (4), the step of peeling off the substrate may be included after the step. With the above configuration, the obtained product can be a film including the alignment film and the retardation film (a). Further, in addition to the step of peeling off the substrate, the step of peeling off the alignment film can be further formed by: With the above configuration, the phase difference plate (a) can be obtained. - The phase difference value (delay value, ReW) of the phase difference plate (4) is determined by the equation _, so that the desired Re (: g, as long as the film thickness is adjusted 4 And birefringence Δη(λ) Κ^(λ)=(!χΔη(λ) (30) (wherein, Re(X) represents the phase difference at the wavelength ληΓη, d represents the film thickness, and Δη(λ) represents the wavelength at the human nm Birefringence) Regarding the film thickness d, in the unpolymerized film preparation step, the desired 2-phase 154080.doc 201133033 difference can be imparted by appropriately adjusting the solid content concentration or coating amount of the composition (A). The thickness of the phase difference plate (a) (film thickness d) is preferably Ο·1 1〇μΠ1, and more preferably 0.5 to 5 μηι in terms of reducing photoelasticity, the so-called phase difference plate The thickness refers to the thickness of the layer formed by the composition (a). Further, regarding the birefringence, in the polymerization step of the unpolymerized film, the amount of exposure, heating temperature, and heating time during polymerization can be appropriately adjusted. The preparation is carried out in such a manner as to impart the desired phase difference. ◎ The phase difference plate thus obtained has an optical characteristic satisfying the formula (1). Therefore, uniform polarization conversion can be performed in a wider wavelength band. Next, the phase difference plate (b) will be described. The phase difference plate (b) is obtained by stretching the film. The film can be obtained by forming a film containing a resin (B1) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "composition (B)"). The composition (B) preferably contains, in addition to the resin (B1), a resin selected from the polymerizable monomer (B2) and a structural unit derived from the polymerizable monomer (B2) (but with a resin (B) At least one of the groups of the composition ◎ is different, and more preferably further contains a photopolymerization initiator (B3). Examples of the resin (B1) include polyester, polycarbonate, polyamide, polyurethane, and polyurethane. By the composition (B) containing the resin (B1), a structural unit derived from a polyester, a structural unit derived from a poly-carbonate, a structural unit derived from polyamine, and a polycrystalline group can be introduced into the obtained film. A structural unit of an amino phthalate or a structural unit derived from a polyamino phthalate urea. Among them, the film is preferably a film containing a structural unit derived from polycarbonate, a structural unit derived from a polyurethane, or a structural unit derived from polyamino phthalate urea. The inclusion of these structures is superior in phase difference performance, durability, and light resistance 154080.doc •103·201133033. The polyamino phthalic acid ester may be a compound having two or more hydroxyl groups (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "multi-dimension") and a compound having two or more isocyanato groups (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "poly" Isocyanate") A compound obtained by carrying out a reaction. Further, it is also possible to react with a hydroxyl group-containing acrylic compound. The polyamino phthalate urea is a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydric alcohol with a polyisocyanate and a compound having two or more amine groups (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "polyamine"). Further, it is also possible to react with a hydroxyl group-containing acrylic compound. The polyhydric alcohol is preferably a polyhydric alcohol having a number average molecular weight of from 1,000 to 5,000 obtained by GPC (gei permeation chromatography) in terms of polystyrene. Specific examples thereof include polyester polyols, polyether polyols, polycarbonate polyols, and polycaprolactone polyester polyols. Examples of the polyisocyanate include 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate, a part of diphenylmethane diisocyanate which is carbonized, and polymethylene. Polyphenyl polyisocyanate, toluene diisocyanate, naphthalene diisocyanate, benzylidene phenyl diisocyanate monoisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, xylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated xylene diisocyanate And hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, cyclohexene diisocyanate, and the like. Examples of the polyamine include ethylenediamine, propylenediamine, hexamethylenediamine, trimethylhexamethylenediamine, isophoronediamine, diaminocyclohexane, and methyldiaminecyclohexane. Send P well and so on. 154080.doc -104· 201133033

作為含羥基之丙稀酸系化合物,可及丨I J舉·丙埽酸經基乙 西旨、丙稀酸2-經基丙酯、丙稀酸3_經基丁醋、聚乙二醇單 丙稀酸酯、聚丙二醇單丙稀酸酯等。 作為聚胺基甲㈣脲之製造方法,可舉出使多元醇與聚 4氰酸醋、聚胺及含經基之丙婦酸系化合物進行反應之方 &amp;。各試劑之混合順序並無限定。例如可列舉如下方法: 使聚異氰酸醋與聚胺反應,獲得末端為異氛酸醋之聚腺預 〇 ㈣,繼而使所得之該聚脲預聚物與多元醇及含經基之丙 料系化合物進行反應之方法;使多元醇與聚異氛酸醋進 行反應,獲得末端為異氰酸醋基之胺基甲酸醋預聚物,繼 而使所得之該胺基甲酸酉旨預聚物與聚胺及含經基之丙稀酸 i化口物進订反應之方法。多元醇、聚異氰㈣、聚胺及 3 I基之丙烯酸系化合物之反應可於無溶劑之狀態下進 灯’亦可於有機溶劑中進行,還可於水中進行。通常係於 有機’谷J中進行反應,反應溫度通常為20〜120。(:,較佳為 〇 3〇〜1〇〇。。,反應時間通常為30分鐘〜24小時。 聚異氰齩6曰之異氰酸基相對於多元醇、聚胺及含羥基之 @稀^化合物的含活性氫原子之基的當量比並無限制, 通常為0.5 : η ς ., 1 · ϋ·5。例如,於藉由使多元醇與聚異氰酸 醋進行反應,耀ρ 士 a 獲付·末端為異氰酸基之胺基甲酸酯預聚物, 繼而使所得之马· p M w 落胺基曱酸酯預聚物與聚胺及含羥基之丙烯 酸系化合物逸# e &amp;As a hydroxyl group-containing acrylic acid compound, it is possible to use 丨IJ · 埽 埽 经 基 基 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 Acrylate, polypropylene glycol monoacrylate, and the like. The method for producing the polyaminomethyltetrazide urea includes a compound which reacts a polyhydric alcohol with polycyanic acid vinegar, a polyamine, and a transglycolic acid-containing compound. The order in which the respective reagents are mixed is not limited. For example, the following method can be mentioned: reacting polyisocyanuric acid with a polyamine to obtain a polyglycol precursor (4) having a terminal oleic acid vinegar, and then obtaining the obtained polyurea prepolymer with a polyhydric alcohol and a transbasic C a method in which a compound is reacted; a polyol is reacted with a polyacetic acid vinegar to obtain an amino hydroxyacetate prepolymer having an isocyanate group at the end, and then the obtained amino carbazate prepolymer is obtained. A method of reacting a reaction with a polyamine and a transbasic acrylic acid. The reaction of the polyol, the polyisocyanate (tetra), the polyamine, and the 3 I -based acrylic compound can be carried out in the absence of a solvent. It can also be carried out in an organic solvent or in water. The reaction is usually carried out in an organic &apos; Valley J, and the reaction temperature is usually from 20 to 120. (:, preferably 〇3〇~1〇〇., the reaction time is usually 30 minutes to 24 hours. Polyisocyanate 6曰 isocyanate groups relative to polyols, polyamines and hydroxyl-containing @稀^The equivalent ratio of the active hydrogen atom-containing group of the compound is not limited, and is usually 0.5: η ς ., 1 · ϋ·5. For example, by reacting a polyol with polyisocyanuric acid, a obtained urethane prepolymer having an isocyanate group at the end, and then the obtained horse·p M w oligoyl phthalate prepolymer and polyamine and hydroxyl group-containing acrylic compound e &amp;

仃反應的方法而製造聚胺基甲酸酯脲樹脂之 情形時,以;Jx S A 1異lL酸酯之異氰酸基相對於多元醇之羥基的 當量比通當士、&amp;, 战為1 : 1.1〜1 : 3之方式調整各試劑之使用 154080.doc 201133033 量’進行反應’獲得末端為異氰酸基之胺基甲酸醋預聚 物,繼而以聚胺及含羥基之丙烯酸系化合物之活性氮原子 相對於所得該胺基曱酸酯預聚物之異氰酸基的當量比通常 成為1 . 0.6〜1 . 1.2之方式調整各試劑之使用量,進行反 應。於聚胺基甲酸酯脲樹脂之製造方法中,視需要可使用 三級胺系觸媒或/及有機金屬系觸媒,藉由使用該觸媒, 可促進反應。作為有機溶劑,可列舉:乙酸乙酿、乙酸丁 酯、溶纖劑、乙酸溶纖劑、丙酮、甲基乙基_ '環己酮、 甲苯、二曱苯、二甲基甲酿胺、彡曱基乙醯胺、異丙醇 等。 聚胺基曱酸酯脲之重量平均分子量較佳為7萬〜丨丨萬之範 圍。若為上述範圍内,則可確保良好之生產性及加工性, 又,能夠以更薄之膜獲得所需之雙折射率之耐熱性較高的 相位差板(b)。 對聚胺基甲酸酯脲之分子量控制方法加以說明。聚胺基 曱酸酯脲之分子量只要藉由多元醇(A)、聚胺、及含羥 基之丙烯酸系化合物(D)的含活性氳原子之基之當量比、 以及與聚異氰酸酯(B)之異氰酸酯基之當量比適當控制即 可。具體而言,上述當量比越更接近丨:i ,越可獲得更高 分子量之聚胺基甲酸酯脲。聚胺基甲酸酯脲之分子量可藉 由使用下述分子量測定條件進行機器分析而容易地確認。 &lt;分子量測定條件&gt; •使用機器名Tosoh股份有限公司HLC_822〇 Gpc·藉由 凝膠滲透層析法,利用已知分子量之標準聚苯乙烯之校準 154080.doc •106· 201133033 曲線而測定之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量•溶離液四 氫°夫喃 •流量 1 mL/min •檢測 示差折射計(RI) 聚胺基甲酸酯脲較佳為胺基甲酸酯脲樹脂溶劑溶液 TyforceCS系列未改性型產品編號:cs_s_2〇7(商品名, DIC股份有限公司製造)、胺基曱酸酯脲樹脂溶劑溶液In the case of producing a polyurethane urea resin by a reaction method, the equivalent ratio of the isocyanato group of the Jx SA 1 iso-lL acid ester to the hydroxyl group of the polyol is used as a standard, and 1 : 1.1~1 : 3 Way to adjust the use of each reagent 154080.doc 201133033 Quantity 'to carry out the reaction' to obtain an isocyanate-based urethane prepolymer, followed by a polyamine and a hydroxyl-containing acrylic compound The equivalent ratio of the active nitrogen atom to the isocyanate group of the obtained amino phthalate prepolymer is usually 1.0 to 1.25. The amount of each reagent used is adjusted to carry out the reaction. In the method for producing a polyurethane urea resin, a tertiary amine catalyst or an organometallic catalyst can be used as needed, and the reaction can be promoted by using the catalyst. Examples of the organic solvent include acetic acid, butyl acetate, cellosolve, cellosolve acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl _ 'cyclohexanone, toluene, diphenylbenzene, dimethyl ketone, hydrazine. Mercaptoacetamide, isopropanol, etc. The weight average molecular weight of the polyamino phthalate urea is preferably in the range of 70,000 to 10,000. When it is in the above range, good productivity and workability can be ensured, and a phase difference plate (b) having a high heat resistance of a desired birefringence can be obtained with a thin film. A method for controlling the molecular weight of polyurethane urea is described. The molecular weight of the polyamino phthalate urea is equivalent to the equivalent ratio of the active ruthenium-containing group of the polyol (A), the polyamine, and the hydroxyl group-containing acrylic compound (D), and the polyisocyanate (B). The equivalent ratio of the isocyanate group can be appropriately controlled. Specifically, the closer the above equivalent ratio is to 丨:i, the more the higher molecular weight polyurethane furnish can be obtained. The molecular weight of the polyurethane urea can be easily confirmed by machine analysis using the following molecular weight measurement conditions. &lt;Molecular weight measurement conditions&gt; • The machine name Tosoh Co., Ltd. HLC_822〇Gpc was measured by gel permeation chromatography using a standard polystyrene calibration 154080.doc •106·201133033 curve of known molecular weight. Weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene • Dissolved solution tetrahydrofuran • Flow rate 1 mL/min • Detection of differential refractometer (RI) Polyurethane urea is preferred as urethane urea resin solvent solution TyforceCS Series unmodified product number: cs_s_2〇7 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation), amino phthalate urea resin solvent solution

Tyforcecs系列未改性型產品編號:cs_s_208(商品名, DIC股份有限公司造)或胺基?酸g旨腺樹脂溶劑溶液Tyforcecs series unmodified product number: cs_s_208 (trade name, made by DIC Corporation) or amine base? Acid g gland resin solvent solution

Tyf〇rCeCS系列導入丙烯醯基型產品編E:cs_s_65(商 品名,DIC股份有限公司製造)。再者,該等由DK:股份有 限么司開發之上市品係具有優異之透明性、優異之Μ交 聯性及優異之耐久性(耐熱性、耐濕熱性、耐驗性等)作為 特徵者。 關於源自聚胺基甲酸㈣之結構單元之含量,於將相位 〇 差板(b)中所含之所有結構單元之合計量設為1⑽質量%之 情形時’通常為1〇〜100質量%,較佳為3〇〜98質量%,更佳 為50 95質量%。若為上述範圍内,則相位差板⑻可於較 廣之波長帶中進行更加均勻之偏光轉換。 、、且》物(B)#父佳為除了樹脂以外亦包含選自由聚 。性早體(B2)及具有源自聚合性單體(B2)之結構單元之樹 脂(但與樹脂(B1)不同)所組成之群中的至少一種。 _作士聚合性單體(B2),較佳為選自由式⑴及式(Π)所表 不之早體(以下有時分別稱為「單體⑴」、「單禮⑴所 154080.doc -107- 201133033 “成群中之至少1種單體(以下有時稱為「單體⑴」)。 -有源自早體⑴之結構單元,則所得相位差板⑻可於 較廣之波:帶中進行更加均勾之偏光轉換,故而較佳,若 -;'、自單體(II)之結構單元,則所得相位差板⑻之光彈 性係數較小,故由應力引起之雙折射之表現極小,可抑制 由貼口後之偏光板收縮等引起之相位差值變化所導致的漏 光,可獲得無光學不均之膜,故而較佳。相位差板(b)更佳 為具有源自單體⑴之結構單元與源自單體⑴)之結構單元 之兩者。The Tyf〇rCeCS series was introduced into the acryl-based product type E: cs_s_65 (trade name, manufactured by DIC Corporation). Furthermore, these listed products developed by DK: Co., Ltd. have excellent transparency, excellent cross-linking properties and excellent durability (heat resistance, heat and humidity resistance, testability, etc.). . When the total amount of all the structural units contained in the phase difference plate (b) is 1 (10)% by mass, the content of the structural unit derived from the polyaminocarboxylic acid (4) is usually from 1 to 100% by mass. It is preferably from 3 to 98% by mass, more preferably from 50 to 95% by mass. If it is within the above range, the phase difference plate (8) can perform more uniform polarization conversion in a wider wavelength band. And, (B) #父佳, in addition to the resin, also includes a polymer selected from the group consisting of poly. At least one of the group consisting of the sexual precursor (B2) and a resin having a structural unit derived from the polymerizable monomer (B2) (other than the resin (B1)). The octagonal polymerizable monomer (B2) is preferably selected from the group consisting of the formula (1) and the formula (Π) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "monomer (1)" and "single ceremony (1) 154080.doc -107- 201133033 "At least one monomer in a group (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "monomer (1)") - With a structural unit derived from the precursor (1), the resulting phase difference plate (8) can be used in a wider wave : In the belt, the polarization conversion is more uniform, so it is better if -; ', from the structural unit of the monomer (II), the photo-elastic coefficient of the obtained phase difference plate (8) is small, so the birefringence caused by stress The performance is extremely small, and it is possible to suppress light leakage caused by a change in the phase difference caused by shrinkage of the polarizing plate after the bonding, etc., and it is preferable to obtain a film having no optical unevenness. The phase difference plate (b) preferably has a source. Both the structural unit of the monomer (1) and the structural unit derived from the monomer (1)).

Ra ( I ) (式(I)中,Ra表示氫原子或曱基,Rb表示碳數6〜2〇之環 式烴基或碳數4〜20之雜環基,該環式烴基及雜環基可經羥 基、側氧基、碳數1〜12之烷基、碳數卜12之烷氧基、碳數 6〜12之芳基、碳數7〜12之芳烷基、縮水甘油氧基、碳數 2〜4之醯基、碳數1〜12之醯氧基、胺基、經一個或兩個碳 數1〜12之炫基取代之胺基或鹵素原子取代,上述烷基、烷 氧基、方基、方烧基、酿基及醯氧基可經經基、胺基、石炭 數1〜6之烷氧基、碳數1〜6之醯氧基 或碳數1〜6之醯基取代)所謂側氧基,係指M基之〇=。Ra ( I ) (In the formula (I), Ra represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and Rb represents a cyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 2 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, the cyclic hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group. It may be a hydroxyl group, a pendant oxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 12, an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, an aralkyl group having 7 to 12 carbon atoms, or a glycidyloxy group. a fluorenyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, a decyloxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an amine group, an amine group substituted with one or two thiol groups having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or a halogen atom, and the above alkyl group and alkoxy group The base group, the square group, the aryl group, the stilbene group and the decyloxy group may be an alkoxy group having a number of 1 to 6 via a base group, an amine group, a charcoal number, a decyloxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 6 or a carbon number of 1 to 6. Substituent) The so-called pendant oxy group means the enthalpy of the M group.

Rc 154080.doc • 108 - (II) 201133033 (式(II)中’R表示虱原子或曱基。Rd表示氫原子、甲 基、碳數2〜18之烷基 '碳數2〜6之烷基胺基、或碳數6〜20 之環式烴基。該烷基及該烷基胺基中所含之氫原子可經羥 基、侧氧基或羧基取代,該烷基中所含之_CH2_可經_〇_、Rc 154080.doc • 108 - (II) 201133033 (In the formula (II), 'R represents a halogen atom or a fluorenyl group. Rd represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an alkyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 2 to 6 carbon atoms. a aryl group or a cyclic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and the hydrogen atom contained in the alkyl group may be substituted by a hydroxyl group, a pendant oxy group or a carboxyl group, and the _CH2 contained in the alkyl group _ can pass _〇_,

-S-或-NH-取代。該環式烴基中所含之氫原子可經羥基、 側氧基、碳數1〜12之烷基、碳數卜12之烷氧基、碳數6〜12 之芳基、碳數7〜12之芳烷基、縮水甘油氧基、碳數2〜4之 醯基或鹵素原子取代,該環式烴基中所含可經_〇_ 、-S-或-NH-取代。該烷基、該烷氧基、該芳基及該芳烷 基中所含之氫原子可經羥基或函素原子取代) 於單體(I)中,Ra較佳為氫原子。於單體⑴中,環式烴基 可為脂環式烴基,亦可為芳香族烴基’較佳為芳香族烴 基。可為單環之環式烴基,亦可為縮合環式烴基。作為脂 環式烴基之具體例,可舉出環己基等。作為芳香族烴基之 具體例’可列舉苯基、萘基及蒽基等。作為雜環基^要 為含有氮原子、氧原子等雜原子作為環之構成原子者即 可。可為單環之雜環基,亦可為縮合環狀之雜環基。具體 可列舉m m、㈣基&quot;㈣基、対基4 唾基&quot;比咬基、㈣基、μ基、四氫吱。南基&quot;引π朵基、 =唾基κ基等。作為R2,較佳為芳香族煙基或雜環 基。 辰式扭基及雜環基可經選自由經基 〜《田尹土签、w虱基、例如甲 基、乙基、異丙基、第三丁基或辛基等碳數之貌基、 例如甲氧基或乙氧基等碳數卜12之烧氧基、例如苯基、蔡 '54080.doc 201133033 土等碳數6〜12之芳基、例如节基等碳數7〜12之芳燒基、縮 尺甘油氧基、例如乙醯基等碳數2〜4之醯基、例如乙醯氧 基等碳數1 12之酿氧基、胺基、例如乙基胺基、二甲基胺 基等經-個或兩個碳l〜12之烷基取代之胺基、及例如氟 原子、氣原子㈣原子等自素原子所組成之群中的至少一 種取代。 環式烴基及雜環基可為選自由環式烴基及雜環基所組成 之群中之至 &gt;、種經由連結基而與環式烴基或雜環基鍵結 之基。作為連結基’例如可列舉:亞甲基、亞乙基、亞丙 基、亞異丙基、亞環己基、伸乙基或伸丙基等碳數丨〜6左 右之烴基、氧原子、硫原子、羰基或_c〇2_等。又,選自 複數個環式烴基及雜環基之基亦可以單鍵進行鍵結。 具體可列舉.複數個芳香族烴基以單鍵進行鍵結而成之 聯苯基、或複數個芳香族烴基以亞異丙基進行鍵結而成之 以下述式表示之基等。-S- or -NH- substituted. The hydrogen atom contained in the cyclic hydrocarbon group may be a hydroxyl group, a pendant oxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having a carbon number of 12, an aryl group having a carbon number of 6 to 12, and a carbon number of 7 to 12 The aralkyl group, the glycidoxy group, the fluorenyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms or the halogen atom are substituted, and the cyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by _〇_, -S- or -NH-. The alkyl group, the alkoxy group, the aryl group and the hydrogen atom contained in the aralkyl group may be substituted by a hydroxyl group or a hydroxyl atom) in the monomer (I), and Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom. In the monomer (1), the cyclic hydrocarbon group may be an alicyclic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group, preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group. It may be a monocyclic cyclic hydrocarbon group or a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon group. Specific examples of the alicyclic hydrocarbon group include a cyclohexyl group and the like. Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group and the like. As the heterocyclic group, a hetero atom such as a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom may be used as a constituent atom of the ring. It may be a monocyclic heterocyclic group or a condensed cyclic heterocyclic group. Specific examples thereof include m m, (tetra)yl &quot;(tetra)yl, fluorenyl 4 sialyl &quot;bite base, (tetra) group, μ group, tetrahydroanthracene. Nanji&quot; cited π-based, = sialyl-kaki and the like. R2 is preferably an aromatic acetonyl group or a heterocyclic group. The thiol group and the heterocyclic group may be selected from the group consisting of a carbon number such as a base group, a "Tian Yin soil sign, a w-based group, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group or an octyl group. For example, a methoxy group such as a methoxy group or an ethoxy group, such as a phenyl group, a phenyl group, a 54080.doc 201133033, a aryl group having a carbon number of 6 to 12, and a carbon number of 7 to 12, for example, a group. a mercapto group, a glycerol group having a carbon number of 2 to 4 such as an ethyl fluorenyl group, a decyl group having a carbon number of 12, for example, an ethoxy group, an amine group, for example, an ethylamino group or a dimethylamine. The group is substituted with at least one of an amine group substituted with one or two carbon atoms of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and at least one group consisting of a fluorine atom, a gas atom (tetra) atom and the like. The cyclic hydrocarbon group and the heterocyclic group may be selected from the group consisting of a cyclic hydrocarbon group and a heterocyclic group to &gt;, a group bonded to a cyclic hydrocarbon group or a heterocyclic group via a linking group. Examples of the linking group include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, an isopropylidene group, a cyclohexylene group, an exoethyl group or a propyl group, and a hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of about 66 or less, an oxygen atom, and sulfur. Atom, carbonyl or _c〇2_. Further, a group selected from a plurality of cyclic hydrocarbon groups and a heterocyclic group may be bonded by a single bond. Specific examples thereof include a biphenyl group in which a plurality of aromatic hydrocarbon groups are bonded by a single bond, or a group in which a plurality of aromatic hydrocarbon groups are bonded by an isopropylidene group, which is represented by the following formula.

作為單體(i),可列舉:苯乙烯、鄰甲基苯乙烯、間甲基 苯乙烯、對甲基苯乙烯、2,4_二甲基苯乙烯、鄰乙基苯乙 稀、對乙基苯乙烯、三曱基苯乙烯、丙基苯乙烯、第三丁 基苯乙烯、環己基苯乙烯、十二烷基苯乙烯等烷基笨乙 烯;羥基苯乙烯、第三丁氧基苯乙烯、乙烯基苯曱酸、乙 酸乙稀基苄酯、鄰氣苯乙烯、對氯苯乙烯及胺基苯乙烯等 154080.doc -110- 201133033 在苯環上鍵結有選自羥基、烷氧基、羧基、醯氧基、鹵素 及胺基等之基而成的經取代之苯乙浠;4_乙烯基聯苯、2_ 乙基-4-苄基苯乙烯、4_(苯基丁基)苯乙烯及4_羥基_4,_乙烯 基聯笨等乙烯基聯苯系化合物;乙烯基萘及乙烯基蒽等具 有縮合環及乙烯基之化合物等。 ΟExamples of the monomer (i) include styrene, o-methyl styrene, m-methyl styrene, p-methyl styrene, 2,4-dimethyl styrene, o-ethyl styrene, and ethyl b. Alkyl stupid ethylene such as styrene, tridecyl styrene, propyl styrene, t-butyl styrene, cyclohexyl styrene, dodecyl styrene; hydroxystyrene, tert-butoxystyrene , vinyl benzoic acid, ethyl benzyl acetate, styrene styrene, p-chlorostyrene and amino styrene, etc. 154080.doc -110- 201133033 The benzene ring is bonded to a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group. Substituted phenethyl hydrazide, carboxyl group, decyloxy group, halogen group and amine group; 4_vinyl biphenyl, 2_ethyl-4-benzyl styrene, 4_(phenylbutyl)benzene A vinylbiphenyl compound such as ethylene or a 4-hydroxyl-4,-vinyl group; a compound having a condensed ring and a vinyl group such as vinyl naphthalene or vinyl anthracene. Ο

作為具有芳香族雜環基之單體⑴,可列舉:Ν_乙烯基吼 咯烷酮、Ν-乙烯基咪唑、Ν_乙烯基咔唑、Ν_乙烯基吡啶、 Ν_乙烯基鄰笨二甲醯亞胺及Ν-乙烯基吲哚等。 作為單體(I),尤其是若為選自由苯乙烯、N—乙烯基咔 坐乙稀基萘及乙稀基蒽所組成之群中之至少1種單體, 則光子膜可於較廣之波長帶甲進行更加均勻之偏光轉換, 更佳為苯乙婦或N-乙烯基料。作為單體⑴,可併用複數 種不同之單體。 關於源自單體⑴之結構單Examples of the monomer (1) having an aromatic heterocyclic group include anthracene-vinylpyrrolidone, anthracene-vinylimidazole, anthracene-vinylcarbazole, anthracene-vinylpyridine, and anthracene-vinyl group. Formamidine and oxime-vinyl oxime. As the monomer (I), especially if it is at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of styrene, N-vinyl anthracene naphthyl and ethylene fluorene, the photonic film can be widely used. The wavelength band A performs a more uniform polarization conversion, and is more preferably a styrene or N-vinyl material. As the monomer (1), a plurality of different monomers may be used in combination. About the structure list derived from monomer (1)

-一美 /1守彳曰左取(DJ 中所3之所有結構單元之合計量設為⑽質量。乂之情形 時,亦可不含該源自單體⑴之結構單元,但通常為㈣質 量%,較佳為2〜70質量%,尤佳為5〜50質量%。 於單體(II)中,R較佳為氫原子。於單體⑴)中,作為碳 之環式烴基,例如可列舉:笨基、蔡基及蒽基等芳 香族烴基;例如環戊基、環己基、異冰片基、三環癸基、 金剛炫基、及降冰片燒内酷基等環燒基等。 丁可鍵結選自由甲*、乙基、異丙基、第三 2及辛基4碳數1〜12m例如甲氧基及乙氧基等碳 12之烷氧基,例如氟原子、氣原子及溴原子等齒素原 154080.doc -111- 201133033 子,例如乙醯基等之類之碳數2〜4之酿基;碳數6〜12之芳 基,碳數7〜12之芳烷基;羥基;縮水甘油氧基以及羧基所 組成之群中的至少1種基。該環式烴基中所含之_Ch2_可 經-Ο-、-S-或-NH-取代。 作為單體(II)之具體例,可列舉:(曱基)丙烯酸、(曱基) 丙烯酸曱酯、(曱基)丙烯酸苯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸萘酯、(曱 基)丙烯酸蒽酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(曱基)丙烯酸2_四 氫0比喃酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異冰片酯、(曱基)丙烯酸三環癸 醋、(曱基)丙稀酸金剛烷酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基金剛烷 醋、(甲基)丙烯酸曱基金剛烷酯、(曱基)丙烯酸乙基金剛 烷酯、降冰片烷内酯(曱基)丙烯酸醋、2_(5_氧代_4_氧雜三 環[4,2,1,03’7]壬烧-2-基氧基)-2-氧代乙基(曱基)丙烯酸酯、 1-(曱基)丙烯醯基-4-曱氧基萘、(曱基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙 酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-(二甲基胺基)乙酯、聚乙二醇單曱醚 (甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單曱醚(曱基)丙烯酸酯及甘油 單(曱基)丙烯酸酯等。 此處,所謂(曱基)丙烯酸酯,係指選自由丙烯酸酯及甲 基丙浠酸酯所組成之群中之至少1種。 作為單體(II),若為選自由(曱基)丙烯酸曱酯、(曱基)丙 烯酸苯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸萘酯、(曱基)丙烯酸環己酯、(曱 基)丙烯酸2-四氫吡喃酯、(曱基)丙烯酸異冰片酯、(曱基) 丙烯酸三環癸酯、(曱基)丙烯酸金剛烷酯、(曱基)丙烯酸 羥基金剛烷酯、(甲基)丙烯酸曱基金剛烷酯、(曱基)丙烯 酸乙基金剛烷酯、降冰片烷内酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2-(5-氧 154080.doc -112- 201133033 代-4-氧雜三環[4,2,1,〇3,7]壬烷·2_基氧基)_2_氧代乙基(甲 基)丙烯酸酯、l-(f基)丙烯醯基_4_甲氧基萘、(甲基)丙烯 酸2-羥基乙酯及甘油單(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之至 少1種單體,則相位差板之光彈性係數較小,故由應力引 起之雙折射之表現極小,可抑制由貼合後之偏光板收縮等 . 引起之相位差值變化所導致的漏光,可獲得無光學不均之 膜,故而較佳,尤佳為選自由(甲基)丙烯酸異冰片酯、(甲 0 基)丙烯酸三環癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸金剛烷酯、(甲基)丙烯 酸羥基金剛烷酯、(甲基)丙烯酸f基金剛烷酯、(甲基)丙 烯酸乙基金剛烷酯、降冰片烷内酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2_羥基 乙酯及甘油單(甲基)丙烯酸酯所組成之群中之至少丨種單 體。作為早體(Π),亦可併用複數種不同之單體。 關於源自單體(Π)之結構單元之含量,於將相位差板⑼ 中所含之所有結構單元之合計量設為100質量%之情形 時,亦可不含該源自單體(11)之結構單元,但通常為丨〜妁 〇 質量。/°,較佳為2〜70質量%,尤佳為5〜5〇質量0/〇。 關於源自單體⑴之結構單元之含量,於將相位差板⑻ 中所a之所有結構單元之合計量設為丨質量%之情形 時,通常為1〜90質量%,較佳為2〜7〇質量。/。,尤佳為5〜50 質量%。 單體(1)可直接使用,亦可進行聚合而以聚合物⑴之形 式=用又,亦可將一部分以聚合物(1)之形式使用,進而 邻刀直接以單體(1)之形式使用。作為聚合物(1)之聚合 方法可舉出公知之自由基聚合法自&amp; 154080.doc -113- 201133033 : ☆液聚合、懸洋聚合、乳化聚合及塊狀聚合等聚 並無特別限定。就分子量調整、容易性及成膜性 荨硯點而言’較佳為溶液聚合。 如二聚α物⑴’可使用市售之聚合物。聚乙烯咔唑例 卿a-Aldrich Japan股份有限公司出售,聚苯乙婦例 2和光純藥工業股份有限公司、關東化學股份有限公司 單體為構成聚合物⑴之單體,尤佳為使用單體⑴與 單體(II)之組合。 關於源自聚合物⑴之結構單元之含量,於將相位差板 所含之所有結構單元之合計量設為⑽質量%之情形 時,亦可不含該源自聚合物⑴之結構單元,但通常為 10〜70質量較佳為30〜6帽量%,尤佳為泰55質量。 相位差板(b)可藉由使組合物(B)成臈,進而延伸而獲 得。成模進而延伸之步驟可包括光聚合步驟。光聚合可於 成膜後延伸前進行,亦可於成膜後—面延伸—面進行,還 可於成膜進而延伸後進行。尤佳為成職進行光聚合後, 進而延伸而獲得。 %无♦ &amp; v驟中,藉由對組合物(B)照射紫外光(uv), 使組合物(B)中之光聚合性成分進行光聚合而硬化。作為 紫外光之產生源,可例示螢光化學燈、黑光、低壓、言 壓、超高壓水銀燈、金屬_化物燈、太陽光線、無電極燈 等。關於紫外光之照射強度’可始終以固定之強度進行, 亦可於硬化中途改變強度,藉此亦可對硬化後之物性進行 微調整。 154080.doc -114· 201133033 組合物(Β)較佳為含有光聚合起始劑(Β3),更佳為含有 光自由基聚合起始劑。 作為光聚合起始劑,可列舉與組合物(Α)中所列舉者相 同者。 又,光聚合起始劑之使用量相對於樹脂(Bl)1〇〇質量 份,通常為0.1質量份〜30質量份,較佳為〇5質量份〜2〇質 量份。 Ο-一美/1守彳曰左取 (the total amount of all structural units of 3 in DJ is (10) quality. In the case of 乂, the structural unit derived from monomer (1) may not be included, but usually (4) quality %, preferably 2 to 70% by mass, particularly preferably 5 to 50% by mass. In the monomer (II), R is preferably a hydrogen atom. In the monomer (1)), as a cyclic hydrocarbon group of carbon, for example Examples thereof include an aromatic hydrocarbon group such as a phenyl group, a phenyl group, and a fluorenyl group; for example, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, an isobornyl group, a tricyclic fluorenyl group, a diamond group, and a ring-burning group such as a norbornene-based internal group. The butyl bond is selected from the group consisting of a*, ethyl, isopropyl, third 2 and octyl 4 carbon number 1 to 12 m such as alkoxy groups such as methoxy and ethoxy, such as fluorine atom, gas atom and bromine. Atomic isoflavone 154080.doc -111- 201133033 sub, for example, a carbon number of 2 to 4 such as an acetonitrile group; an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms; an aralkyl group having 7 to 12 carbon atoms; At least one of a group consisting of a hydroxyl group; a glycidyloxy group; and a carboxyl group. The _Ch2_ contained in the cyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -Ο-, -S- or -NH-. Specific examples of the monomer (II) include (fluorenyl)acrylic acid, (fluorenyl) decyl acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, and decyl methacrylate. , cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, trimethylsulfonate (mercapto)acrylate, (mercapto)acrylic acid Adamantyl ester, hydroxyadamantane (meth) acrylate, hydrazine (meth) acrylate, ethyl adamantyl (mercapto) acrylate, norbornane lactone (fluorenyl) acrylate, 2_( 5_oxo_4_oxatricyclo[4,2,1,03'7]oxime-2-yloxy)-2-oxoethyl(indenyl)acrylate, 1-(fluorenyl) Ethyl decyl-4-decyloxynaphthalene, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-(dimethylamino)ethyl (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol monoterpene ether (methyl Acrylate, polypropylene glycol monoterpene ether (mercapto) acrylate, and glycerol mono(decyl) acrylate. Here, the (mercapto) acrylate refers to at least one selected from the group consisting of acrylates and methacrylates. As the monomer (II), if it is selected from decyl acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate (meth) acrylate, (mercapto) acrylate 2 - tetrahydropyranyl ester, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecyl acrylate, adamantyl (mercapto) acrylate, hydroxyadamantyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate Hydrazine, alkanoate, ethyl adamantyl (meth) acrylate, norbornane lactone (meth) acrylate, 2-(5-oxo 154080.doc -112-201133033 -4- oxa tricyclo [4,2,1,〇3,7]decane·2_yloxy)_2_oxoethyl (meth) acrylate, 1-(f-)propenyl _4-methoxynaphthalene At least one of a group consisting of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate and glycerol mono(meth)acrylate, the photoelastic coefficient of the phase difference plate is small, so birefringence caused by stress The performance is extremely small, and the light leakage caused by the change of the phase difference caused by the contraction of the polarizing plate after bonding can be suppressed, and a film having no optical unevenness can be obtained, so More preferably, it is selected from the group consisting of isobornyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecyl (meth)acrylate, adamantyl (meth)acrylate, hydroxyadamantyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid At least 群 of a group consisting of f-carbonate, ethylammonium (meth)acrylate, norbornane lactone, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and glycerol mono(meth)acrylate Monomer. As the early body (Π), a plurality of different monomers can also be used in combination. When the total amount of all the structural units contained in the phase difference plate (9) is 100% by mass, the content of the structural unit derived from the monomer (Π) may not be contained in the monomer (11). The structural unit, but usually 丨~妁〇 quality. / °, preferably 2 to 70% by mass, particularly preferably 5 to 5 % by mass / 〇. The content of the structural unit derived from the monomer (1) is usually 1 to 90% by mass, preferably 2 to 2, in the case where the total amount of all the structural units of a in the retardation plate (8) is 丨% by mass. 7〇 quality. /. , especially good for 5 to 50% by mass. The monomer (1) may be used as it is, or may be polymerized in the form of the polymer (1) = or may be used in the form of the polymer (1), and the adjacent knife may be directly in the form of the monomer (1). use. The polymerization method of the polymer (1) is exemplified by a known radical polymerization method from &amp; 154080.doc-113-201133033: ☆ Polymerization, suspension polymerization, emulsion polymerization, and bulk polymerization are not particularly limited. In terms of molecular weight adjustment, easiness, and film formability, it is preferably solution polymerization. As the dimeric alpha (1)', a commercially available polymer can be used. The polyethylene carbazole case is sold by a-Aldrich Japan Co., Ltd., and the polystyrene case 2 and the pure pharmaceutical company, the Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd. monomer are the monomers constituting the polymer (1), and particularly preferably used. Combination of body (1) and monomer (II). The content of the structural unit derived from the polymer (1) may not be the structural unit derived from the polymer (1) when the total amount of all the structural units contained in the phase difference plate is (10)% by mass, but usually For the 10~70 mass, it is preferably 30~6 cap%, and especially good for Thai 55 mass. The phase difference plate (b) can be obtained by forming the composition (B) into a crucible and then extending. The step of molding and then extending may include a photopolymerization step. The photopolymerization may be carried out before stretching after film formation, or after film formation, surface extension, or after film formation and extension. You Jia obtained the photopolymerization for the job and then extended it. In the absence of ♦ &amp; v, the photopolymerizable component in the composition (B) is photopolymerized by irradiation of ultraviolet light (uv) to the composition (B). As the source of the ultraviolet light, a fluorescent chemical lamp, a black light, a low pressure, a pressure, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a metal oxide lamp, a solar ray, an electrodeless lamp, and the like can be exemplified. The irradiation intensity of ultraviolet light can always be performed at a fixed strength, and the strength can be changed in the middle of hardening, whereby the physical properties after hardening can be finely adjusted. 154080.doc -114· 201133033 The composition (Β) preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator (Β3), more preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator may be the same as those listed in the composition (Α). Further, the amount of the photopolymerization initiator to be used is usually 0.1 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass, preferably 5 parts by mass to 2 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of the resin (B1). Ο

組合物(Β)較佳為含有有機溶劑。 作為有機溶劑,可列舉:醚系溶劑、芳香族烴系溶劑、 酮系溶劑、醇系溶劑、酯系溶劑、醯胺系溶劑等。 作為醚系溶劑,可列舉:四氫呋喃、四氳吡喃、丨,4-二 呵烷、乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、乙二醇單丙醚、乙 二醇單丁醚、二乙二醇單曱醚、二乙二醇單乙醚、二乙二 醇單丁醚、二乙二醇二曱醚、二乙二醇二乙醚、二乙二醇 二丙醚、二乙二醇二丁醚、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、丙二醇 單乙謎乙酸醋、丙二酵單丙喊乙酸酯、甲基溶纖劑乙酸 醋、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇 乙酸酯、丙二醇甲醚乙酸酯、乙酸甲氡基丁酯、乙酸甲氧 基戊苯㈣及甲基笨甲喊等。作為芳香族於 系溶劑’可列H、曱苯、二甲笨及均三甲笨等。作: 酮系溶劑,可列舉:丙酮、2-丁_、2_庚_、3•庚_、 庚酮、4-曱基-2·戊酮、環戊酮及環己酮等。作為醇系溶 劑’可列舉:曱醇、乙醇、丙醇、丁醇、己醇、環己醇、 乙二醇及甘油等。作為酯系溶劑’可列舉:乙酸乙酯、乙 154080.doc -115· 201133033 酸正丁酯、乙酸異丁酯、甲酸戊酯、乙酸異戊酯、乙酸異 丁酯、丙酸丁酯、丁酸異丙酯、丁酸乙酯、丁酸丁酯、炫 基酯類、乳酸甲酯、乳酸乙酯、羥乙酸甲酯、羥乙酸乙 酯、羥乙酸丁酯、曱氧基乙酸曱酯、曱氧基乙酸乙酯、甲 氧基乙酸丁酯、乙氧基乙酸曱酯、乙氧基乙酸乙酯、3-羥 丙酸甲酯、3-羥丙酸乙酯、3_曱氧基丙酸曱酯、3_甲氧基 丙酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3_乙氧基丙酸乙酯、2-羥 丙酸甲酯、2-羥丙酸乙酯、2-羥丙酸丙酯、2-甲氧基丙酸 甲酯、2-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、2_曱氧基丙酸丙酯、2_乙氧基 丙酸曱酯、2-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、2-氧-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-氧-2-曱基丙酸乙酯、2-甲氧基-2-甲基丙酸甲酯、2-乙氧 基-2-曱基丙酸乙酯、丙酮酸甲酯、丙_酸乙酯、丙酮酸丙 酿、乙醢乙酸曱酯、乙醯乙酸乙酯、2_氧代丁酸甲醋、2-氧代丁酸乙酯、乙酸3-甲氧基丁酯、乙酸3_曱基_3_曱氧基 丁酯及γ-丁内酯等。作為醯胺系溶劑,可列舉N,N_二曱基 甲醯胺及N,N-二甲基乙醯胺等。作為其他溶劑,例如可列 舉N-甲基吡咯烷酮及二甲基亞颯等。溶劑可分別單獨使 用’或組合2種以上而使用。 組合物(B)亦可視需要進而含有選自由聚合抑制劑、光 敏劑、調平劑及塑化劑所組成之群中之至少丨種。 具體而 吕’可分別列舉與組合物(A)中所列舉者相同者。 聚合抑制劑之使用量相對於樹脂(B1)1 〇〇質量份,、兩$ 為0.1質量份〜30質量份’較佳為0.5質量份〜1〇質量广 光敏劑之使用量相對於樹脂(B 1)100質量份, 艰常為0.1 154080.doc -116- 201133033 質量份〜30質量份,較佳為0.5質量份~1〇質量份。 調平劑之含量相對於樹脂(Β1) 1 〇〇質量份,通常為〇·〇〇 1 質量份〜2.0質量份,較佳為〇.005質量份〜1.5質量份。 作為塑化劑,可列舉磷酸酯、羧酸酯或乙醇酸酯。作為 磷酸酯,例如可列舉:磷酸三苯酯(ΤΡΡ)、磷酸三甲苯酯 (TCP)、磷酸甲苯基二苯酯、磷酸辛基二苯酯、磷酸二苯 基聯苯酯、磷酸三辛酯及磷酸三丁酯等。 Ο Ο 作為羧酸酯,具有代表性的是鄰苯二甲酸酯及檸檬酸 醋。鄰苯二甲酸酯之例中可列舉:鄰苯二曱酸二曱酿 (DMP)、鄰苯二甲酸二乙酯(DEp)、鄰苯二甲酸二丁醋 (DBP)、鄰苯二甲酸二辛酯(D〇p)、鄰苯二甲酸二苯酿 (DPP)及鄰苯二曱酸二乙基己酯(DEHp)。擰檬酸酯之例中 可列舉:〇-乙醯基檸檬酸三乙酯(OACTE)、〇_乙醯基檸檬 酸二丁酯(OACTB)、檸檬酸乙醯基三乙酯及檸檬酸乙醯基 二丁酯。作為其他羧酸酯,可列舉:油酸丁酯、蓖麻油酸 甲基乙醯酯、癸二酸二丁酯、各種偏苯三甲酸酯等。 作為乙醇酸酯,可例示:甘油三乙酸酯、甘油三丁酸 醋、丁基鄰苯二〒酿基乙醇酸丁西旨、〔基鄰苯二甲酿基乙 醇酸乙酯、甲基鄰笨二曱醯基乙醇酸乙酯及丁基鄰笨二甲 酸酯 酯、 醯基乙醇酸丁醋等。又,亦可列舉:三經甲基丙烧三苯甲 季戊四醇四苯甲酸酯、二-= 一一羥f基丙烷四乙酸 -三經甲基丙燒四丙酸醋、季戊四醇四乙酸酿、山 梨醇六乙酸醋、山梨醇六丙酸醋、山梨醇三乙酸酷三丙酸 醋、肌醇五乙酸醋及去水山梨醇四丁酸㈣作為較佳例。 154080.doc -117- 201133033 作為塑化劑,其中較佳為磷酸三苯酯、磷酸三曱苯酯、 磷酸甲苯基二苯酯、磷酸三丁酯、鄰苯二f酸二甲酯、鄰 苯二甲酸二乙酯、鄰苯二曱酸二丁酯、鄰苯二甲酸二辛 酯、鄰苯二甲酸二乙基己酯、甘油三乙酸酯、乙基鄰苯二 甲醯基乙醇酸乙酯、三羥甲基丙烷三苯甲酸酯、季戊四醇 四苯甲酸S旨、二-三經甲基丙烧四乙酸酯、季戊四醇四乙 酸酯、山梨醇六乙酸酯、山梨醇六丙酸酯及山梨醇三乙酸 酯三丙酸酯等,尤佳為磷酸三苯酯、鄰苯二甲酸二乙醋、 乙基鄰苯二甲酿基乙醇酸乙醋、三經甲基丙烧三苯甲酸 酯、季戊四醇四苯甲酸酯、二-三羥甲基丙烷四乙酸酯、 山裂醇〃、乙酸S曰、山梨醇六丙酸酯及去水山梨醇三乙酸酯 三丙酸醋。 塑化劑可使用1種,亦可併用2種以上。塑化劑之添加量 於不明顯損及相位差板特性 於組合物(B)之固形物成分 右。所謂固形物成分總量, 之量。 之範圍内適當選擇即可,相對 總量,通常為0.1〜30質量%左 係指自組合物(B)去除溶劑後 π句尘化劑夂具體例,可列舉:日本專利特開平 U4445號公報中記載之(二)李戊四_旨類、日本專利半 平H-24讓號公報中記載之# _ n 测-⑽0號公報中記載之二甘^旨類、日本專 11_92574號公報中記載之檸檬酸黯類、日本專利特門二 9_號純+記叙經取代之Μ伽㈣等。 相位差板⑻可藉由使組合物(Β)成膜(臈化),進而使 154080.doc •118· 201133033 得之膜狀物延伸而製造。或者 了糟由使組合物(Β)成膜(膜 化),進仃光聚合,進而使所得 、 &amp;膜狀物延伸而製造。作 為形成級合物之膜狀物之方法 /〇&gt;. Λ*. 、 了列舉·將組·合物 (B)洗禱於平滑面上,並蒸館去^、、六令丨、 于&gt; 之溶劑澆鑄法;利 用溶融擠出機等將組合物(的擠 娜出成形為膜狀之熔融擠出 而4尤/、疋’溶劑洗禱法可使組合物⑻直接成膜,故 而較佳。 、 Ο ❹ 又’作為延伸方法,例如可列舉利用㈣法之 利用幸昆間延伸之延伸法等。延伸可為單轴延伸或雙轴延伸 之任一者,亦可為縱向延伸或橫向延伸之任—者。 軸延伸之方法,可列舉:利用親間延伸之向縱方向之單轴 延伸法、使用拉幅機之向橫方向之單轴延伸法等,作為雙 軸延伸之方法’可列舉:擴大使把持膜之側端的拉幅布鋏 之軌道寬度而進行縱向延伸之同時,藉由導軌(GuideRail) 之擴展,亦向橫方向延伸之同時雙軸延伸;於利用輥間延 1 申向縱方向延伸後,以拉幅布錢把持其兩端部,使用拉幅 機向橫方向延伸之逐次雙軸延伸法等。尤其是就生產性之 觀點而言,較佳為橫向單軸延伸及雙軸延伸,尤佳為橫向 單轴延伸。藉由橫向單軸 學雙軸性之相位差板。=:=,可獲得具有光 此處所礴光學雙軸性,係指將膜 面内直行之兩個方向之折射率分別設為W其中使 ηχ&gt;%)、厚度方向之折射率設為nz時,ηχ~ηζ,反之,於 〜、ny、ηζ中任意兩者相等之情形(例如ηχ&gt;〒ηζ等)時,為 光學早韩性。具有光學雙軸性之相位差板⑻相對於膜之厚 154080.doc •119- 201133033 度方向亦可進行均勻之偏光轉換。 如此所得之相位差板(b)具有滿足式⑴之光學特性。因 ’可於較廣之波長帶中進行均勾之偏光轉換。 實施例 以:’藉由實施例對本發明進行更加詳細之說明,但本 毛月並不限疋於該等實施例。例中之「%」及「份」只要 無特別記載,則為質量%及質量份。 +利用以下流程合成化合物。原料之單四氫⑼喃基保護對 苯二酚(a)係藉由專利文獻(日本專利特開2〇〇4_262884)中 記載之方法合成。 (第一路徑)The composition (Β) preferably contains an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include an ether solvent, an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent, a ketone solvent, an alcohol solvent, an ester solvent, and a guanamine solvent. Examples of the ether solvent include tetrahydrofuran, tetramethylpyran, anthracene, 4-dioxane, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monopropyl ether, and ethylene glycol monobutyl ether. Diethylene glycol monoterpene ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol dioxime ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dipropyl ether, diethylene glycol Dibutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl acetate, propylene glycol monoacetate acetate, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl card Alcohol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether acetate, decyl butyl acetate, methoxy pentyl acetate (tetra) and methyl stupid. As the aromatic solvent, it can be listed as H, toluene, dimethyl benzene, and succinyl. Preparation: The ketone solvent may, for example, be acetone, 2-butyl-, 2-g-g, 3, g-heptane, heptanone, 4-mercapto-2,pentanone, cyclopentanone or cyclohexanone. Examples of the alcohol-based solvent include decyl alcohol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol, and glycerin. Examples of the ester solvent include ethyl acetate, ethyl 154080.doc-115·201133033 n-butyl acid acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, and butyl. Isopropyl acrylate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, leuco ester, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, methyl glycolate, ethyl hydroxyacetate, butyl glycolate, decyl decyl acetate, Ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, decyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, methyl 3-hydroxypropionate, ethyl 3-hydroxypropionate, 3-methoxypropane Hydrate ester, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl 2-hydroxypropionate, ethyl 2-hydroxypropionate, Propyl 2-hydroxypropionate, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, decyl 2-ethoxypropionate, 2- Ethyl ethoxypropionate, methyl 2-oxo-2-methylpropanoate, ethyl 2-oxo-2-mercaptopropionate, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, 2 -ethyl ethoxy-2-mercaptopropionate, methyl pyruvate, ethyl propionate, propyl acetonate, decyl acetate, acetamidine Acid ethyl ester, 2-oxobutyric acid methyl vinegar, 2-oxobutyric acid ethyl ester, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, 3-mercapto-3-indolyl butyl acetate and γ-butyrolactone Wait. Examples of the guanamine-based solvent include N,N-dimercaptocarbamide and N,N-dimethylacetamide. As other solvents, for example, N-methylpyrrolidone and dimethylammonium can be cited. The solvent may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The composition (B) may further contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a polymerization inhibitor, a photosensitizer, a leveling agent, and a plasticizer, as needed. Specifically, the same can be cited as those listed in the composition (A). The amount of the polymerization inhibitor used is 0.1 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass of the resin (B1), preferably 0.5 parts by mass to 1 part by mass. The amount of the photosensitizer is relatively large relative to the resin ( B 1) 100 parts by mass, often 0.1 154080.doc -116- 201133033 parts by mass to 30 parts by mass, preferably 0.5 parts by mass to 1 part by mass. The content of the leveling agent is usually 质量·〇〇 1 part by mass to 2.0 parts by mass, preferably 〇.005 parts by mass to 1.5 parts by mass, based on 1 part by mass of the resin (Β1). As a plasticizer, a phosphate ester, a carboxylate, or a glycolate is mentioned. Examples of the phosphate ester include triphenyl phosphate (ΤΡΡ), tricresyl phosphate (TCP), tolyldiphenyl phosphate, octyl diphenyl phosphate, diphenyl biphenyl phosphate, and trioctyl phosphate. And tributyl phosphate and the like. Ο Ο As the carboxylic acid ester, phthalic acid ester and citric acid vinegar are typical. Examples of the phthalic acid esters include: phthalic acid diterpene (DMP), diethyl phthalate (DEp), dibutyl phthalate (DBP), phthalic acid. Dioctyl ester (D〇p), diphenyl phthalate (DPP) and diethylhexyl phthalate (DEHp). Examples of the citric acid ester include: ruthenium-ethyl citrate triethyl citrate (OACTE), bismuthyl citrate dibutyl citrate (OACTB), ethionyl triethyl citrate, and citric acid Mercapto dibutyl ester. Examples of the other carboxylic acid esters include butyl oleate, ricinoleic acid methyl ethyl phthalate, dibutyl sebacate, and various trimellitates. As the glycolate, glycerol triacetate, glyceryl tributyrate, butyl phthalate, glycolate, butyl ketone, ethyl phthalate, ethyl phthalate Ethyl stearate glycolate and butyl phthalate, thioglycolic acid butyl vinegar and the like. Further, it may also be exemplified by trimethyl methacrylate triphenyl pentaerythritol tetrabenzoate, bis-= monohydroxyl-propane tetraacetic acid-trimethyl methacrylate tetrapropionic acid vinegar, pentaerythritol tetraacetic acid, Preferred examples are sorbitol hexaacetate vinegar, sorbitol hexa-propionic acid vinegar, sorbitan triacetic acid citrate, inositol pentaacetic acid vinegar and sorbitan tetrabutyric acid (iv). 154080.doc -117- 201133033 As a plasticizer, among them, triphenyl phosphate, triphenyl phenyl phosphate, tolyldiphenyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, dimethyl phthalate, ortho-benzene are preferred. Diethyl dicarboxylate, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, diethylhexyl phthalate, triacetin, ethyl phthalate Ester, trimethylolpropane tribenzoate, pentaerythritol tetrabenzoic acid S, di-trimethyl methacrylate tetraacetate, pentaerythritol tetraacetate, sorbitol hexaacetate, sorbitol hexapropylene Acid esters and sorbitol triacetate tripropionate, etc., especially preferably triphenyl phosphate, phthalic acid diethyl ketone, ethyl phthalic acid glycolic acid ethyl vinegar, trimethyl ketone Tribenzoate, pentaerythritol tetrabenzoate, di-trimethylolpropane tetraacetate, saponin, S-acetate, sorbitol hexa-propionate and sorbitan triacetate Propionic acid vinegar. One type of plasticizer may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination. The amount of plasticizer added does not significantly impair the phase difference plate characteristics. The solid content of the composition (B) is right. The total amount of solid components, the amount. In the range of 0.1 to 30% by mass, the relative amount is usually 0.1 to 30% by mass. The left part refers to the π sentence dusting agent after removing the solvent from the composition (B), and the specific example is as follows: Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. U4445 The above-mentioned (2) Li Wu 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Citrate bismuth, Japanese patent Temen 2 9_ pure + narrative replaced by Sangha (four) and so on. The phase difference plate (8) can be produced by forming a film (deuteration) of the composition and further extending the film obtained by 154080.doc • 118·201133033. Alternatively, the composition (film) is formed into a film (film formation), and photopolymerization is carried out to further produce a film obtained by stretching the film. As a method of forming a film of a hydrate, 〇*. 、, enumeration, grouping (B) on a smooth surface, and steaming the hall to ^, hexagram, and &gt; Solvent casting method; the composition (the squeezing of the composition into a film-like melt extrusion by a melt extruder or the like) allows the composition (8) to directly form a film, thereby Preferably, Ο ❹ and 'as an extension method, for example, an extension method using the (four) method, such as extension using a singular extension, etc. The extension may be either uniaxially or biaxially extended, or may be longitudinally extended or For the method of biaxial stretching, the method of biaxial stretching may be exemplified by a uniaxial stretching method in which a longitudinal direction is extended by a parent, a uniaxial stretching method using a tenter in a lateral direction, or the like. 'It can be exemplified that the rail width of the tenter fabric at the side end of the grip film is extended to extend in the longitudinal direction, and the extension of the guide rail (GuideRail) also extends in the lateral direction while biaxially extending; 1 After extending to the longitudinal direction, the two sides of the two sides are controlled by the money. A sequential biaxial stretching method in which a tenter is extended in the lateral direction, etc. Especially in terms of productivity, it is preferably a lateral uniaxial stretching and a biaxial stretching, and particularly preferably a lateral uniaxial stretching. Axially biaxial phase difference plate. =:=, the optical biaxiality of the light here can be obtained, which means that the refractive indices of the two directions in the film plane are set to W, respectively, so that ηχ>%) When the refractive index in the thickness direction is nz, η χ η η ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ ζ 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 The phase difference plate (8) with optical biaxiality can be evenly polarized for the thickness of the film with respect to the thickness of the film 154080.doc • 119-201133033 degrees. The phase difference plate (b) thus obtained has an optical characteristic satisfying the formula (1). Because of the wide-band wavelength conversion in the wider wavelength band. EXAMPLES The present invention will be described in more detail by way of examples, but the present invention is not limited to the examples. In the examples, "%" and "parts" are % by mass and parts by mass unless otherwise specified. + The compounds were synthesized using the following procedure. The monotetrahydro(9)yl group-protected hydroquinone (a) of the starting material is synthesized by the method described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. Hei. (first path)

(化合物(b)之合成例) 將單四氫吡喃基保護對苯二酚(a)50.1 g(258 mmol)、石炭 酸鉀 97.1 g(7〇3 mm〇i)、6-溴己醇 46.7 g(258 mmol)及二曱 基乙酿胺177 g加以混合。將所得之混合液於氮氣環境 下’以90。(:進行攪拌,其後以1 〇(Tc進行攪拌,其後冷却 至室溫。於混合液中添加純水及甲基異丁基酮,回收經分 離之有機層。將回收之有機層以氫氧化鈉水溶液及純水清 洗後’進行脫水,過濾後進行減壓濃縮。於殘渣中添力σ甲 154080.doc -120- 201133033 醇,過濾生成之沈澱後,進行真空乾燥,獲得化合物(b)47 g( 159 mmol)。產率以6-溴己醇基準計為62%。 (化合物(c)之合成例) 將化合物(13)126£(428 11^1〇1)、3,5-二-第三丁基-4-羥基 曱苯(以下稱為ΒΗΤ)1·40 g(6.42 mmol)、N,N-二曱基苯胺 116.7 g(963 mmol)、1,3-二甲基-2-咪唑啉酮 1.00 g及氣仿 6 0 0 g加以混合。於氮氣環境中,於冰浴冷卻下,向所得 之混合液中滴加丙稀醯氯58.1 g(642 mmol),進而添加純 水進行攪拌後,回收經分離之有機層。將回收之有機層以 鹽酸水、飽和碳酸納水溶液及純水加以清洗。乾燥有機 層,過濾後,於有機層中添加1 g之BHT,進行減壓濃縮, 獲得化合物(c)。 (化合物(d)之合成例) 將化合物(c)及四氫呋喃(以下稱為THF)200 ml加以混合 後,向所得之混合液中添加200 ml之THF。進而添加鹽酸 水及濃鹽酸水,於氮氣環境、60°C之條件下進行攪拌。於 所得之混合溶液中添加飽和食鹽水500 ml,進而進行授 拌,回收經分離之有機層。對回收之有機層進行脫水,過 濾後進行減壓濃縮。進而於有機層中添加己烷,於冰浴冷 卻下進行攪拌,過濾析出之粉末後,進行真空乾燥,獲得 化合物(d)90 g(339 mmol)。產率以化合物(c)基準計為 79%。 (化合物(e)之合成) 化合物(e)係按照以下所示之路徑合成。 154080.doc -121 - 201133033(Synthesis Example of Compound (b)) Monotetrahydropyranyl Group Protected Hydroquinone (a) 50.1 g (258 mmol), Potassium Carbonate 97.1 g (7〇3 mm〇i), 6-Bromohexanol 46.7 g (258 mmol) and 177 g of dimercaptoamine were mixed. The resulting mixture was brought to 90 under a nitrogen atmosphere. (: stirring was carried out, followed by stirring at 1 Torr (Tc, followed by cooling to room temperature. Pure water and methyl isobutyl ketone were added to the mixed solution, and the separated organic layer was recovered. The recovered organic layer was After washing with sodium hydroxide aqueous solution and pure water, the mixture is dehydrated, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue is added to the residue σ甲154080.doc -120- 201133033 alcohol, and the precipitate formed by filtration is dried under vacuum to obtain a compound (b) 47 g (159 mmol). The yield is 62% based on 6-bromohexanol. (Synthesis of Compound (c)) Compound (13) 126 £ (428 11^1〇1), 3, 5 -Di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyindole (hereinafter referred to as hydrazine) 1.40 g (6.42 mmol), N,N-dimercaptoaniline 116.7 g (963 mmol), 1,3-dimethyl Benzene imidazolinone 1.00 g and gas imitation 600 g were mixed. Under a nitrogen atmosphere, 58.1 g (642 mmol) of acrylonitrile chloride was added dropwise to the resulting mixture, followed by addition. After the pure water is stirred, the separated organic layer is recovered, and the recovered organic layer is washed with hydrochloric acid water, a saturated aqueous sodium carbonate solution and pure water, and the organic layer is dried and filtered. 1 g of BHT was added to the organic layer, and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a compound (c). (Synthesis Example of Compound (d)) After mixing 200 ml of the compound (c) and tetrahydrofuran (hereinafter referred to as THF), 200 ml of THF was added to the obtained mixture, and hydrochloric acid water and concentrated hydrochloric acid water were further added, and the mixture was stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere at 60 ° C. 500 ml of saturated brine was added to the obtained mixed solution, and the mixture was further mixed. The separated organic layer is recovered, and the recovered organic layer is dehydrated, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Further, hexane is added to the organic layer, and the mixture is stirred under ice cooling, and the precipitated powder is filtered, followed by vacuum drying. The compound (d) was obtained in an amount of 90 g (339 mmol), and the yield was 79% based on the compound (c). (Synthesis of the compound (e)) The compound (e) was synthesized according to the route shown below. 154080.doc - 121 - 201133033

以下述流程合成反式1,4-環己烷二曱酸單乙氧基甲酯(式 (h)所表示之化合物)。Trans-1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid monoethoxymethyl ester (a compound represented by the formula (h)) was synthesized by the following procedure.

(f) (a)(f) (a)

將反式-1,4-環己烷一 醢胺1000 mL加以 混合 甲酸200 g(1.1616 mol)及二曱基乙 。於氮氣環境下,一面攪拌一面升 溫至贼,於所得之漆液中添加碳酸卸96.3 g(〇.6969则1) 後,添加氯甲苯U9.7 gd.刪m〇1),將溶液於Me下授 拌6小時使其反應。將溶液放冷至室溫後,注人至冰1500 g中進行搜拌…慮取所得之結晶’將其以水/甲醇3:2 (v/v)、繼而以水加以清洗。藉由真空乾燥去除溶劑,獲得 包含化合物(f)之粉本251 g° 對將前一步驟中所得之包含化合物⑴之粉末251 g與氣 仿600 合Μ得的溶液進行冰浴冷卻’於氣氣環境 下,於所得之溶液中滴加乙氧基氣甲烧93·5 g(〇·7600叫 及三乙基胺u6.8 g(i·4515 mGl)。將反應溶液於室溫、氣 154080.doc -122- 201133033 氣環境下攪拌3小時進行反應。於反應溶液中添加甲苯600 mL,對析出之三乙基胺鹽酸鹽進行過濾分離,回收濾 液,以水加以清洗。回收有機層,以無水硫酸鈉加以乾 燥,過濾後,去除溶劑。真空乾燥所得之粗產物,獲得包 含化合物(g)之液體242 g。 將前一步驟中所得之包含化合物(g)之液體242 g及THF 250 ml加以混合。於氮氣環境下,於所得之溶液中添加 10%鈀-碳(含水5 0%) 10.0 g。減壓後,進行氫氣置換,於室 温、常壓、氫氣環境下,將所得之溶液攪拌6小時使其反 應。氮氣置換後,過濾所得之溶液,去除觸媒及溶劑。將 殘渣溶解於氣仿中。對所得之溶液進行矽膠過濾。進而利 用氯仿自矽膠中萃取矽膠上之不溶物。回收氯仿溶液,對 其進行減壓濃縮,於其中添加庚烷,使其結晶化。過濾分 離所得之結晶,並進行真空乾燥,藉此獲得化合物(h)106 g。產率以化合物反式-1,4-環己烷二曱酸基準計為39%。 將化合物(d)5 6.8 g(215 mmol)、二甲基胺基°比。定2.65 g (22 mmol)、反式1,4-環己烷二甲酸單乙氧基甲酯50 g(217 mmol)及氯仿300 mL加以混合。於氮氣環境下冰浴冷卻所 得之混合液,進行攪拌,滴加包含二環己基碳二醢亞胺 48.79 g(237 mol)及氣仿50 mL之溶液。滴加結東後,於室 溫下攪拌所得之反應溶液,添加氣仿200 mL及庚烷200 mL,過渡沈澱。回收渡液,以2 N-鹽酸水溶液加以清洗。 回收經分離之有機層,藉由過濾去除不溶成分後,添加無 水硫酸鈉,過濾後,去除溶劑,真空乾燥所得之固體,獲 154080.doc -123 - 201133033 得化合物(e')100 g。 將化合物(e')100 g、純水3.64 g(202 mmol)、對甲苯磺酸 一水合物3.84 g(20.2 mmol)及THF 200 mL加以混合。將所 得之混合液於氮氣環境下加溫至50°C,進行攪拌。將混合 液放冷至室溫後,減壓去除THF,於殘渣中添加庚烷200 mL。遽取析出之沈澱,以純水加以清洗後,進行真空乾 燥。將所得之粉末溶解於氯仿中,通過矽膠後進行過濾。 回收濾液,並溶解於氣仿400 mL中,濃縮所得之溶液,添 加曱苯。減壓濃縮溶液後,添加庚烷使其結晶化,濾取所 得之粉末,進行真空乾燥,獲得化合物(e)64.1 g。產率以 化合物(d)基準計,於第二步驟中為76%。 &lt;化合物(A 11 -1)之合成例&gt; 化合物(A11-1)係依據下述流程合成。1000 mL of trans-1,4-cyclohexane-amine was mixed with formic acid 200 g (1.1616 mol) and dimercaptoethyl. Under nitrogen atmosphere, the temperature was raised to the thief while stirring, and 96.3 g of carbonic acid was added to the obtained paint liquid (〇.6969, 1), then chlorotoluene U9.7 gd was added. m〇1) was added, and the solution was placed in Me. The mixture was mixed for 6 hours to react. After the solution was allowed to cool to room temperature, it was poured into 1500 g of ice for mixing; the obtained crystal was taken into consideration and washed with water/methanol 3:2 (v/v), followed by water. The solvent was removed by vacuum drying to obtain a powder containing the compound (f) 251 g°. The solution obtained by combining the 251 g of the powder containing the compound (1) obtained in the previous step and the gas-like 600 was cooled in an ice bath. Under the circumstance of the gas, ethoxy ethoxylated 93. 5 g (〇·7600 and triethylamine u6.8 g (i·4515 mGl) were added dropwise to the obtained solution. The reaction solution was allowed to react at room temperature and gas. 154080.doc -122- 201133033 The reaction was stirred for 3 hours in an atmosphere. 600 mL of toluene was added to the reaction solution, and the precipitated triethylamine hydrochloride was separated by filtration, and the filtrate was recovered and washed with water. After drying over anhydrous sodium sulfate, the solvent was removed by filtration, and the obtained crude product was dried in vacuo to give 242 g of liquid containing compound (g). 242 g and THF containing compound (g) obtained in the previous step. 250 ml was mixed, and 10% palladium-carbon (aqueous 50%) 10.0 g was added to the obtained solution under a nitrogen atmosphere. After decompression, hydrogen substitution was carried out, and the mixture was obtained under the conditions of room temperature, normal pressure and hydrogen atmosphere. The solution was stirred for 6 hours to react. After the change, the obtained solution is filtered, the catalyst and the solvent are removed, and the residue is dissolved in a gas-like solution, and the obtained solution is subjected to gel filtration, and the insoluble matter on the tannin extract is extracted from the tannin by chloroform, and the chloroform solution is recovered and subjected to The organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure, and heptane was added and crystallized. The obtained crystals were separated by filtration, and dried in vacuo to give compound (h) 106 g. Yield of compound trans-1,4-cyclohexane The diterpene acid standard is 39%. The compound (d) 5 6.8 g (215 mmol), dimethylamino group ratio, 2.65 g (22 mmol), trans 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid single 50 g (217 mmol) of ethoxymethyl ester and 300 mL of chloroform were mixed, and the resulting mixture was cooled in an ice bath under a nitrogen atmosphere, and stirred, and 48.79 g (237 mol) of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide was added dropwise. And the solution of 50 mL is mixed. After adding the knot, the obtained reaction solution is stirred at room temperature, and 200 mL of gas and 200 mL of heptane are added to carry out the transition precipitation. The liquid is recovered and washed with 2 N-hydrochloric acid aqueous solution. The separated organic layer is recovered, and the insoluble matter is removed by filtration, and then added. After sodium sulfate, after filtration, the solvent was removed, and the obtained solid was dried in vacuo to give compound (e') 100 g of 154080.doc -123 - 201133033. Compound (e') 100 g, pure water 3.64 g (202 mmol) The mixture was mixed with 3.84 g (20.2 mmol) of p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate and 200 mL of THF. The resulting mixture was heated to 50 ° C under a nitrogen atmosphere and stirred. After the mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, THF was removed under reduced pressure, and then, to the residue, 200 ml of heptane was added. The precipitate which precipitated was taken, washed with pure water, and vacuum-dried. The obtained powder was dissolved in chloroform, filtered through a silica gel. The filtrate was recovered, dissolved in 400 mL of a gas sample, and the resulting solution was concentrated to add toluene. After concentrating the solution under reduced pressure, heptane was added to crystallize, and the obtained powder was filtered, and dried in vacuo to give compound (e) 64.1 g. The yield was 76% in the second step based on the compound (d). &lt;Synthesis Example of Compound (A 11 -1)&gt; The compound (A11-1) was synthesized according to the following scheme.

(e) [4,6-二曱基苯并呋喃之合成例] 154080.doc 124- 201133033 使3,5-二甲基苯酚25 g(205 mmol)溶解於Ν,Ν·-二甲基乙 醯胺150.0 g中。藉由冰浴使溶液冷卻後,添加氫氧化納 9.82 g(246 mmol)。於室溫下攪拌1小時,滴加氣乙醛二甲 基乙縮醛25.49 g(266 mmol)。於100。(:下撲拌15小時,將 • 反應液添加至水1000 mL、甲基異丁基酮400 mL中,進行 , 分液。回收有機層’以500 mL之1 N-氫氧化鈉水溶液將有 機層清洗2次,進而以800 mL之純水將有機層清洗2次。回 收有機層後,以無水硫酸鈉進行脫水,利用蒸發器進行減 壓濃縮’獲得淡紅色黏長液體。另一方面,將4〇〇 g之甲 苯與正磷酸3.01 g加以混合,加熱至110°C ^於該溶液中滴 加使淡紅色黏長液體溶解於甲苯1〇〇 mL中而成之溶液。於 11 0°C下攪拌3小時後,冷卻至室溫。將反應液以1 N_碳酸 氫鈉水溶液清洗兩次’最後以純水50〇 mL加以清洗。回收 有機層,以無水硫酸鈉進行脫水後,利用蒸發器進行減壓 濃縮,並使其真空乾燥,作為淡紅色黏稠液體而獲得4,6_ Q 二甲基苯并呋喃16.5 g。產率以3,5-二甲基苯酚基準計為 55%。 [2-甲醯基-4,6-二曱基苯并呋喃之合成例] 使4,6-二曱基苯并吱喃21.62 g(148 mmol)溶解於Ν,Ν,-二 曱基甲醯胺28.4 g(389 mmol)中。藉由水浴使溶液冷卻 後,滴加磷醯氣25 g( 163 mmol)。將粉色溶液於室溫下攪 拌1小時後,於10(TC下攪拌10小時。將反應液放冷至室 溫,添加純水1〇〇 mL,攪拌一小時後,以丨N碳酸氫鈉加 以中和。將pH值調節至8後,與甲苯分液。回收有機層, 154080.doc •125- 201133033 添加活性碳2.6 g,進行過濾。利用蒸發器進行減壓濃縮, 使殘渣溶解於氯仿中,利用庚烷使其結晶化。渡取結晶, 進行真空乾燥,作為淡黃色粉末而獲得2_甲酿基_4,6_二甲 基苯并吱喃19.5 g。產率以4,6-二甲基苯并呋喃基準計為 76%。 [4,6-二曱基苯并咬喃-2-甲酸之合成例_i ] 將2-甲醯基-4,6-二甲基苯并呋喃19.50§(112111111〇1)、醯 胺硫酸13.04 g(l34 mmol)與100 mL之純水加以混合。以冰 浴加以冷卻,滴加亞氯酸鈉12.15 g(134 mmol)之水100 mL 溶液。於水浴下使其反應36小時。於反應溶液中添加甲苯 100 mL、氫氧化鉀25 g,將pH值調整至12。進行分液,回 收水層,進而以200 mL之甲苯清洗水層。回收水層,利用 2 N-鹽酸將pH值調整至2後,添加甲苯4〇〇 mL進行分液。 回收有機層’以無水硫酸鈉進行脫水後,利用蒸發器進行 減壓濃縮,並加以真空乾燥,作為黃色粉末而獲得4,6_二 曱基苯并呋喃-2-甲酸14.27 g。產率以2-甲醯基-4,6-二甲基 苯并呋喃基準計為67%。 4,6_二甲基苯并吱喃_2-曱酸亦可藉由下述流程合成。 [4,6-二甲基苯并n夫喃-2-曱酸之合成例_2](e) Synthesis of [4,6-dimercaptobenzofuran] 154080.doc 124- 201133033 Dissolve 3,5-dimethylphenol 25 g (205 mmol) in hydrazine, Ν·-dimethyl Indoleamine 150.0 g. After the solution was cooled by an ice bath, 9.82 g (246 mmol) of sodium hydroxide was added. After stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, 25.49 g (266 mmol) of acetaldehyde dimethyl acetal was added dropwise. At 100. (: Mix the mixture for 15 hours, add the reaction solution to 1000 mL of water, 400 mL of methyl isobutyl ketone, and separate. Dissolve the organic layer'. Organic with 500 mL of 1 N-aqueous sodium hydroxide solution. The layer was washed twice, and the organic layer was washed twice with 800 mL of pure water. After the organic layer was recovered, it was dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure by an evaporator to obtain a pale red sticky long liquid. 4 〇〇g of toluene and 3.01 g of orthophosphoric acid were mixed and heated to 110 ° C. The solution obtained by dissolving the pale red viscous liquid in 1 〇〇 mL of toluene was added dropwise to the solution. After stirring for 3 hours at C, the mixture was cooled to room temperature. The reaction solution was washed twice with a 1 N aqueous solution of sodium hydrogencarbonate, and finally washed with 50 liters of pure water. The organic layer was recovered and dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate. The evaporator was concentrated under reduced pressure and dried in vacuo to give 4,6-Q-dimethylbenzofuran as a pale red viscous liquid. The yield was 55% based on 3,5-dimethylphenol. [Synthesis of 2-carbamimido-4,6-dimercaptobenzofuran] 4,6-dimercaptobenzoene 21.62 g (148 mmol) was dissolved in 2,8 g (389 mmol) of hydrazine, hydrazine, -dimercaptocarboxamide. After cooling the solution by a water bath, a solution of 25 g (163 mmol) of phosphonium was added dropwise. The solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, and then stirred at 10 (TC for 10 hours). The reaction solution was allowed to cool to room temperature, 1 mL of pure water was added, and after stirring for one hour, it was neutralized with 丨N sodium hydrogencarbonate. After adjusting the pH to 8, the liquid layer was separated from the toluene. The organic layer was recovered, 154080.doc •125-201133033 Activated carbon 2.6 g was added and filtered. The residue was concentrated under reduced pressure using an evaporator to dissolve the residue in chloroform. The heptane was crystallized, the crystal was taken, and vacuum-dried to obtain a pale yellow powder to obtain 19.5 g of 2-bromo- 4,6-dimethylbenzopyrene. The yield was 4,6-dimethyl The base benzofuran is 76%. [Synthesis of 4,6-dimercaptobenzopyrene-2-carboxylic acid _i] 2-Mercapto-4,6-dimethylbenzofuran 19.50 § (112111111〇1), guanamine sulfuric acid 13.04 g (l34 mmol) and 100 mL of pure water were mixed, cooled in an ice bath, and a solution of 12.15 g (134 mmol) of water in 100 mL of sodium chlorite was added dropwise. Water bath The reaction was carried out for 36 hours, and 100 mL of toluene and 25 g of potassium hydroxide were added to the reaction solution to adjust the pH to 12. The liquid layer was separated, and the aqueous layer was recovered, and the aqueous layer was washed with 200 mL of toluene. After adjusting the pH to 2 with 2 N-hydrochloric acid, 4 mL of toluene was added to carry out liquid separation. The organic layer was recovered by dehydration with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and then concentrated under reduced pressure using an evaporator, and dried in vacuo to obtain 4,6-dimercaptobenzofuran-2-carboxylic acid 14.27 g as a yellow powder. The yield was 67% based on 2-carbamimido-4,6-dimethylbenzofuran. 4,6-Dimethylbenzopyrene-2-decanoic acid can also be synthesized by the following scheme. [Synthesis Example 2 of 4,6-Dimethylbenzon-f--2-decanoic acid]

使3,5-一曱基苯紛150 g(1227 mmol)、多聚甲搭230.1 g (7674 mmol)、無水氣化鎂175.4 g(1842 mm〇1)分散於乙腈 154080.doc •126- 201133033 900 mL中。於冰浴下攪拌30分鐘後,用兩小時滴加三乙基 胺474 g(4681 mmol)。使混合液於水浴下反應8小時、於室 溫下反應14小時。於反應液中添加冷5 N-鹽酸1500 mL, 變成酸性後,以400 mL之乙酸乙酯進行分液,回收有機 層。進而以400 mL之乙酸乙酯對水層進行分液。回收有機 層,與先前之有機層合併’以無水硫酸鈉進行脫水後,利 用蒸發器進行減壓濃縮。使殘淺溶解於4〇〇 mL曱苯中,添 加活性碳3 g、矽膠20 g ’於室溫下攪拌30分鐘,進行過 濾。回收濾液,利用蒸發器進行減壓濃縮,並進行真空乾 燥’藉此作為橙色黏稠液體而獲得4,6-二甲基水楊醛no g。產率以3,5-二甲基苯酚基準計為92%。 使4,6 - _甲基水楊酸45_0 g(300 mmol)、石炭酸卸1〇1 g (300 mmol)、分散於N,N,_二甲基乙醯胺36〇 。加溫至 80 C後,用1小時滴加溴乙酸乙酯5〇.〇 g(3〇〇 mmol)。使混 合液於80 C下反應4小時。將反應液冷卻至室溫後,添加 甲基異丁基酮400 mL’以冷1 N-鹽酸1〇〇〇 mL使其變成酸 性後’進行分液。將有機層以1 〇〇〇 mL之純水清洗3次,回 收有機層。以無水硫酸鈉進行脫水後,利用蒸發器蒸德去 除溶劑。於殘渣中添加氫氧化鉀4〇 g、乙醇4〇〇 mL,於 80 C下攪拌1小時。放冷至室溫後,利用蒸發器蒸餾去除 溶劑,添加純水1〇〇〇 mL。確認ρΗ值為12以上後,將水層 以甲苯清洗兩次、以庚烷清洗一次。回收本層,以4 N-硫 酸加以中和’將pH值調節至3。濾取析出之黃色沈澱,以 純水進行懸浮清洗後,進行真空乾燥,藉此作為黃色粉末 154080.doc -127- 201133033 而獲付4,6 -二甲基苯并0夫〇南-2 -曱酸48.1 g。產率以4,6 -二甲 基水楊醛基準計為83%。 [化合物(11 -a)之合成例] 將2,5-二甲氧基苯胺11.49 g(75.0 mmol)、4,6-二甲基苯 并呋喃-2-甲酸 14.27 g(75.7 mmol)、三乙基胺 7.59 g(75.0 mmol)、N,N’-二甲基胺基吡啶1.83 g( 15.0 mmol)及脫水 N,N'-二甲基乙醯胺100.0 g加以混合。以冰浴將所得之溶 液冷卻後,添加BOP試劑34.85 g(82.5 mmol),於室溫下反 應24小時。於所得之混合液中添加水、曱醇之混合溶液 (水2體積份、甲醇1體積份)’進行晶析。濾取所得之沈 澱’以水-曱醇之混合溶液(水3體積份、甲醇2體積份)加以 清洗’進行真空乾燥’作為淡黃色粉末而獲得化合物(i i _ a)16.2 g。產率以2,5-二甲氧基笨胺基準計為66%。 [化合物(Π-b)之合成例] 將化合物(ll-a)16.0 g(49 mmol)、2,4-雙(4-甲氧基苯基) -1,3-—硫雜-2,4-二磷雜環丁烧-2,4-二硫化物(勞森試劑)9·2 g(30.0 mmol)及曱苯100 g加以混合,使所得之混合液升溫 至80°C,反應12小時。冷卻後進行濃縮,獲得以化合物 (11 -b)與勞森試劑之分解物作為主成分之紅色黏稠固體。 [化合物(11-c)之合成例] 將前項中所得之包含化合物(11 -b)之混合物、氫氧化鈉 11.8 g(262 mmol)及水250 g加以混合,使所得之混合液於 冰浴冷卻下反應。繼而’於冰浴冷卻下添加包含鐵氰化卸 44.17 g(134 mmol)之水溶液,使其反應。於6〇χ:下使其反 154080.doc -128- 201133033 應12小時,濾取析出之黃色沈澱。將濾取之沈澱以水、繼 而以己烷加以清洗,利用甲苯使其結晶化。真空乾燥所得 之黃色沈澱,獲得以化合物(11-c)作為主成分之土黃色固 體4.1 g。產率以化合物(11-a)基準計為25%。 [化合物(ΙΙ-d)之合成例] ΟDisperse 3,5-monodecylbenzene 150 g (1227 mmol), polymethylate 230.1 g (7674 mmol), anhydrous magnesium oxide 175.4 g (1842 mm〇1) in acetonitrile 154080.doc •126- 201133033 900 mL. After stirring for 30 minutes in an ice bath, 474 g (4681 mmol) of triethylamine was added dropwise over two hours. The mixture was reacted in a water bath for 8 hours and at room temperature for 14 hours. After adding 1500 mL of cold 5 N-hydrochloric acid to the reaction mixture to become acidic, the mixture was separated by 400 mL of ethyl acetate to recover an organic layer. The aqueous layer was separated by 400 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layer was recovered and combined with the previous organic layer. After dehydration with anhydrous sodium sulfate, it was concentrated under reduced pressure using an evaporator. The residue was dissolved in 4 mL of hydrazine, and 3 g of activated carbon and 20 g of phthalocyanine were added and stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, and filtered. The filtrate was recovered, concentrated under reduced pressure using an evaporator, and vacuum dried to thereby obtain 4,6-dimethyl salicylaldehyde no g as an orange viscous liquid. The yield was 92% based on 3,5-dimethylphenol. 4,6--methylsalicylic acid 45_0 g (300 mmol), carbolic acid was removed 1 〇 1 g (300 mmol), and dispersed in N,N, dimethylacetamide 36 〇. After heating to 80 C, ethyl bromoacetate 5 〇.〇 g (3 〇〇 mmol) was added dropwise over 1 hour. The mixture was reacted at 80 C for 4 hours. After the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, 400 mL of methyl isobutyl ketone was added thereto to make it acidic after cooling 1 N-hydrochloric acid 1 〇〇〇 mL. The organic layer was washed 3 times with 1 〇〇〇 mL of pure water, and the organic layer was recovered. After dehydration with anhydrous sodium sulfate, the solvent was removed by evaporation using an evaporator. Potassium hydroxide 4 〇 g, 4 mL of ethanol was added to the residue, and the mixture was stirred at 80 ° C for 1 hour. After allowing to cool to room temperature, the solvent was distilled off by means of an evaporator, and 1 mL of pure water was added. After confirming that the value of ρ Η was 12 or more, the aqueous layer was washed twice with toluene and once with heptane. This layer was recovered and neutralized with 4 N-sulfuric acid to adjust the pH to 3. The precipitated yellow precipitate was collected by filtration, suspended and washed with pure water, and then vacuum-dried to obtain 4,6-dimethylbenzoxefonium-2 as a yellow powder 154080.doc -127-201133033. Tannic acid 48.1 g. The yield was 83% based on 4,6-dimethyl salicylaldehyde. [Synthesis Example of Compound (11-a)] 11.49 g (75.0 mmol) of 2,5-dimethoxyaniline and 14.27 g (75.7 mmol) of 4,6-dimethylbenzofuran-2-carboxylic acid, three Ethylamine 7.59 g (75.0 mmol), N,N'-dimethylaminopyridine 1.83 g (15.0 mmol) and dehydrated N,N'-dimethylacetamide 100.0 g were mixed. After cooling the resulting solution in an ice bath, 34.85 g (82.5 mmol) of BOP reagent was added, and the mixture was allowed to react at room temperature for 24 hours. To the resulting mixed liquid, a mixed solution of water and decyl alcohol (2 parts by volume of water and 1 part by volume of methanol) was added to carry out crystallization. The resulting precipitate was collected by washing with water-sterol mixed solution (3 parts by volume of water, 2 parts by volume of methanol) and vacuum-dried as a pale yellow powder to obtain 16.2 g of the compound (i i - a). The yield was 66% based on 2,5-dimethoxyaniline. [Synthesis Example of Compound (Π-b)] Compound (ll-a) 16.0 g (49 mmol), 2,4-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3-thia--2, 4-diphosphazin-2,4-disulfide (Lawson's reagent) 9·2 g (30.0 mmol) and 100 g of toluene are mixed, and the resulting mixture is heated to 80 ° C, reaction 12 hour. After cooling, it was concentrated to obtain a red viscous solid having a compound (11-b) and a decomposition product of Lawson's reagent as a main component. [Synthesis Example of Compound (11-c)] A mixture comprising the compound (11-b) obtained in the above paragraph, sodium hydroxide 11.8 g (262 mmol) and water 250 g were mixed, and the resulting mixture was placed in an ice bath. The reaction was carried out under cooling. Then, an aqueous solution containing 44.17 g (134 mmol) of ferricyanide was added under ice-cooling to cause a reaction. At 6 〇χ: under the 154080.doc -128- 201133033 should be 12 hours, the precipitation of the yellow precipitate. The precipitate which was collected by filtration was washed with water, then hexane, and then crystallised with toluene. The obtained yellow precipitate was dried under vacuum to give 4.1 g of yel solid, which had compound (11-c) as a main component. The yield was 25% based on the compound (11-a). [Synthesis Example of Compound (ΙΙ-d)] Ο

將化合物(ll-c)4.0 g(12.0 mmol)及氣化吡啶鑌40.0 g(i〇 倍質量)加以混合,升溫至1 80°C,使其反應3小時。將所 得之混合液添加至冰中’濾取所得之沈澱。以水進行懸浮 清洗後’利用曱笨加以清洗,進行真空乾燥,獲得以化合 物(ΙΙ-d)作為主成分之土黃色固體34 g。產率以化合物 (11-c)基準計為93%。 [化合物(All-1)之合成例] 將化合物(ll-d)3.00 g(9.64 mmol)、化合物(e)8 47 g (20.23 mmol) 一甲基月女基D比唆0.12 g(〇.96 mmol)及氣仿 40 mL加以混合。於冰浴冷卻下,於所得之混合液中添加 N,N’-二異丙基碳二醯亞胺2 92 g(23i2爪^⑽丨)。使所得之 反應溶液於室溫下反應—整夜,進行料過濾後,進行減 壓濃縮。於㈣中添加甲醇使其結晶化。濃取結晶,使其 再次溶解於氯仿中,添加〇 3 (7夕、、去以 A刀口 u g之活性碳,於室溫下攪拌— 小時。過濾溶液,利用基路哭 •用為發益對濾液進行減壓濃縮直至達 到1 /3為止,然後一面授掉一 ^ C* . m 榥仟面添加甲醇,濾取生成之白 色沈满X,以庚垸加以清洗,進行真办 丁具二乾紐’以白色粉末獲 付化合物(Α11-1)7·60 g。產率以外人 8屋羊以化合物(ΙΙ-d)基準計為 71%。 1 154080.doc •129- 201133033 化合物(All-1)之1H-NMR (CDC13) : δ (ppm) 1.45〜i.85 (m、24H)、2.36-2.87 (m、18H)、3.93〜3.97 (t、4H)、 4.15~4.20(t、4H)、5.79〜5.84(dd、2H)、6.07~6.17(m、 2H)、6-37~6.45(m、2H)、6.87〜7.01(m、9H)、7.20(s、 1H)、7.23 (s、2H)、7.53 (s、1H) 藉由利用偏光顯微鏡之紋理(texture)觀察而確認所得化 合物(A11-1)之相轉移溫度。化合物(Α11_υ於升溫時自 105°C至137°C為止顯示出黏性較高之中間相。液晶相之判 別困難,但於137。(:以上呈現明確之向列液晶相。至18〇七 以上仍為向列液晶相,降溫時,降至6丨之時呈現向列相 且結晶化。 (化合物(x-a)之製造例) 化合物(x-a)係利用與j, Chem s〇c,Μ— 丁咖」期、 205 21G頁(2G〇〇年)中記載之方法同等之以下之流程而合 成即’除了將上述所記載之合成法之苯甲酿氯變更為2_ °塞吩曱酿氯以外’以同樣之方法進行合成。 進而’化合物(X_a)係將化合物(x-d)20.0 g(72.1 mmol)與 氯化。比咬鑌100.0 g(5俾所县、丨 倍貝量)加以混合,將所得之混合液 升溫至220。(:,進行撸妓、人,、 订復#。冷郃混合液後’添加水,過濾 分離所得之沈澱,」 乂水及正庚烷加以清洗,獲得以化合物 (x-a)作為主成分之固體174 . 口體17.4 g。產率以化合物(X-d)基準計 肩? 9 7 %) 〇 154080.doc 130· 201133033 H2Vn h3co-^^-o ch3The compound (ll-c) 4.0 g (12.0 mmol) and the vaporized pyridinium 40.0 g (i〇 mass) were mixed, and the temperature was raised to 180 ° C to carry out a reaction for 3 hours. The resulting mixture was added to ice. The resulting precipitate was filtered off. After washing with water, it was washed with a sputum and vacuum-dried to obtain 34 g of a khaki solid having a compound (ΙΙ-d) as a main component. The yield was 93% based on the compound (11-c). [Synthesis example of compound (All-1)] Compound (ll-d) 3.00 g (9.64 mmol), compound (e) 8 47 g (20.23 mmol), monomethyl valeryl D is 0.12 g (〇. 96 mmol) and 40 mL of gas were mixed. To the resulting mixture, 2,92 g of N,N'-diisopropylcarbodiimide (23i2-claw(10)丨) was added under ice-cooling. The resulting reaction solution was allowed to react at room temperature overnight, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Methanol was added to (iv) to crystallize it. Concentrate the crystals, dissolve them again in chloroform, add 〇3 (7 、, go to A knife ug of activated carbon, stir at room temperature - hour. Filter the solution, use the base to cry • use for the benefit pair The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure until it reached 1/3, and then a portion of C ^ . m was added to the surface to add methanol, and the resulting white plump X was filtered and washed with gadolinium. New's compound was obtained as a white powder (Α11-1) 7.60 g. The yield of the other 8 sheep was 71% based on the compound (ΙΙ-d). 1 154080.doc •129- 201133033 Compound (All- 1) 1H-NMR (CDC13): δ (ppm) 1.45~i.85 (m, 24H), 2.36-2.87 (m, 18H), 3.93~3.97 (t, 4H), 4.15~4.20 (t, 4H) ), 5.79~5.84 (dd, 2H), 6.07~6.17 (m, 2H), 6-37~6.45 (m, 2H), 6.87~7.01 (m, 9H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 7.23 (s 2H), 7.53 (s, 1H) The phase transition temperature of the obtained compound (A11-1) was confirmed by observation using a texture of a polarizing microscope. The compound (Α11_υ was heated from 105 ° C to 137 ° C at a temperature rise) Showing a higher viscosity intermediate phase. The discrimination is difficult, but it is 137. (: The above shows a clear nematic liquid crystal phase. It is still a nematic liquid crystal phase above 18〇7, and when it is cooled down, it exhibits a nematic phase and crystallizes when it falls to 6丨. (Production Example of (xa)) The compound (xa) is synthesized by the following procedure equivalent to the method described in j, Chem s〇c, Μ-丁咖期, 205 21G page (2G 〇〇年). The synthesis was carried out in the same manner except that the styrene-brewed chlorine of the synthetic method described above was changed to 2 ° °, and the compound (X_a) was compound (xd) 20.0 g (72.1 mmol). Chlorination. Mixing 100.0 g (5 俾 丨 丨 丨 丨 丨 ) , , , , , , , 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 升温 ( ( ( ( 'Adding water, filtering and separating the resulting precipitate, and washing with water and n-heptane to obtain a solid 174 having a compound (xa) as a main component. 17.4 g of a mouth. The yield is based on the compound (Xd). 7 %) 〇154080.doc 130· 201133033 H2Vn h3co-^^-o ch3

勞森試劑 〇ch3 h3c yLQ aq. K3[Fe(CN)6] HN^&quot; 1.5M NaOH ^ 〇-^^-〇CH3 h3co-^^-och3 x-c x-dLawson reagent 〇ch3 h3c yLQ aq. K3[Fe(CN)6] HN^&quot; 1.5M NaOH ^ 〇-^^-〇CH3 h3co-^^-och3 x-c x-d

BBr3BBr3

〇-〇-°〇-〇-°

H &lt;化合物(x-1)之合成例&gt; 以與化合物(All-1)之合成例同樣之方法,除將化合物 (11-d)變更為化合物(x-a)以外,利用同樣之方法獲得化合 物(x-Ι)。產率以化合物(x-a)基準計為84%。H &lt;Synthesis Example of Compound (x-1)&gt; In the same manner as in the synthesis example of the compound (All-1), except that the compound (11-d) was changed to the compound (xa), the same method was used. Compound (x-Ι). The yield was 84% based on the compound (x-a).

化合物(x-Ι)之1H-NMR (CDC13): δ (ppm) 1.43〜1.83 (m、 24H)、2.29〜2.82 (m、12H)、3.92〜3.97 (t、4H)、 4.15〜4.20 (t、4H)、5.80-5.84 (dd、2H)、6.07〜6.18 (m、 2H)、6.37〜6.44 (m、2H)、6.86-7.02 (m、8H)、7.12 (dt、 1H)、7.18 (s、2H)、7.51 (dd、1H)、7.63 (dd、1H) 藉由利用偏光顯微鏡之紋理觀察而確認所得化合物(x-1) 之相轉移溫度。化合物(x-Ι)於升溫時,自101°C至l〇6°C為 止呈現層列相,自1 〇6°C至180°C以上仍呈現向列相,於降 溫時,降至81 °C之時呈現向列相且結晶化。 [實施例1及2、比較例1及2] 以成為表3所示之組成之方式混合各成分,獲得組合物1 及組合物2。 表3係表示各成分相對於組合物總量之含量(質量%)。 [表3] 組合物1/質量% 組合物2/質量% 聚合性液晶化合物 A-11/18.69 x-1/4.67 b/29.12 聚合起始劑 Irgacure 369/1.64 Irgacure 907/0.87 調平劑 BYK361N/0.003 BYK361N/0.004 溶劑 環戊酮/75 環戊酮/70 154080.doc -131 - 201133033 液晶化合物b :下述式所表示之化合物(Poliocolor LC242 ; BASF公司製造) 3-〇-(CH2)4-〇^ ^^0-^-0^· ^ 10242 組合物1之光聚合性起始劑:Irgacure369(Ciba Japan股 份有限公司製) 組合物2之光聚合性起始劑:Irgacure907(Ciba Japan股 份有限公司製) 調平劑:BYK361N(BYK-Chemie Japan製造) &lt;相位差板(a)之製造例&gt; 於玻璃基板(EAGLE2000,平岡特殊硝子製作股份有限 公司製造)上塗佈聚乙烯醇(聚乙烯醇1000完全皂化型,和 光純藥工業股份有限公司製造)之2質量%水溶液,乾燥 後,形成厚度89 nm之膜。繼而,對所得膜之表面實施摩 擦處理。摩擦處理係使用半自動摩擦裝置(商品名:LQ-008型,常陽工學股份有限公司製造),藉由布(商品名: YA-20-RW,吉川化工股份有限公司製造),於壓入量為 0.1 5 mm、轉速為500 rpm、1 6.7 mm/s之條件下進行。繼 而,於實施有摩擦處理之面,藉由旋塗法,以硬化後之膜 厚成為表4所記載之膜厚之方式塗佈表3所記載之組合物, 以表4所記載之溫度加熱,獲得單疇配向之塗膜。其後, 保持於表4所記載之溫度,以表4所記載之曝光量照射紫外1H-NMR (CDC13) of the compound (x-indole): δ (ppm) 1.43 to 1.83 (m, 24H), 2.29 to 2.82 (m, 12H), 3.92 to 3.97 (t, 4H), 4.15 to 4.20 (t , 4H), 5.80-5.84 (dd, 2H), 6.07~6.18 (m, 2H), 6.37~6.44 (m, 2H), 6.86-7.02 (m, 8H), 7.12 (dt, 1H), 7.18 (s 2H), 7.51 (dd, 1H), 7.63 (dd, 1H) The phase transition temperature of the obtained compound (x-1) was confirmed by texture observation using a polarizing microscope. When the compound (x-Ι) is heated, it exhibits a smectic phase from 101 ° C to 16 ° C, and still exhibits a nematic phase from 1 〇 6 ° C to above 180 ° C, and drops to 81 when cooling. At °C, a nematic phase appears and crystallizes. [Examples 1 and 2, Comparative Examples 1 and 2] The components were mixed so as to have the compositions shown in Table 3, and Composition 1 and Composition 2 were obtained. Table 3 shows the content (% by mass) of each component with respect to the total amount of the composition. [Table 3] Composition 1% by mass Composition 2/% by mass Polymerizable liquid crystal compound A-11/18.69 x-1/4.67 b/29.12 Polymerization initiator Irgacure 369/1.64 Irgacure 907/0.87 Leveling agent BYK361N/ 0.003 BYK361N/0.004 Solvent cyclopentanone/75 cyclopentanone/70 154080.doc -131 - 201133033 Liquid crystal compound b: a compound represented by the following formula (Poliocolor LC242; manufactured by BASF Corporation) 3-〇-(CH2)4- 〇^ ^^0-^-0^· ^ 10242 Photopolymerizable starter of composition 1 : Irgacure 369 (manufactured by Ciba Japan Co., Ltd.) Photopolymerizable starter of composition 2: Irgacure 907 (Ciba Japan limited stock) Co., Ltd.) Leveling agent: BYK361N (manufactured by BYK-Chemie Japan) &lt;Production Example of Phase Difference Plate (a)&gt; Polyvinyl alcohol was coated on a glass substrate (EAGLE2000, manufactured by Hiraoka Special Glass Co., Ltd.) A 2% by mass aqueous solution of polyvinyl alcohol 1000 was completely saponified, and manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., and dried to form a film having a thickness of 89 nm. Then, the surface of the obtained film was subjected to a rubbing treatment. The friction treatment system uses a semi-automatic friction device (trade name: LQ-008 type, manufactured by Changyang Engineering Co., Ltd.), and the cloth is used (trade name: YA-20-RW, manufactured by Yoshikawa Chemical Co., Ltd.). 0.1 5 mm, 500 rpm, and 6.7 mm/s. Then, on the surface subjected to the rubbing treatment, the composition described in Table 3 was applied by the spin coating method so that the film thickness after hardening became the film thickness shown in Table 4, and the temperature was heated at the temperature shown in Table 4. , obtaining a single domain alignment coating film. Thereafter, the temperature is shown in Table 4, and the ultraviolet light is irradiated with the exposure amount shown in Table 4.

I 線(SP-7,Ushio股份有限公司製造)。藉此,於玻璃基板上 154080.doc -132- 201133033 獲得相位差板。 [表4] 相位差板 組合物 膜厚 (μηι) 塗佈後之 乾燥溫度 光照射時 之溫度 累積光量 (mJ/cm2) i 組合物1 2.1 140。。 90°C 2400 ii 組合物1 2.4 140。。 90°C 2400 vii 組合物1 2.2 140°C 90°C 2400 iii 組合物2 0.89 45〇C 室溫 2400 iv 組合物2 1.0 45 °C 室溫 2400 ix 組合物2 0.95 45〇C 室溫 2400 &lt;相位差板(b)之製造例&gt; 將聚胺基甲酸酯脲(商品名:胺基曱酸酯脲樹脂溶劑溶 液,Tyforce CS系列丙烯醯基導入型產品編號:CS-S-65,DIC股份有限公司(樹脂第二技術本部專業開發組〒 592-0001大阪府高石市高砂1-3)製造,重量平均分子量7 萬,不揮發分25°/。,黏度60,000,丙烯醯基當量重量(固 〇 形物成分換算)28,000)之溶液80份(以固形物成分量換算為 20份)、N_乙烯基咔唑6.5份、光聚合起始劑(1-羥基環己基 苯基酮、1巧3。1^6184;(3^&amp;】&amp;卩311股份有限公司製造)0.4 份、調平劑(聚醚改性聚矽氧油SH8400 ; Dow Corning Toray公司製造)0.01份、N,N-二曱基甲醯胺20份加以混合 後,於聚對苯二曱酸乙二酯製之脫模膜上,使用捲對捲 (roll to roll)成膜裝置,以800 μιη之塗佈厚度進行塗佈,於 l〇〇°C下乾燥25分鐘,進行UV照射(高壓水銀燈:每1 Pass 154080.doc -133- 201133033 為672 mJ/cm2 : 365 nm),獲得膜。使用拉幅延伸機,藉由 橫向單軸延伸,使所得之膜延伸3倍,獲得相位差板v。 作為相位差板vi,係使用聚碳酸酯系單軸延伸膜(Pure-AceWRS-142;帝人化成製造)。 &lt;光學特性之測定&gt; 相位差板之相位差值(nm)之測定係不將於玻璃基板上製 成之相位差板自玻璃基板剝離而利用測定機(KOBRA-WR,王子計測機器公司製造)進行測量。用於基材之玻璃 基板幾乎不具有雙折射性,故即便不剝離而進行測定,亦 可獲得於玻璃基板上所製作之相位差板之相位差值。將立 體顯示系統之顯示裝置側及眼鏡側所使用的相位差板之波 長45 1 nm、549 nm、及62 8 nm下之相位差值示於表5中。 又,根據其相位差值之值而算出[Re(451)/Re(549)](設為α) 及[Re(628)/Re(549)](設為 β)。 [表5] 相位差板 Re(451)(nm) Re(549)(nm) Re(628)(nm) a β 實施例1 i 117 132 134 0.89 1.0 實施例2 ii 131 148 151 0.89 1.0 實施例3 V 118 138 144 0.86 1.0 實施例4 vi 126 139 142 0.90 1.0 實施例5 vii 124 138 140 0.90 1.0 比較例1 iii 133 124 119 1.1 0.97 比較例2 iv 158 147 142 1.1 0.97 比較例3 ix 152 140 136 1.1 0.97 154080.doc -134- 201133033 &lt;眼鏡用圓偏光板之製作&gt; 藉由將眼鏡用相位差板與偏光板(PVA(Polyvinyl Alcoho卜聚乙烯醇)層:Kuraray R Poval膜,片TAC品, 住友化學製造)貼合而製作眼鏡用圓偏光板1〇1。作為眼鏡 用相位差板1 〇 1係使用上述相位差板i〜ix。 &lt;用以測定亮度及色度之裝置&gt; 如圖10所示,於簡易暗室單元(產品編號:DRU-1515, 0 西格瑪光機(SIGMA KOKI Co.,LTD.)製造)中配置液晶顯示 裝置97(型號:N220W,HYUNDAI IT股份有限公司製 造)’於液晶顯示裝置97之畫面之一部分貼附顯示裝置用 相位差板98。此時,顯示裝置用相位差板98係於玻璃基板 上形成有相位差板,且以相位差板成為顯示裝置側、玻璃 基板成為下述色彩亮度計側之方式進行配置,並且以其遲 相轴方向與自液晶顯示裝置97發出之光之吸收軸方向(液 晶顯不裝置所具有之偏光板之吸收軸)向右或向左形成45 〇 度之角度之方式進行設置。再者,此處’所謂右或左,係 指自色彩亮度計100側觀察液晶顯示裝置97時之旋轉方 向。 作為顯示裝置用相位差板97,係使用上述相位差板 i〜ix。 液晶顯示裝置97之晝面中貼附有相位差板98之部分以外 以黑晝用紙進行遮光。又,以色彩亮度計(型號:bm_ 5A ’光源:F-10 ’拓普康股份有限公司(T〇pc〇N COKPORATION)製造)之透鏡筒前端到達於垂直方向上距 154080.doc -135· 201133033 離顯示裝置用相位差板98之面60 cm之位置的方式配置色 彩亮度計100,於其前端部分,以眼鏡用圓偏光板ι〇1與顯 示裝置用相位差板98平行之方式’且以偏光板面朝向色彩 亮度計100侧之方式安裝眼鏡用圓偏光板1〇1。又,眼鏡用 相位差板101與顯示裝置用相位差板98使用相同者。 色彩亮度計係經由RS-232C電纜而與個人電腦相連,色 彩亮度計之測定結果係使用電腦内之應用軟體(Ηπν^ Scope ’ Harver Lab.製造)而輸出。 &lt;亮度及色度之測定方法&gt; 使上述液晶顯示裝置97整個晝面顯示白色(γ=719、 x=0.301 &gt; y=〇.283) ° 以顯示裝置用相位差板98之遲相軸與液晶顯示裝置”所 具備的偏光板之吸收軸形成右45度之角度之方式(換言 之,以顯示裝置用相位差板98之遲相軸與液晶顯示裝置97 所具備的偏光板之穿透軸形成左45度之角度之方式)配置 顯示裝置用相位差板98。使安裝於色彩亮度計上之眼鏡用 圓偏光板1〇1旋轉,當顯示裝置用相位差板%之遲相軸之 方向與構成眼鏡用圓偏光板101之相位差板之遲相轴之方 向平行,且圓偏光板101所具備的偏光板之穿透軸與液晶 •頁不裝置97所具備的偏光板之穿透轴正交時,眼鏡用圓偏 光板101之角度設為明視野狀態下之〇度。 又’以顯示裝置用相位差板98之遲相軸與液晶顯示裝置 =所具備的偏光板之吸收軸形成左45度之角度之方式(換 。之’以顯示裝置用相位差板98之遲相轴與液晶顯示裝置 154080.doc 201133033 97所具備的偏光板之穿透軸形成右杉度之角度之方式)配 置顯示裝置用相位差板98。使安裝於色彩亮度計上之眼鏡 用圓偏光板101旋轉,當顯示裝置用相位差板之遲相軸之 方向與構成眼鏡用圓偏光板1〇1之相位差板之遲相軸之方 ' 向正交,且圓偏光板101所具備的偏光板之穿透軸與液晶 . 顯不裝置97所具備的偏光板之穿透軸正交時,眼鏡用圓偏 光板101之角度設為暗視野狀態下之〇度。 〇 自色彩亮度計觀察液晶顯示裝置97之情形時之眼鏡用圓 偏光板101之旋轉係將左轉方向設為正方向,使眼鏡用圓 偏光板101自明視野狀態或暗視野狀態之初始配置,以1〇 度為單位向右及向左旋轉直至達到40度為止,使用上述色 彩亮度計100測定此時之亮度γ及色度(χ,y)之值。將暗視 野下之測定結果示於表6中。 對比度係同一角度下之明視野狀態之亮度除以暗視野狀 態之亮度而算出。可認為,對比度越高,顯示裝置用相位 Q 差板98與眼鏡用圓偏光板ιοί之兩者中之漏光越少,通過 眼鏡所觀察到之圖像更加鮮明。 又,將各角度下之對比度值相對於〇度下之對比度值的 比表示為對比度保持率。對比度保持率越小,表示對比度 由於觀察角度之變化而進一步降低。 將實施例1、3、4及比較例1之結果示於表6中。 154080.doc -137· 201133033 [表6] 角度(度) 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 實施例1 Y 1.22 1.17 0.932 0.823 0.742 0.698 0.753 0.845 0.935 y 0.372 0.347 0.342 0.321 0.303 0.296 0.304 0.321 0.337 X 0.290 0.292 0.293 0.296 0.291 0.290 0.286 0.284 0.281 對比度保持率 61% 63% 79% 89% 100% 104% 96% 86% 80% 實施例3 Y 0.63 0.60 0.57 0.540 0.540 0.540 0.55 0.59 0.63 y 0.312 0.314 0.315 0.314 0.309 0.299 0.294 0.285 0.283 X 0.264 0.278 0.292 0.298 0.301 0.293 0.285 0.271 0.258 對比度保持率 86% 91% 94% 100% 100% 101% 96% 91% 85% 實施例4 Y 1.14 0.990 0.900 0.790 0.752 0.736 0.767 0.841 0.950 y 0.186 0.211 0.235 0.268 0.297 0.290 0.259 0.230 0.253 X 0.228 0.241 0.255 0.282 0.301 0.302 0.288 0.279 0.197 對比度保持率 65% 75% 83% 94% 100% 99% 94% 86% 75% 比較例1 Y 2.29 1.76 1.28 0.936 0.755 0.825 1.16 1.63 2.08 y 0.332 0.320 0.304 0.285 0.285 0.337 0.381 0.396 0.401 X 0.214 0.210 0.211 0.228 0.266 0.310 0.306 0.290 0.277 對比度保持率 33% 43% 56% 79% 100% 90% 64% 46% 36% 亮度Y及色度χ、y依據CIE 1931色度座標。 亮度Y之單位為cd/m2。 &lt;色再現性評價&gt; 以顯示裝置用相位差板98之遲相轴之方向與眼鏡用相位 差板101之遲相軸之方向平行的方式進行配置,且將色彩 亮度計100替換為分光放射計(型號:SR-3A,TOPCON TECHNOHOUSE股份有限公司製造),除此以外,製作與 上述「用以測定亮度及色度之裝置」同樣之裝置,測定入 154080.doc -138- 201133033 射至分光放射計之光之分光分佈。算出將未配置顯示裝置 用相位差板98及眼鏡用圓偏光板101之狀態下的分光分佈 設為基準之放射強度(10 0 %)之情形時的各波長下之放射強 度比。可認為,放射強度比越高,表示顯示裝置所射出之 光之損失越少,通過眼鏡所觀察到之圖像相對於顯示裝置 所顯示之圖像的色再現性越高。於表7中表示結果。 [表7] 波長 藍色區域 綠色區域 紅色區域 450 nm 470 nm 490 nm 525 nm 545 nm 565 nm 590 run 610 nm 630 nm 實施例2 76.6% 79.2% 85.3% 92.2% 94.5% 95.7% 99.9% 100% 100% 比較例2 60.3% 72.1% 83.7% 91.8% 97.4% 96.2% 100% 100% 98.7%Line I (SP-7, manufactured by Ushio Co., Ltd.). Thereby, a phase difference plate was obtained on the glass substrate 154080.doc -132-201133033. [Table 4] Phase difference plate Composition Film thickness (μηι) Drying temperature after coating Temperature at light irradiation Accumulated light amount (mJ/cm2) i Composition 1 2.1 140. . 90 ° C 2400 ii Composition 1 2.4 140. . 90°C 2400 vii Composition 1 2.2 140°C 90°C 2400 iii Composition 2 0.89 45〇C Room Temperature 2400 iv Composition 2 1.0 45 °C Room Temperature 2400 ix Composition 2 0.95 45〇C Room Temperature 2400 &lt;;Production Example of Phase Difference Plate (b)&gt; Polyurethane Urea (Trade Name: Aminophthalic Acid Urea Resin Solvent Solution, Tyforce CS Series Acryl Group Introduction Product Code: CS-S-65 , DIC Co., Ltd. (Resin Second Technology Division Professional Development Group 592 592-0001 Takashi-shi, Takashi-shi, Osaka) Manufactured with a weight average molecular weight of 70,000, a non-volatile content of 25°/, a viscosity of 60,000, and an acrylonitrile equivalent. 80 parts by weight (in terms of solid content) 28,000) (20 parts in terms of solid content), 6.5 parts of N-vinylcarbazole, photopolymerization initiator (1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone) , 1 巧 3, 1 ^ 6184; (3 ^ &amp; 】 & 卩 卩 311 Co., Ltd.) 0.4 parts, leveling agent (polyether modified polyoxygenated oil SH8400; manufactured by Dow Corning Toray) 0.01 parts, 20 parts of N,N-dimercaptocarbamide is mixed and then used on a release film made of polyethylene terephthalate, using a roll-to-roll ( Roll to roll) film forming apparatus, coating at a coating thickness of 800 μηη, drying at l〇〇°C for 25 minutes, and UV irradiation (high-pressure mercury lamp: 672 mJ per 1 Pass 154080.doc -133- 201133033) /cm2 : 365 nm), a film was obtained. Using a tenter stretching machine, the obtained film was stretched three times by lateral uniaxial stretching to obtain a phase difference plate v. As the phase difference plate vi, a polycarbonate system was used. Axial stretching film (Pure-AceWRS-142; manufactured by Teijin Chemicals Co., Ltd.) &lt;Measurement of optical characteristics&gt; The phase difference (nm) of the phase difference plate is measured by a phase difference plate which is not formed on a glass substrate. The substrate was peeled off and measured by a measuring machine (KOBRA-WR, manufactured by Oji Scientific Instruments Co., Ltd.). The glass substrate used for the substrate hardly has birefringence, so that it can be obtained on a glass substrate even if it is not peeled off. The phase difference value of the phase difference plate produced is shown in Table 5 in the phase difference between the wavelengths of 45 1 nm, 549 nm, and 62 8 nm of the phase difference plate used on the display device side and the glasses side of the stereoscopic display system. Also, based on the value of the phase difference value [Re(451)/Re(549)] (set to α) and [Re(628)/Re(549)] (set to β) [Table 5] Phase difference plate Re (451) (nm) Re (549) (nm) Re (628) (nm) a β Example 1 i 117 132 134 0.89 1.0 Example 2 ii 131 148 151 0.89 1.0 Example 3 V 118 138 144 0.86 1.0 Example 4 vi 126 139 142 0.90 1.0 Example 5 vii 124 138 140 0.90 1.0 Comparative Example 1 iii 133 124 119 1.1 0.97 Comparative Example 2 iv 158 147 142 1.1 0.97 Comparative Example 3 ix 152 140 136 1.1 0.97 154080.doc -134- 201133033 &lt;Circular Polarization for Glasses [Production of a plate] A polarizing plate for glasses is produced by laminating a phase difference plate for a pair of glasses with a polarizing plate (PVA (Polyvinyl Alcoho) layer: Kuraray R Poval film, sheet TAC product, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.) 1〇1. As the glasses, the phase difference plates 1 to ix are used for the phase difference plate 1 〇 1 . &lt;Device for measuring brightness and chromaticity&gt; As shown in Fig. 10, liquid crystal display is arranged in a simple darkroom unit (product number: DRU-1515, 0 SIGMA KOKI Co., LTD.) The device 97 (model: N220W, manufactured by HYUNDAI IT Co., Ltd.) attaches a phase difference plate 98 for a display device to a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 97. In this case, the phase difference plate 98 for display device is formed with a phase difference plate on the glass substrate, and the phase difference plate is placed on the display device side, and the glass substrate is placed on the color luminance meter side described below, and is delayed. The axial direction is set such that the absorption axis direction of the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device 97 (the absorption axis of the polarizing plate of the liquid crystal display device) forms an angle of 45 degrees to the right or left. Here, the term "right or left" refers to the direction of rotation when the liquid crystal display device 97 is viewed from the color luminance meter 100 side. As the phase difference plate 97 for a display device, the above-described phase difference plates i to ix are used. The portion of the liquid crystal display device 97 to which the phase difference plate 98 is attached is shielded by black paper. In addition, the front end of the lens barrel of the color brightness meter (model: bm_ 5A 'light source: F-10 'T〇pc〇N COKPORATION) reaches the vertical direction 154080.doc -135· 201133033 The color luminance meter 100 is disposed at a position of 60 cm from the surface of the phase difference plate 98 for the display device, and the front end portion is parallel to the phase difference plate 98 for the display device by the circular polarizing plate ι〇1 for the glasses. The circular polarizing plate 1〇1 for glasses is attached so that the polarizing plate surface faces the color luminance meter 100 side. Further, the phase difference plate 101 for glasses is the same as the phase difference plate 98 for display device. The color luminance meter is connected to a personal computer via an RS-232C cable, and the measurement results of the color luminance meter are output using an application software (manufactured by Ηπν^ Scope 'Harver Lab.) in the computer. &lt;Measurement method of luminance and chromaticity&gt; The white surface of the liquid crystal display device 97 is white (γ = 719, x = 0.301 &gt; y = 283.283) ° to the retardation of the phase difference plate 98 for the display device. The absorption axis of the polarizing plate provided in the shaft and the liquid crystal display device forms an angle of 45 degrees to the right (in other words, the retardation axis of the phase difference plate 98 for display device and the polarizing plate of the liquid crystal display device 97 are penetrated). The phase difference plate 98 for the display device is arranged such that the axis forms an angle of 45 degrees to the left. The lens mounted on the color luminance meter is rotated by the circular polarizing plate 1〇1, and the phase of the phase difference plate of the display device is delayed. The direction parallel to the direction of the slow phase axis of the phase difference plate constituting the circular polarizing plate 101 for glasses, and the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the circularly polarizing plate 101 and the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the liquid crystal/page device 97 In the case of the orthogonal direction, the angle of the circular polarizing plate 101 for the glasses is set to the brightness in the bright field state. Further, the retardation axis of the phase difference plate 98 for the display device and the absorption axis of the polarizing plate of the liquid crystal display device are formed. The angle of the left 45 degrees (change The display device phase difference plate 98 is disposed such that the slow phase axis of the phase difference plate 98 for the display device and the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the liquid crystal display device 154080.doc 201133033 97 form the angle of the right angle. The glasses mounted on the color luminance meter are rotated by the circular polarizing plate 101, and the direction of the slow phase axis of the phase difference plate for the display device and the retardation axis of the phase difference plate constituting the circular polarizing plate 1? When the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the circular polarizing plate 101 is orthogonal to the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the liquid crystal display device, the angle of the circular polarizing plate 101 for the glasses is set to the dark field state. In the case where the liquid crystal display device 97 is observed from the color luminance meter, the rotation direction of the circular polarizing plate 101 for glasses is set to the positive direction, and the circular polarizing plate 101 for the glasses is self-defining or dark. The initial configuration of the state is rotated to the right and left in units of 1 degree until reaching 40 degrees, and the value of the luminance γ and the chromaticity (χ, y) at this time is measured using the above-described color luminance meter 100. The measurement result shows In Table 6, the contrast is calculated by dividing the brightness of the bright field state at the same angle by the brightness of the dark field state. It is considered that the higher the contrast, the phase difference plate 98 for the display device and the circular polarizer ιοί for the glasses. The less the light leakage is, the more vivid the image is observed through the glasses. The ratio of the contrast value at each angle to the contrast value under the temperature is expressed as the contrast retention ratio. The smaller the contrast retention ratio is, the contrast is expressed. Further decrease due to the change in the observation angle. The results of Examples 1, 3, 4 and Comparative Example 1 are shown in Table 6. 154080.doc -137· 201133033 [Table 6] Angle (degrees) 40 30 20 10 0 - 10 -20 -30 -40 Example 1 Y 1.22 1.17 0.932 0.823 0.742 0.698 0.753 0.845 0.935 y 0.372 0.347 0.342 0.321 0.303 0.296 0.304 0.321 0.337 X 0.290 0.292 0.293 0.296 0.291 0.290 0.286 0.284 0.281 Contrast retention 61% 63% 79% 89 % 100% 104% 96% 86% 80% Example 3 Y 0.63 0.60 0.57 0.540 0.540 0.540 0.55 0.59 0.63 y 0.312 0.314 0.315 0.314 0.309 0.299 0.294 0.285 0.283 X 0.264 0.278 0.292 0.298 0.301 0.293 0.285 0.271 0.258 Contrast retention 86% 91% 94% 100% 100% 101% 96% 91% 85% Example 4 Y 1.14 0.990 0.900 0.790 0.752 0.736 0.767 0.841 0.950 y 0.186 0.211 0.235 0.268 0.297 0.290 0.259 0.230 0.253 X 0.228 0.241 0.255 0.282 0.301 0.302 0.288 0.279 0.197 Contrast retention rate 65% 75% 83% 94% 100% 99% 94% 86% 75% Comparative Example 1 Y 2.29 1.76 1.28 0.936 0.755 0.825 1.16 1.63 2.08 y 0.332 0.320 0.304 0.285 0.285 0.337 0.381 0.396 0.401 X 0.214 0.210 0.211 0.228 0.266 0.310 0.306 0.290 0.277 Contrast retention rate 33% 43% 56% 79% 100% 90% 64% 46% 36% Brightness Y and color χ, y according to CIE 1931 chromaticity coordinates. The unit of the luminance Y is cd/m2. &lt;Color Reproducibility Evaluation&gt; The direction of the slow axis of the phase difference plate 98 for display device is arranged in parallel with the direction of the slow axis of the phase difference plate 101 for glasses, and the color luminance meter 100 is replaced with the light beam. In addition to the radiometer (model: SR-3A, manufactured by TOPCON TECHNOHOUSE Co., Ltd.), the same device as the above-mentioned "device for measuring brightness and chromaticity" was produced, and the measurement was carried out at 154080.doc -138-201133033. The light distribution of the light of the spectroradiometer. The radiation intensity ratio at each wavelength when the spectral distribution in the state in which the phase difference plate 98 for the display device and the circular polarizing plate 101 for glasses is not disposed is used as the reference radiation intensity (100%). It is considered that the higher the radiation intensity ratio, the less the loss of light emitted by the display device, and the higher the color reproducibility of the image observed by the glasses with respect to the image displayed by the display device. The results are shown in Table 7. [Table 7] Wavelength Blue Region Green Region Red Region 450 nm 470 nm 490 nm 525 nm 545 nm 565 nm 590 run 610 nm 630 nm Example 2 76.6% 79.2% 85.3% 92.2% 94.5% 95.7% 99.9% 100% 100 % Comparative Example 2 60.3% 72.1% 83.7% 91.8% 97.4% 96.2% 100% 100% 98.7%

〈自傾斜方向之色度測定1 &gt; 使用與「用以測定亮度及色度之裝置」相同之裝置,將 顯示裝置用相位差板98及眼鏡用圓偏光板101以各自具備 之相位差板之遲相軸正交,且圓偏光板101之偏光板之穿 〇 透軸與液晶顯示裝置97所具備之偏光板之穿透軸平行之方 式進行設置。繼而,如圖11所示,以安裝於色彩亮度計 100上之眼鏡用圓偏光板101朝向顯示裝置用相位差板98之 中心a之方式進行配置。 沿著色彩亮度計之掃描方向102,自中心a起於同心圓上 之位置,且於仰角103為-60度至60度之位置,以20度為單 位變更色彩亮度計1 00之位置,測定色度(X,y)。自中心a 起至眼鏡用圓偏光板101為止之距離為35 cm。 154080.doc -139- 201133033 根據下述式,自所測定之色度(X,y)算出色差Δχγ。可 認為,色差Axy越小,隨著觀察位置之變化所觀察到之顏 色之變化越小。 △xy=((x(t)-x(〇))2+(y ⑴-y(O))2)0·5 (式中,x(t)表示仰角t度時之色度X。y⑴表示仰角t度時之 色度y) 測定於未配置顯示裝置用相位差板98及眼鏡用圓偏光板 101之狀態下所測定之色度(x〇,y〇),根據下述式算出與色 度(X,y)之差Δχ及Ay。可認為,Δχ及Ay越小,由通過顯示 裝置用相位差板及眼鏡用圓偏光板進行觀察所引起的顏色 變化越小。 Δχ=χ-χ〇 △y=y-y〇 [表8] 仰角(度) 實施例3 角度X 角度y Axy △X △y -60 0.316 0.310 0.039 0.010 0.013 -40 0.299 0.302 0.020 0.008 0.014 -20 0.287 0.291 0.005 0.008 0.013 0 0.283 0.289 0.000 0.008 0.013 20 0.284 0.290 0.001 0.008 0.013 40 0.295 0.302 0.018 0.008 0.014 60 0.313 0.313 0.038 0.010 0.013 色度(X,y)係依據CIE 1931色度座標。 &lt;自傾斜方向之色度測定2&gt; 154080.doc •140· 201133033 於「自傾斜方向之色度測定1」中使用之裝置中,於使 安裝於色彩亮度計100上之眼鏡用圓偏光板1〇1自色彩亮度 計100側觀察液晶顯示裝置97時向左旋轉3〇度之狀態下, 與上述同樣地測定色度(X,y),自所測定之色度(χ,y)算 出色差Axy。 [表9] 仰角(度) 實施例5 角度X 角度y △xy △X △y -60 0.323 0.314 0.047 0.017 0.017 -40 0.302 0.303 0.024 0.011 0.015 -20 0.287 0.292 0.005 0.008 0.014 0 0.282 0.289 0.000 0.007 0.013 20 0.284 0.292 0.003 0.008 0.015 40 0.298 0.304 0.021 0.011 0.016 60 0.319 0.316 0.046 0.016 0.016 &lt;一部分中含有充分滿足式之相位差板的立體顯示系統 Q 之亮度.色度評價〉 作為本發明之立體顯示系統之一例,如表1〇之實施例 6、實施例7所示,將僅於眼鏡或顯示裝置之任一者中配置 有充分滿足式(1)之相位差板而成的立體顯示系統導入&lt;用 以測疋冗度及色度之裴置 &gt; 中,使用與 &lt; 亮度及色度之測定 方法〉同樣之方法測疋亮度γ·色度(χ,y)。又,自所得之 值算出色差Axy。將暗視野下之色度測定結果與由其算出 之色差Axy —起示於表11中。 154080.doc • 141 - 201133033 [表 ίο] 眼鏡側相位差板 顯示裝置側 實施例6 ix vii 實施例7 vii ix 比較例3 ix ix [表 11] 角度(度) 40 20 0 -20 -40 實施例6 Y 1.83 1.71 1.59 1.60 1.69 y 0.124 0.158 0.227 0.257 0.204 X 0.198 0.210 0.269 0.326 0.324 Axy 0.125 0.091 0 0.064 0.061 實施例7 Y 1.60 1.17 0.95 0.94 1.24 y 0.112 0.120 0.130 0.122 0.111 X 0.200 0.204 0.206 0.206 0.202 Axy 0.019 0.010 0 0.008 0.020 比較例3 Υ 2.47 2.01 1.66 1.67 1.93 y 0.087 0.126 0.275 0.258 0.150 X 0.176 0.184 0.265 0.336 0.272 Δχγ 0.208 0.170 0 0.073 0.125 亮度Y及色度X,y係依據CIE 1931色度座標。 亮度Y之單元為cd/m2。 154080.doc -142- 201133033 根據上述實施例’可確認本發明之立體顯示系統即便於 改變觀察角度之情形時,對比度保持率仍較高,因此不管 觀察角度如何’於利用相位差板之偏光轉換中,漏光均較 少。進而顯示’由於在廣範圍之波長下顯示較高之放射強 . 1比,故自顯示裝置射出之光即便通過顯示裝置用相位差 . 板與構成眼鏡用圓偏光板之相位差板之兩者亦難以衰減, 色度亦難以發生變化。又顯示,本發明之立體顯示二统即 〇 便相對於顯示裝置自傾斜方向進行觀察,或者進而使眼鏡 傾斜進行觀察,所觀察到之色度仍難以發生變化。此外顯 示,僅於眼鏡觸4置m巾包含充分滿足式⑴之 相位差板的立體顯示系統亦可抑制伴隨觀察角度變化之色 度變化。 產業上之可利用性 本發明之立體顯示系統可降低對比度及顏色之角度依賴 性’可顯示及觀察優異之立體圖像。 〇 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1係表示本發明之半穿透式液晶顯示裝置31A之概略 圖。 圖2係表示本發明之半穿透式液晶顯示裝置Μ之另一概 略圖。 圖3係表示本發明之液晶顯示裝置51之概略圖。 係表不本發明之液晶顯示裝置以外之平板顯示裝置 61的概略圖。 圖5係表示本發明之液晶顯示裝置71八之概略圖。 154080.doc -143- 201133033 口 不本發明之液晶顯示裝置71B之概略圖。 ^係表示本發明之液晶顯示裝置加之概略圖。 示本發明之立體顯示系統用眼鏡”之概略圖 圖10传/本發明之立體顯示系統用眼鏡96之概略圖 二=示本發明之實施例中之評價條件… 評價條件之圖。 _方向之色度測定中所使月 【主要元件符號說明】<Measurement of Chromaticity from the Inclination Direction 1 &gt; Using the same device as the "device for measuring luminance and chromaticity", the phase difference plate 98 for display device and the circular polarizing plate 101 for glasses are provided with phase difference plates each. The retardation axes are orthogonal to each other, and the transmission axis of the polarizing plate of the circular polarizing plate 101 is disposed in parallel with the transmission axis of the polarizing plate provided in the liquid crystal display device 97. Then, as shown in Fig. 11, the spectacles circular polarizing plate 101 attached to the color luminance meter 100 is disposed toward the center a of the display device phase difference plate 98. In the scanning direction 102 of the color luminance meter, the position from the center a on the concentric circle, and the elevation angle 103 is -60 degrees to 60 degrees, the position of the color luminance meter 100 is changed in units of 20 degrees, and the position is determined. Chromaticity (X, y). The distance from the center a to the circular polarizing plate 101 for glasses is 35 cm. 154080.doc -139- 201133033 The color difference Δχγ is calculated from the measured chromaticity (X, y) according to the following formula. It can be considered that the smaller the color difference Axy, the smaller the change in color observed as the observation position changes. Δxy=((x(t)−x(〇))2+(y (1)-y(O))2)0·5 (where x(t) represents the chromaticity X at the elevation angle t. y(1) The chromaticity y) at the time of the elevation angle t is measured in the chromaticity (x〇, y〇) measured in a state where the display device phase difference plate 98 and the spectacles circular polarizing plate 101 are not disposed, and is calculated according to the following formula. The difference between chromaticity (X, y) Δχ and Ay. It is considered that the smaller the Δχ and Ay, the smaller the color change caused by observation by the phase difference plate for a display device and the circular polarizing plate for glasses. Δχ=χ-χ〇Δy=yy〇[Table 8] Elevation angle (degrees) Example 3 Angle X Angle y Axy △X Δy -60 0.316 0.310 0.039 0.010 0.013 -40 0.299 0.302 0.020 0.008 0.014 -20 0.287 0.291 0.005 0.008 0.013 0 0.283 0.289 0.000 0.008 0.013 20 0.284 0.290 0.001 0.008 0.013 40 0.295 0.302 0.018 0.008 0.014 60 0.313 0.313 0.038 0.010 0.013 The chromaticity (X, y) is based on the CIE 1931 chromaticity coordinate. &lt;Chromaticity measurement from the oblique direction 2&gt; 154080.doc • 140· 201133033 In the apparatus used in the "chromaticity measurement 1 from the oblique direction", the circular polarizing plate for glasses attached to the color luminance meter 100 is used. In the state in which the liquid crystal display device 97 is rotated to the left by 3 degrees from the color luminance meter 100 side, the chromaticity (X, y) is measured in the same manner as described above, and the measured chromaticity (χ, y) is calculated. Color difference Axy. [Table 9] Elevation angle (degrees) Example 5 Angle X Angle y Δxy △X Δy -60 0.323 0.314 0.047 0.017 0.017 -40 0.302 0.303 0.024 0.011 0.015 -20 0.287 0.292 0.005 0.008 0.014 0 0.282 0.289 0.000 0.007 0.013 20 0.284 0.292 0.003 0.008 0.015 40 0.298 0.304 0.021 0.011 0.016 60 0.319 0.316 0.046 0.016 0.016 &lt;Brightness of a stereoscopic display system Q containing a phase difference plate of a sufficient satisfaction. Colorimetric evaluation> As an example of the stereoscopic display system of the present invention, As shown in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment of the present invention, a stereoscopic display system in which the phase difference plate of the formula (1) is sufficiently disposed in only one of the glasses or the display device is introduced. In the measurement of the redundancy and the chromaticity, the brightness γ·chromaticity (χ, y) is measured in the same manner as the measurement method of &lt;luminance and chromaticity. Further, the color difference Axy is calculated from the obtained value. The results of the chromaticity measurement in the dark field are shown in Table 11 together with the color difference Axy calculated therefrom. 154080.doc • 141 - 201133033 [Table ίο] Glasses side phase difference plate display device side Embodiment 6 ix vii Example 7 vii ix Comparative example 3 ix ix [Table 11] Angle (degree) 40 20 0 -20 -40 Implementation Example 6 Y 1.83 1.71 1.59 1.60 1.69 y 0.124 0.158 0.227 0.257 0.204 X 0.198 0.210 0.269 0.326 0.324 Axy 0.125 0.091 0 0.064 0.061 Example 7 Y 1.60 1.17 0.95 0.94 1.24 y 0.112 0.120 0.130 0.122 0.111 X 0.200 0.204 0.206 0.206 0.202 Axy 0.019 0.010 0 0.008 0.020 Comparative Example 3 Υ 2.47 2.01 1.66 1.67 1.93 y 0.087 0.126 0.275 0.258 0.150 X 0.176 0.184 0.265 0.336 0.272 Δχγ 0.208 0.170 0 0.073 0.125 Brightness Y and chromaticity X, y are based on CIE 1931 chromaticity coordinates. The unit of the luminance Y is cd/m2. 154080.doc -142- 201133033 According to the above embodiment, it can be confirmed that the stereoscopic display system of the present invention has a high contrast retention ratio even when the viewing angle is changed, so that the polarization conversion using the phase difference plate is performed regardless of the observation angle. In the middle, there are fewer light leaks. Furthermore, it is shown that "the radiation emitted from the display device passes through the display device with a phase difference. The plate and the phase difference plate constituting the circular polarizing plate for the glasses are both displayed because the radiation intensity is high at a wide range of wavelengths. It is also difficult to attenuate and the chromaticity is hard to change. Further, it is shown that the stereoscopic display of the present invention is viewed from the oblique direction with respect to the display device, or the glasses are tilted for observation, and the observed chromaticity is hard to change. Further, it is also shown that the stereoscopic display system which sufficiently satisfies the phase difference plate of the formula (1) can suppress the change in chromaticity accompanying the change in the observation angle only in the case where the glasses are touched. Industrial Applicability The stereoscopic display system of the present invention can reduce the contrast and the angular dependence of color, and can display and observe an excellent stereoscopic image. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing a transflective liquid crystal display device 31A of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic view showing a transflective liquid crystal display device of the present invention. Fig. 3 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 51 of the present invention. A schematic view of a flat panel display device 61 other than the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is shown. Fig. 5 is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device 71 of the present invention. 154080.doc -143- 201133033 Port A schematic diagram of a liquid crystal display device 71B of the present invention. ^ is a schematic view showing a liquid crystal display device of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a schematic view showing the glasses for the stereoscopic display system of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the evaluation conditions in the embodiment of the present invention. The month of chromaticity measurement [main component symbol description]

31A ' 31B 32 、 52 、 72 33 、 40 、 53 、 55 、 63 、 73、82、93 ' 95 34、74 35 、 41 、 75 、 8131A ' 31B 32 , 52 , 72 33 , 40 , 53 , 55 , 63 , 73 , 82 , 93 ' 95 34 , 74 35 , 41 , 75 , 81

36 36A 36B 37 &gt; 77 38 &gt; 78 39 &gt; 79 42、56、64 ' 80 ' 92 半穿透式液晶顯示裝置 背光源 偏光板 公知之相位差板 基材 像素 背面反射電極部 背面透明電極部 液晶層 前面透明電極 彩色濾光片 相位差板(1) 43 ' 76 背面電極 51、71A、71B、71C、97液晶顯示裝置 54 ' 94 ' 96 液晶胞 154080.doc -144- 201133033 61 液晶顯不裝置以外之平板顯 示裝置 62 先前之平板顯示裝置 91 立體顯示系統用眼鏡 98 顯示裝置用相位差板 100 色彩亮度計 101 眼鏡用圓偏光板 102 掃描方向 103 仰角 a 顯示裝置用相位差板之中心 Ο 154080.doc -145-36 36A 36B 37 &gt; 77 38 &gt; 78 39 &gt; 79 42, 56, 64 ' 80 ' 92 Semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device Backlight polarizer Known phase difference plate substrate Pixel back Reflecting electrode part Back transparent electrode Part of the liquid crystal layer front transparent electrode color filter phase difference plate (1) 43 ' 76 back electrode 51, 71A, 71B, 71C, 97 liquid crystal display device 54 ' 94 ' 96 liquid crystal cell 154080.doc -144- 201133033 61 liquid crystal display Flat panel display device 62 other than the device Previous flat panel display device 91 Stereoscopic display system glasses 98 Display device phase difference plate 100 Color brightness meter 101 Glasses circular polarizing plate 102 Scanning direction 103 Elevation angle a Display device phase difference plate center Ο 154080.doc -145-

Claims (1)

201133033 七、申請專利範圍: 1. 種立體顯示系統,其包含交替地顯示右眼用圖像與左 眼用圖像之顯示裝置、及與上述顯示裝置交替地顯示之 圖像同步動作之液晶快門眼鏡, 上述顯示裝置與上述眼鏡均具有相位差板, 選自由上述顯示裝置所具有之相位差板及上述眼鏡所 具有之相位差板所組成之群中的至少一種為充分滿足式 (1)之相位差板: Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [式中’ Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]。 2. 如請求項1之立體顯示系統,其中顯示裝置所具有之相 位差板及眼鏡所具有之相位差板之兩者為充分滿足式〇) 之相位差板。 3. 如請求項1或2之立體顯示系統,其中顯示裝置具有將直 線偏光轉換為圓偏光之相位差板,且眼鏡具有將圓偏光 轉換為直線偏光之相位差板。 4·如請求項1之立體顯示系統,其中充分滿足式(1)之相位 差板係藉由使聚合性液晶化合物進行聚合而獲得之相位 差板。 5.如請求項4之立體顯示系統,其中聚合性液晶化合物為 式(A)所表示之化合物: ν-Ο^Ό^Ατ-Ό2^2^2 (A) [式中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含之兀 電子數Νπ為12以上、22以下; 154080.doc 201133033 D及D分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇 〇、_〇 c〇、 、-〇-C( = S)-、_crir2_、_crir2 cr3r4 〇cr1r2、 CR R 〇 -CR R2-〇-CR3R4-、_。11丨1^2-〇_。〇-、-〇-CO_ CR R CR R -〇-CO-CR3R4- &gt; -CR1R2-c〇-〇-CR3R4- 、-NRl_CR2R3·、_CRlR2-NR3·、-CO-NR1·或视LCO_ ; R 11、R及r4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數 1〜4之烷基; G及G分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基,該脂 裒式烃基中所含之亞甲基可經_〇_、_s_或取代,該 脂環式烴基中所含之次甲基可經下式 —N— 取代; L及L刀別獨立表不有機基’其中,選自由[丨及[2所 組成之群中之至少i種為具有聚合性基之基]。 6. 如吻求項5之立體顯示系統,其中l1為式(b)所表示之 基,且L2為式(C)所表示之基: pl-F 丨-W-AVeL (B) P2-F2-(B2-A2)rE2_ (C) [式中B B、E及E2分別獨立表示_cr5r6_、_CH2_CH2_ 〇 S -CO-O- - -O-CO- &gt; -O-CO-O- ' -C(=S)-0-OC(S)-〇-c(=s)-〇-、_c〇-NR5-、-NR5-CO-、-0-CH2_ 、-CH2-0-、-S-CHy、-ch2_s_或單鍵; R及R分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數1〜4之烷 154080.doc 201133033 * 基; A1及A2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基或碳數 6〜18之2價芳香族烴基,該脂環式烴基中所含之亞甲基 可經_〇_、_S•或-NH-取代,該脂環式烴基中所含之次甲 - 基可經下式 . —N— 取代; 〇 k及1分別獨立表示〇〜3之整數; F1及F2表示碳數1〜12之2價脂肪族烴基; P1表示聚合性基; p2表示氫原子或聚合性基]。 7.如請求項5之立體顯示系統,其中Ar為式(Ar6)A表示之 基·201133033 VII. Patent application scope: 1. A stereoscopic display system comprising a display device for alternately displaying an image for a right eye and an image for a left eye, and a liquid crystal shutter for synchronizing an image displayed alternately with the display device In the glasses, the display device and the glasses each have a phase difference plate, and at least one selected from the group consisting of the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses is sufficient to satisfy the formula (1). Phase difference plate: Re (451) &lt; Re (549) &lt; Re (628) (1) [In the formula, Re (v) represents the phase difference at a wavelength of v nm]. 2. The stereoscopic display system of claim 1, wherein the phase difference plate of the display device and the phase difference plate of the glasses are phase difference plates sufficiently satisfying the formula 〇). 3. The stereoscopic display system of claim 1 or 2, wherein the display device has a phase difference plate that converts linearly polarized light into circularly polarized light, and the lens has a phase difference plate that converts circularly polarized light into linearly polarized light. 4. The stereoscopic display system of claim 1, wherein the phase difference plate of the formula (1) sufficiently satisfies the phase difference plate obtained by polymerizing the polymerizable liquid crystal compound. 5. The stereoscopic display system of claim 4, wherein the polymerizable liquid crystal compound is a compound represented by the formula (A): ν-Ο^Ό^Ατ-Ό2^2^2 (A) [wherein, Ar represents aroma The divalent group of the ring, the number of 兀 electrons contained in the aromatic ring Νπ is 12 or more and 22 or less; 154080.doc 201133033 D and D respectively represent a single bond, _c〇〇, _〇c〇, , -〇- C( = S)-, _crir2_, _crir2 cr3r4 〇cr1r2, CR R 〇-CR R2-〇-CR3R4-, _. 11丨1^2-〇_. 〇-, -〇-CO_ CR R CR R -〇-CO-CR3R4- &gt; -CR1R2-c〇-〇-CR3R4-, -NRl_CR2R3·, _CRlR2-NR3·, -CO-NR1· or 视LCO_ ; R 11. R and r4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and G and G each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, which is contained in the lipid oxime hydrocarbon group. The methylene group may be substituted by _〇_, _s_ or substituted, and the methine group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by the following formula -N-; L and L knives independently represent an organic group. Free [丨 and [ at least one of the groups consisting of 2 is a group having a polymerizable group]. 6. The stereoscopic display system of Kiss 5, wherein l1 is a base represented by the formula (b), and L2 is a base represented by the formula (C): pl-F 丨-W-AVeL (B) P2-F2 -(B2-A2)rE2_ (C) [wherein BB, E and E2 respectively represent _cr5r6_, _CH2_CH2_ 〇S -CO-O- - -O-CO- &gt; -O-CO-O- ' -C (=S)-0-OC(S)-〇-c(=s)-〇-, _c〇-NR5-, -NR5-CO-, -0-CH2_, -CH2-0-, -S-CHy , -ch2_s_ or a single bond; R and R each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkane having a carbon number of 1 to 4; 154080.doc 201133033 * base; A1 and A2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic ring having a carbon number of 5 to 8. a hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, wherein the methylene group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by _〇_, _S• or -NH-, which is contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group The secondary methyl group can be substituted by the following formula: -N-; 〇k and 1 respectively represent an integer of 〇~3; F1 and F2 represent a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of 1 to 12; P1 represents a polymerizable group; Represents a hydrogen atom or a polymerizable group]. 7. The stereoscopic display system of claim 5, wherein Ar is a base represented by the formula (Ar6)A. [式中,Z表示鹵素原子、碳數ι〜6之烷基、氰基、硝 基、-NR7R8、_SR7 ; R7及R表示氫原子或碳數卜6之烷基; Q1 表示'S-、-〇-或-NR9-; R9表不氫原子或碳數1〜4之烷基; 154080.doc 201133033 Y2表示可具有取代基之碳數6〜丨2之芳香族烴基、或可 具有取代基之碳數3〜12之芳香族雜環式基; η表不0〜2之整數]。 8. 如請求項5之立體顯示系統,其中Gi及G2均為環己烷 1,4_ 二基。 9. 如s青求項5之立體顯示系統,其中聚合性基分別獨立為 選自由丙烯醯氧基及甲基丙烯醯氧基所組成之群中之至 少1種。 10. 如請求項1之立體顯示系統,其中充分滿足式(1)之相位 差板係使膜延伸而獲得之相位差板。 11. 如請求項10之立體顯示系統,其中膜包含源自聚碳酸酉旨 之結構單元、源自聚胺基甲酸醋之結構單元或源自聚胺 基曱酸酯脲之結構單元。 12 ·如睛求項11之立體顯示系統’其中膜進而包含源自具有 選自由咔唑骨架、苐骨架、苯并噻唑骨架及萘骨架所組 成之群中之至少1種的聚合性化合物之結構單元。 13. —種立體顯示系統用眼鏡,其係與顯示裝置交替地顯示 之圖像同步動作之液晶快門眼鏡,且具有充分滿足式(工) 之相位差板: Re(451)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) [式(1)中,Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]。 14·如請求項13之立體顯示系統用眼鏡’其中充分滿足式(1) 之相位差板係使式(A)所表示之化合物進行聚合而獲得之 相位差板: 154080.doc 201133033 L -G1-D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [式(A)中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基該芳香環中所含 之π電子數為12以上、22以下; D及Ε)分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇_〇_、_〇_c〇_、_c(=s)_〇_ 、-0-C( = S)-、-CWR2-、-CR^R'CR^R4-、-〇_CRiR2_、 -CRWo.、_cr1r2_〇_cr3r4、_cr1r2 〇 c〇、_〇 c〇 CR、2-、_cr1r2_〇_c〇_cr3r4 、cr1r2 c〇 〇 cr3r4 、-NR^-CR2!^3-、-CRiR2_NR3、_c〇 nr1 或 nr1_c〇 ; R、R、R3及R4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或礙數 1〜4之烷基; G及G2分別獨立表示碳數5~8之2價脂環式烴基,該脂 環式煙基中所含之亞曱基可經S_4_NH_取代,該 脂環式烴基_所含之次曱基可經下式 —N— L1及L2分別獨立表示有機基;其中,選自由^及匕2所 組成之群中之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基]。 15_如請求項13之立體顯示系統用眼鏡,其中充分滿足式(1) 之相位差板係使膜延伸而獲得之相位差板。 16. —種立體顯示系統用顯示裝置,其係交替地顯示右眼用 圖像與左眼用圖像之顯示裝置,且具有充分滿足式(丨)之 相位差板: Re(45 l)&lt;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) 154080.doc 201133033 [式(1)中’ Re(v)表示波長v nm下之相位差值]。 Π·如請求項16之立體顯示系統用顯示裝置’其中充分滿足 式(1)之相位差板係使式(A)所表示之化合物進行聚合而 獲得者: ^-^-Ό^-Αΐ-Ό^Ο2^2 (A) [式(A)中,Ar表示具有芳香環之2價基,該芳香環中所含 之π電子數為12以上、22以下; D1及D2分別獨立表示單鍵、_c〇_〇_、-〇_c〇-、_Cd)_〇_ ' -〇-C( = S)- ' -CR'R2- &gt; -CR^^CR^4- ' -O-CR'R2.. -CR^^O- &gt; -CR^^O-CR^4- ^ -CR^^O-CO- s -〇.〇0-CR^2- . -CR^^O-CO-CR3^- &gt; -CR^^CO-O-CR^4-、-NR^CR^R3-、-CR^R^-NR3-、-CO-NR1-或-NR^-CO-; R1、R2、R3及R4分別獨立表示氫原子、氟原子或碳數 1〜4之烷基; G1及G2分別獨立表示碳數5〜8之2價脂環式烴基,該脂 環式烴基中所含之亞甲基可經S_4_NH_取代,該 脂環式烴基中所含之次甲基可經下式 —N— I 取代; L1及L2分別獨立表示有機基;其中,選自由。及乙2所 組成之群中之至少1種為具有聚合性基之基]。 1 8.如請求項1 6之立體顯示系統用顯示裝置,其中充分滿足 式(1)之相位差板係使膜延伸而獲得之相位差板。 154080.doc[wherein, Z represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1-6, a cyano group, a nitro group, -NR7R8, or _SR7; and R7 and R represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having a carbon number of 6; Q1 represents 'S-, - 〇- or -NR9-; R9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; 154080.doc 201133033 Y2 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group having a carbon number of 6 to 丨2 which may have a substituent, or may have a substituent An aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms; η is not an integer of 0 to 2]. 8. The stereo display system of claim 5, wherein both Gi and G2 are cyclohexane 1,4_diyl. 9. The stereo display system of claim 5, wherein the polymerizable groups are independently at least one selected from the group consisting of acryloxyl groups and methacryloxy groups. 10. The stereoscopic display system of claim 1, wherein the phase difference plate of the formula (1) sufficiently satisfies the phase difference plate obtained by extending the film. 11. The stereoscopic display system of claim 10, wherein the film comprises a structural unit derived from polycarbonate, a structural unit derived from polyurethane, or a structural unit derived from polyamine phthalate urea. 12. The stereoscopic display system of claim 11, wherein the film further comprises a structure derived from a polymerizable compound having at least one selected from the group consisting of a carbazole skeleton, an anthracene skeleton, a benzothiazole skeleton, and a naphthalene skeleton. unit. 13. A stereoscopic display system eyeglass, which is a liquid crystal shutter eyeglass that operates in synchronization with an image displayed alternately by a display device, and has a phase difference plate that fully satisfies the formula: Re(451)&lt;Re(549 &lt;Re(628) (1) [In the formula (1), Re(v) represents a phase difference value at a wavelength of v nm]. 14. The stereoscopic display system for claim 13 wherein the phase difference plate sufficient to satisfy the formula (1) is a phase difference plate obtained by polymerizing a compound represented by the formula (A): 154080.doc 201133033 L -G1 -D1-Ar-D2-G2-L2 (A) [In the formula (A), Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the number of π electrons contained in the aromatic ring is 12 or more and 22 or less; D and Ε) Respectively represent a single key, _c〇_〇_, _〇_c〇_, _c(=s)_〇_, -0-C( = S)-, -CWR2-, -CR^R'CR^R4 -, -〇_CRiR2_, -CRWo., _cr1r2_〇_cr3r4, _cr1r2 〇c〇, _〇c〇CR, 2-, _cr1r2_〇_c〇_cr3r4, cr1r2 c〇〇cr3r4, -NR^- CR2!^3-, -CRiR2_NR3, _c〇nr1 or nr1_c〇; R, R, R3 and R4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having a hindrance of 1 to 4; G and G2 each independently represent a carbon number of 5 a valence ring hydrocarbon group of ~8, the fluorenylene group contained in the alicyclic group may be substituted by S_4_NH_, and the alicyclic group contained in the alicyclic group may be subjected to the following formula -N-L1 and L2 independently represents an organic group; wherein at least one selected from the group consisting of ^ and 匕2 has a poly group The substrate-yl]. The lens for a stereoscopic display system of claim 13, wherein the phase difference plate of the formula (1) sufficiently satisfies the phase difference plate obtained by extending the film. 16. A display device for a stereoscopic display system, which is a display device that alternately displays an image for a right eye and an image for a left eye, and has a phase difference plate that satisfies the formula (丨): Re(45 l)&lt;;Re(549)&lt;Re(628) (1) 154080.doc 201133033 [Re (v) in the formula (1) represents the phase difference value at the wavelength v nm]. The stereoscopic display system of claim 16 is obtained by a display device in which the compound represented by the formula (A) is sufficiently satisfied by the phase difference plate system of the formula (1): ^-^-Ό^-Αΐ- Ό^Ο2^2 (A) [In the formula (A), Ar represents a divalent group having an aromatic ring, and the number of π electrons contained in the aromatic ring is 12 or more and 22 or less; D1 and D2 each independently represent a single bond , _c〇_〇_, -〇_c〇-, _Cd)_〇_ ' -〇-C( = S)- ' -CR'R2- &gt; -CR^^CR^4- ' -O-CR 'R2.. -CR^^O- &gt; -CR^^O-CR^4- ^ -CR^^O-CO- s -〇.〇0-CR^2- . -CR^^O-CO -CR3^- &gt; -CR^^CO-O-CR^4-, -NR^CR^R3-, -CR^R^-NR3-, -CO-NR1- or -NR^-CO-; R1 And R2, R3 and R4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and G1 and G2 each independently represent a divalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, and the alicyclic hydrocarbon group is The methylene group may be substituted by S_4_NH_, and the methine group contained in the alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be substituted by the following formula -N-I; L1 and L2 each independently represent an organic group; And at least one of the group consisting of B and 2 is a group having a polymerizable group]. A display device for a stereoscopic display system according to claim 16, wherein the phase difference plate obtained by extending the film is sufficiently satisfied by the phase difference plate of the formula (1). 154080.doc
TW100104817A 2010-02-18 2011-02-14 Stereoscopic display system, glasses for stereoscopic display system, and display device for stereoscopic display system TWI611213B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010033420 2010-02-18
JP2010121480 2010-05-27

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201133033A true TW201133033A (en) 2011-10-01
TWI611213B TWI611213B (en) 2018-01-11

Family

ID=44464248

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW100104817A TWI611213B (en) 2010-02-18 2011-02-14 Stereoscopic display system, glasses for stereoscopic display system, and display device for stereoscopic display system

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2012008525A (en)
KR (1) KR20110095173A (en)
CN (1) CN102162930A (en)
TW (1) TWI611213B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI490552B (en) * 2013-08-20 2015-07-01 Sumika Technology Co Ltd Stereoscopic display apparatus

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102822175A (en) 2009-12-18 2012-12-12 埃迪尼克斯医药公司 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis C virus inhibitors
EP2660631B1 (en) * 2010-12-27 2018-12-05 DIC Corporation Birefringent lens material for stereoscopic image display device, and method of manufacturing birefringent lens for stereoscopic image display device
JP6019591B2 (en) * 2012-01-23 2016-11-02 住友化学株式会社 Composition and optical film
WO2014188907A1 (en) * 2013-05-21 2014-11-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for producing optical film
CN106278895B (en) * 2015-05-15 2021-07-09 Dic株式会社 Carboxylic acid compound, method for producing same, and liquid crystal composition using same
JP6403029B2 (en) * 2015-09-01 2018-10-10 Dic株式会社 Powder mixture
CN108368070B (en) * 2015-12-08 2023-04-28 Dic株式会社 Polymerizable compound and optically anisotropic body
JP2017197602A (en) * 2016-04-25 2017-11-02 住友化学株式会社 Liquid crystal composition and method for producing the same, and phase difference film composed of the liquid crystal composition
JPWO2018116836A1 (en) * 2016-12-20 2019-10-24 日本ゼオン株式会社 Method for producing polymerizable compound
WO2018199616A1 (en) * 2017-04-25 2018-11-01 주식회사 엘지화학 Optical device
JP7183312B2 (en) * 2021-01-15 2022-12-05 住友化学株式会社 Liquid crystal composition, method for producing the same, and retardation film composed of the liquid crystal composition

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002082307A (en) * 2000-06-21 2002-03-22 Sony Corp Three-dimensional image recording device and method for displaying three-dimensional image
JP3976040B2 (en) * 2004-09-17 2007-09-12 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device
JP4052314B2 (en) * 2005-03-28 2008-02-27 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device and image display device
JP2006337892A (en) * 2005-06-06 2006-12-14 Nitto Denko Corp Elliptically polarizing plate, liquid crystal panel, liquid crystal display device, and image display device
JP2007279091A (en) * 2006-04-03 2007-10-25 Teijin Ltd Transparent film
CN101094424A (en) * 2006-06-21 2007-12-26 胜华科技股份有限公司 Stereo image display device
US20080304151A1 (en) * 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Arisawa Mfg. Co., Ltd. Stereoscopic image display
CN101470212B (en) * 2007-12-28 2014-10-22 住友化学株式会社 Optical film
JP5463666B2 (en) * 2007-12-28 2014-04-09 住友化学株式会社 Compound, optical film and method for producing optical film

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI490552B (en) * 2013-08-20 2015-07-01 Sumika Technology Co Ltd Stereoscopic display apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI611213B (en) 2018-01-11
KR20110095173A (en) 2011-08-24
JP2012008525A (en) 2012-01-12
CN102162930A (en) 2011-08-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW201133033A (en) Three-dimensional display system
KR102106239B1 (en) Optical film
TWI546291B (en) Compositions and optical films
KR102079896B1 (en) Composition and optical film
JP5624393B2 (en) Composition and optical film
JP6019591B2 (en) Composition and optical film
TWI490200B (en) A trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound and a polymerizable composition containing the same
TWI731013B (en) Retardation film
JP5613992B2 (en) Composition, film and method for producing film
TW200936654A (en) Optical film
KR102242224B1 (en) Polarizing element, circular polarizing plate, and image display device
CN105131667B (en) Composition is used in light polarizing film formation
CN104339796A (en) Laminated body
CN102884158A (en) Composition
TW201734183A (en) Liquid crystal composition
JP2010126651A (en) Liquid crystalline composition and optical film
JP2010001284A (en) Compound and optical film
TW200918933A (en) Optical film and method for making an optical film
TW201326372A (en) Polymerizable liquid crystal composition and alignment film
CN113912496A (en) Compound having reverse wavelength dispersibility, composition containing the same, and optical film
CN113979866A (en) Compound having reverse wavelength dispersibility, composition containing the same, and optical film